JP2020099469A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 executes a notice performance for giving notice of a performance executed by a variable performance in the variation game concerned. The notice performance gives notice of execution of a false continuation performance, a development performance, a jackpot informing performance, and the like. When it is determined that plural notice performances including identical notice contents are executed, the game machine 10 executes a notice performance including notice of notice contents in a mode that can be identified from a previous notice performance when the notice contents (for example, a schedule for executing a performance having a high degree of expectation toward a jackpot) that are not scheduled by a notice performance determined first, are more advantageous to a player than notice contents in the previous notice performance, and relate to the notice contents in the previous notice performance exist for a notice performance to be executed later.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 97

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is notified by a variation game in which variation display and stop display are performed. In the variable game, a variable game effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit is executed in various effect devices such as a display device from the time the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable state until the stop table is displayed. .. This variable game effect includes a main effect continuously executed from the variable display of the decorative pattern until the stop table is displayed, and various notice effects executed in the middle of the main effect. The notice effect includes an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree in the variable game, an effect that explicitly or suggests an event that may occur in the variable game in the future such as an indication or suggestion of the development destination of the effect in the variable game effect. ..

Generally, the notice effect is executed as a step-up effect, a dialogue effect, a cut-in effect, a mini character effect, etc., and various notice effects are individually determined separately from the main effect at the start of the variable game. Therefore, the contents explicitly or suggested by various notice effects may be duplicated. Specifically, for example, it may be explicitly indicated or suggested that the step-up effect develops into the super effect, and then, it may be explicitly indicated or suggested that the step effect produces the super effect. In this case, since the advance notice effect executed first explicitly or suggests that the super reach effect will be developed, even if the later notice effect explicitly or suggests that the super reach effect is developed. Due to the effect, the player cannot obtain new information. On the other hand, the player expects that new information will be obtained even in the notice production executed later. As a result, when the same content is clearly indicated or suggested multiple times in one variation game, the player may feel uncomfortable with the notice production performed later, which lowers the interest in the game. It can also be a cause.

JP, 2016-198398, A

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game so as to improve the player's willingness to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
The additional effect information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification effect.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine shown in FIG. The perspective view which shows an example of the opening/closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, a clune device, and a game ball retention part. The perspective view of a klune device. Sectional drawing which follows the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. The 7-segment display section displays a specific period during which the game balls are retained in the game ball retention unit, a predetermined period during which the number of game balls that have entered the special out nozzle of the clune device is accumulated, and specific information indicating a non-set value. The figure for demonstrating a regulation period. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10B and 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. 11C. Is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main control apparatus typically. The figure which shows the example of a display on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the example of a display in the setting value display part of a performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process performed by the starting winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a display order setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. The figure which shows an example of the numerical display order determination table referred by the display order setting process of FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table and variation classification table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub timer interruption processing of FIG. 34. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40. The figure for demonstrating the 7 segment display part control-information storage area set to a voice lamp control device. The figure for demonstrating the control example of a segment display part, and the update example of a 7-segment display part control-information storage area. The figure for demonstrating the control example of a 7 segment display part. The figure for demonstrating the update example of a 7 segment display part control-information storage area. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of ending additional image control processing executed in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. 40. The figure which shows the example of a screen transition in the ending effect of a jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 48. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of ending additional image control processing executed in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. 48. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display order setting process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the table referred by the display order setting process of FIG. The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed by the operation detection process of FIG. A table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status. The figure which shows the example of a screen shift in a symbol display part in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64. The figure which shows the example of turning on/off in a lamp display part. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub timer interruption processing of FIG. 34. The figure for demonstrating the update example of the 7 segment display part control-information storage area set to a voice lamp control device. It is a figure showing an example of screen shift in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination processing performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 72. The figure which shows the relationship between various notice productions and notice contents. The figure which shows the example of a screen in the symbol display part of a pseudo-repeated notice production. 76(A) to 76(C) are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice content and the notice level of the notice effect, and FIG. 76(D) is a diagram for explaining the notice content resetting storage area. The figure for demonstrating the execution timing of notice production. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the pseudo continuous notice production setting process performed by the notice production setting process of FIG. 79(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the step-up effect setting process executed in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73, and FIG. 79(B) is a step-up in the step-up effect setting process of FIG. 79(A). The figure which shows an example of the step-up production timing selection table referred to in order to determine the performance execution timing. The figure which shows an example of the step-up effect type selection table referred to in order to determine a step-up effect in the step-up effect setting process of FIG. 79(A). 81(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the dialogue production setting processing executed in the notice production setting processing of FIG. 73, and FIG. 81(B) is the execution of the dialogue production in the dialogue production setting processing of FIG. 81(A). The figure which shows an example of the dialogue production timing selection table referred for determining timing. The figure which shows an example of the dialogue production classification selection table referred to in order to determine the dialogue production in the dialogue production setting process of FIG. 81(A). FIG. 83(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character group effect setting process executed in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73, and FIGS. 83(B) and 83(C) are the character group of FIG. 83(A). The figure which shows an example of the character group production timing selection table referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the character group production in production setting processing. The figure which shows an example of the character group production classification selection table referred in order to determine the character group production in the character group production setting process of FIG. 83(A). The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production resetting process performed by the notice production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production resetting process performed by the notice production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production resetting process performed by the notice production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production resetting process performed by the notice production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production|generation setting process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production resetting process performed by the notice production setting process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production resetting process performed by the notice production setting process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the notice production process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of additional information display processing executed in the notice effect processing of FIG. 93. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of additional information display processing executed in the notice effect processing of FIG. 93. The figure which shows the example of a 1st and 2nd aspect of pseudo|announcement notice production processing, and the example of a screen for demonstrating the example of a display of additional information. The figure showing the example of a screen for explaining the 1st mode and the 2nd mode of development notice production processing, and a display example of additional information. The figure which shows the example of a screen for demonstrating the 1st aspect and 2nd aspect of a jackpot notice production process, and the display example of additional information. The figure which shows the example of a screen for demonstrating the example of a display of additional information.

Hereinafter, the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. In addition, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is used as an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other types of gaming machines such as a spinning-body gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a jelly-ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can be applied to a game machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 is provided with operation buttons 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in the variable game effect executed in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly shown to the player. It is operated in order to execute the operation button effect.

The operation button 20 is not limited to being installed in front of the upper plate 23 but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the operation button 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives the operation of the touch key by the player is provided. The operation button 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect or the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle that a player operates to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by launching a game ball from a game ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in one row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and executes a sound output effect of outputting sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the electric decoration section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect in a blinking manner such as a lighting color, lighting or extinction.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. In addition, in FIG. 2, the illustration on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 in one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the game board 31, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a clune device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. To be done.

Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is moved to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a drive unit that launches the game balls supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is drive-controlled according to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back surface side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of the game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, so that an out ball sensor 318a described later is obtained. (See FIG. 12). Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided in the central portion on the right side of the game board 31, and a game ball hit in the right area of the game board 31 can enter. The game ball that has passed through the penetrating portion 316b of the variable winning port 316 is guided to the clune device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball launched in the right side area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and the passage of the game ball at the through gate 317 is detected, so that the second winning opening A normal win lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open 315.

The ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out. The detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of the game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as a prize. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism 32 onto the game board 31.

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) confirms that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered a special out ball mouth 373 of the clune device 37 described later. The special out ball detection command shown is set, and this special out ball detection command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The ball-in sensors 313a to 317a, the out-ball sensor 318a, and the special out-ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the ball-in of the game ball by another detection method. Any sensor may be used.

Further, the second winning port 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the second winning port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by opening the electric winning object 315b, and entering the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by closing the electric winning object 315b. The ball is limited.

Further, the variable winning a prize opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the variable winning a prize opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened/closed by a driving unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening and closing door 319 opens to allow the game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening and closing door 319 closes to restrict the entering of the game balls to the variable winning opening 316. It The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable winning port 316 is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is otherwise waited at a position where the variable winning port 316 is closed. As a result, the variable winning port 316 can enter the game ball 99 launched in the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting portions 319d for rotatably mounting the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position, the base 319a protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31. .. As a result, when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 that is launched into the right area of the game board 31. The pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a and prevent the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from spilling from the left and right of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guides the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning port 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning port 316, and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. Further, the variable winning port 316 has a penetrating portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. The penetrating portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 is inserted into the variable winning a prize port 316 and guided to the clune device 37 through the penetration portion 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entrance sensor 316a is provided on the guide path 316c. Thereby, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning port 316 is detected when passing through the penetrating portion 316b and being introduced into the guide path 316c. The ball entrance sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. Thereby, the detection result of the ball entrance sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning port 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 carries out a jackpot lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize hole 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315 is 3, and the variable prize hole 316 is entered. The number of prize balls in the case of doing is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, it shifts to a big hit game state (special game state) and the variable winning a prize port 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the jackpot lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, the predetermined jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, is entered. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), and 16R certain variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state is a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning port 316 is opened five times until a predetermined time elapses or until the maximum number (for example, 9) of game balls is won in the variable winning port 316. It is a game state including the open/close execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open/close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and it is expected that a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state, rather than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display which is arranged so as to be visually recognizable through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display portion 341, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the entry into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. , And various image effects such as a variable game effect executed with the variable display effect. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the variable display effect of the decorative design in the design display unit 341 is, for example, by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative designs with numbers “1” to “9” vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Done. It should be noted that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are nine types of decorative designs, "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the variation game, after the variation display time set in advance from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341, the variation display of the ornamental symbols is executed so that the variation of all the ornamental symbols is stopped. To be done. More specifically, in the variable display of the decorative pattern, first, all the decorative patterns change along a preset changing direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the changes of the plurality of decorative patterns stop in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative pattern on all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 ends, the state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative pattern clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R regular jackpot", a state in which decorative patterns of the same type are lined up on the activated line is displayed, and it is clearly a jackpot. To be done. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative patterns on the activated line, but it is not always explicitly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a symbol combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination showing 16R probability variation jackpot among the decorative symbols, is arranged in the activated line. Is displayed, or a state where the same combination of decorative patterns other than “777” is lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R certainty variation jackpot", a state in which a symbol combination such as "333" set in advance as a design combination showing the 5R certainty variation jackpot is displayed on the activated line is displayed. Or, a state in which the combination of the same decorative patterns other than the combination of the symbols such as "777" and "333" showing the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than a combination of decorative symbols indicating a probability jackpot such as "222" or "444" set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a regular jackpot among decorative symbols. A state in which the same combination of decorative patterns is lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols is lined up on the activated line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

Further, in the symbol display portion 341, along with the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable game, a variable game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed. When the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when the state where the jackpot pattern combination other than the combination of the decorative symbols showing the 16R probability variable jackpot is displayed in the activated line, the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as the variation game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", when the state where the jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the decorative symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the activated line is displayed, the variable game effect is the 5R normal jackpot. A suggestive production that suggests that is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 5R certainty variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display portion 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

Further, it is conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act when an attempt is made to illegally guide the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 by using a magnet. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act in the case where an act of improperly inputting a radio wave into the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a and causing a false detection of a game ball being entered. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4, the clune device 37 puts the game ball, which has been inserted into the variable winning port 316, into one of a normal out ball hole 378 and a special out ball hole 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8) described later. It is to sort. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the clune device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the clune device 37, and FIG. 8 is FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the clune device 37 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in a plan view, and has a high-order bottom portion 371a, a low-order bottom portion 371b, and an inclined portion 371c that descends to the left and is provided between the high-order bottom portion 371a and the low-order bottom portion 371b.

The high-order bottom portion 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined downward to the right. A special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball opening 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high-order bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the center of the high-order bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retaining portion 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and discharges the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retaining portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374.

It should be noted that the first guide member 375 can be provided with a function of retaining the game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38. By the way, in the present embodiment, the numbers (specific information) corresponding to the non-setting values which are the game setting values other than the setting values which are the game setting values set in the gaming machine 10 are set within a predetermined period (see FIG. 9). Based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period), the 7-segment display unit 39 is presented. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the number of segments in the 7-segment display unit 39 is 7 (excluding the dot points DP), one non-setting value can be reliably specified by 7 pieces of information. Further, since the game setting values are in 6 levels from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-setting values, and therefore all the non-setting values can be specified by 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces (specified number) of information. Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 be configured to retain a predetermined number or more of game balls 99 during a later-described specific period (see FIG. 9). However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the game machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retaining portion 38 to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99. In this case, the first guiding member 375 is made to have a function of storing the game balls 99, so that a number of game balls 99, which is difficult only with the game ball retaining section 38, are retained using the first guide member 375. be able to. As a result, it is possible to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 for a specific period, and information necessary for specifying all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. Accordingly, due to the arrangement of various members, it is difficult to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 not only by providing the game ball retaining portion 38 but also by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of retaining the game balls 99. In this case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it is possible to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99. As a result, it is possible to retain a predetermined number or more of game balls 99 for a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is possible to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limit number to the specified number (match the limit number to the specified number). In this case, for example, when the information (the individual information of the specific information) of the number corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 is presented, all the non-set values in one specific period. May be provided with information to identify Further, when information of the number of game balls 99 satisfying a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out opening 373, for example, the number of information corresponding to the number of winning the lottery, is presented, the winning of the lottery The expected number of information according to the probability is presented, and the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the prescribed number, so it is possible that not all of the information necessary to specify all non-set values is presented. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by entering the game ball 99 into the special out opening 373 in one specified period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

As a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38, the first guiding member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 are put into the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game ball 99 near the special out ball mouth 373 (by causing a ball jam), the special ball It is conceivable to restrict the entering of the game ball 99 into the out ball passage 374. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of gaming balls 99 to be retained in a specific period to a limited number by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complicated configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that is inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guiding member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right side (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out opening 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 cannot be expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced to the special out ball passage 374 (special When detected by the out ball sensor 384), it is handled as an out ball.

The lower bottom portion 371b constitutes a left side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined toward the center so as to be lower. The lower bottom portion 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out nozzle 378. The normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 except for the portion of the lower bottom portion 371b along the peripheral wall 372. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the normal out opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out opening 373. Is formed in. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guiding member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31, similarly to the game balls passing through the opening of the outlet 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out-balls.

In such a clune device 37, as described above, the game ball 99 that has been launched in the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 is guided by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the clune device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow down of the game ball 99 is delayed in the clune device 37. Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 are normally out due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy, collision with the peripheral wall 372 of the clune device 37, or another game ball 99. Enter the ball at 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball opening 378 moves to the normal passage 376 and the second guiding member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, a part of the game ball that moves on the bottom wall 371, the movement direction is changed due to a collision with the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or another game ball, and enters the special out ball 373. To do. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged toward the game ball retaining portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out nozzle 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. .. In other words, the expected number of balls to enter the special out opening 373 per round game for 10R is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of entering the ball or the expected number of entering balls in such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the set value at an early stage, but it is possible to specify the set value realistically. It will be possible. Thereby, while preventing the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the setting value is specified early such as when the setting value is low, the gaming machine is tedious because the setting value cannot be specified. It becomes possible to prevent the game at 10 from being terminated.

Note that in the present embodiment, the special out opening 373 is provided in the high bottom portion 371 a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out opening 378 has a larger opening area than the special out opening 373. Is usually harder to enter the game ball 99 than the out ball 378, but in place of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball to the special out ball 373 by other means. It may be difficult for 99 to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide a hindrance means for hindering the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out opening 373 around the special out opening 373. As the inhibition means, for example, an obstacle such as a wall portion surrounding the special out opening 373 to prevent the ball from entering the special out opening 373, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special out opening 373. A means for generating a force and a means for forming an air curtain by ejecting air in the peripheral portion of the special out opening 373 can be considered.

Further, an opening/closing part for opening/closing the special out opening 373 may be provided so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special out opening 373 by this opening/closing part. In this case, the special out opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out opening 378, and the normal out opening 378 is formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out opening 373. Good.

Further, the distribution means for allocating the game balls 99 entered in the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out opening 378 and the special out opening 373 is not limited to the clune device 37, and may be other means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail that is placed on the game board 31, it may be divided into the normal-out opening 378 and the special-out opening 373. ..

As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period elapses. Is. Then, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 described later are controlled after the lapse of the specific period, and according to the cumulative number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 until the predetermined period has elapsed, 7 A number is displayed on the segment display section 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows a specific period in which the game balls are retained in the game ball retaining portion, a predetermined period in which the number of game balls entered in the special out nozzle of the clune device is accumulated, and specific information indicating a non-set value. It is a figure for demonstrating the regulation period displayed on a 7 segment display part.

Note that, in the following, referring to FIG. 9, a specific period is a period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining portion 38, and a predetermined period of the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37. As a period for cumulatively counting the number, the "regulated period" is a whole number (specific information) indicating a non-set value based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period or Although a part is described as a period of time displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the "specific period" is not limited to a period of staying the game ball 99 in the game ball retaining unit 38, and a "predetermined period" is a clune device. The number is not limited to the period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out hole 373 of 37. That is, the “specific period”, the “predetermined period”, and the “specified period” include at least the periods described below.

As shown in FIG. 9(A) and FIG. 9(B), during the specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining section 38, the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game is started after the jackpot game (opening) is started. Until the end (starting of the ending), a specific period is set for each jackpot game that is started in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game is started, and the end of the specific period is the point when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ended (the ending point is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), when the normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the initial hit is the normal jackpot and the single hit jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a specific period. From the time until the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when the probability variation big hit is won in the low-probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot game is started), when the normal probability jackpot is won in the high-probability mode. For all the big hit games that are executed until the big hit game is completed by the normal big hit game, it is specified from the start of each big hit game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the big hit game. It is set as a period. That is, in the jackpot game, a plurality of specific periods are set in correspondence with the number of jackpot games executed in the jackpot game.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of winning, the number of game balls 99, which corresponds to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a specific period of one jackpot game, will be described later. The segments A to G of the segment display unit 39 are controlled to be turned on and off in the ending of the jackpot game which is a specified period. That is, in the specified period, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot, based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period. A number indicating a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines is set as a period for displaying on the 7-segment display unit 39.

When the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 is performed. The numbers that specify the game setting values (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit are the display order set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36 described later. Accordingly, one is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period in the jackpot game. Further, in the ending (specified period) after the lapse of the specific period in the jackpot game, in the 7-segment display section 39, the number of the game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 When the number is less than 20, the two numbers that specify a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number is 21 or more and less than 28, a plurality of non-set values are specified. The three numbers to be displayed are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers that specify a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in an order corresponding to the display order. In addition, when the number of the game balls 99 entering the special out mouth 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is less than 7, it is 7 in the ending (specified period) after the specific period in the jackpot game. The segment display unit 39 does not display any number that specifies a plurality of non-set values.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, each time the jackpot game is executed, a 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, is based on the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a specific period. 1 to 5 numbers that specify a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the screen, and the set values can be specified by displaying the five numbers that specify the non-set values. For example, it is possible to specify that the game setting value 1 is a non-setting value by displaying the number 1 on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the game setting value by displaying the number 2 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It is possible to specify that 2 is a non-set value, and it is possible to specify that the game set value 3 is a non-set value by displaying the number 3 on the 7-segment display section 39, and the 7-segment display section 39 It is possible to specify that the game setting value 4 is a non-setting value by displaying 4, and specify that the game setting value 5 is a non-setting value by displaying the number 5 on the 7-segment display section 39. It is possible to specify that the game setting value 6 is a non-setting value by displaying the numeral 6 on the 7-segment display section 39. Further, since the non-set value can be specified as the game set value 2 to 6 by displaying the five numbers 2 to 6 on the 7-segment display portion 39, the set value is grasped as the game set value 1. it can. Similarly, the set value can be understood to be the game set value 2 by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, and 1, 2, 4 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39. It is possible to grasp that the set value is the game set value 3 by displaying the five numbers, and the set value is displayed by displaying the five numbers 1 to 3, 5 and 6 on the 7-segment display section 39. It can be understood that the set value is 4, and the 7-segment display section 39 displays 5 numbers 1 to 4 and 6 so that the set value can be understood as the game set value 5, and the 7-segment display section 39 displays 1 It is possible to understand that the set value is the game set value 6 by displaying the five numbers 5 to 5.

Further, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when the segments A to G are control targets in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, the first control target segment A is turned off. And the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are “1” and “4”. Then, the sixth control target segment F can be recognized as "4" by being turned on, and can be recognized as "1" by turning segment F off. That is, the number “1” or “4” can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. When the segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. Then, the second control target segment B can be determined to be either "2" or "3" by being turned on, and the segment B is turned off to be "5" or "3". 6”. Further, the segment C, which is the third control target, can be recognized as "3" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when the segment C is turned off. That is, the number “2” or “3” can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it is possible to recognize that the fifth control target segment E is “6” when it is turned on and “5” when the segment E is turned off. That is, the number “5” or “6” can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. That is, the numbers “2” and “3” can be recognized when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers “5” and “6” are the fifth control target segment. E can be recognized when the light is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the sixth control target segment F is turned on or off. Then, in the present embodiment, even if the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, all the segments A to G are controlled. Unless targeted, control is not initiated to display the next priority digit. As a result, in order to specify all the non-set values, the control for displaying the next priority number is started at a stage when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped, as compared with the case where the control is started. There are many specific requirements that need to be met. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty until all the non-set values are specified, and thus the degree of difficulty in recognizing the set values, so that it is possible to prevent the set values from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the set value from being recognized by the player in a short time, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game time at the game machine 10, and thus the game machine 10 It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of.

If all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 have a figure indicating a non-set value before they are to be controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is started. You may For example, when the priority order of the numbers is “1”→“2”→“3”→..., the segment F having the sixth control order for the number “1” is set as the control target. When it is understood that the number displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is "1", the segment G having the seventh control order is not set as a control target, and the number "" of the next priority order is displayed. The control for displaying "2" may be started. By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G have been controlled, before all the segments A to G are controlled. Even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the number which is the next display target must be performed unless all the segments A to G have been controlled. Does not start. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the number to be displayed next is started. Up to this point, information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in order to specify the number already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G have been controlled, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays unnecessary information for the player. May be displayed on the screen, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. On the other hand, when the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is performed. If it starts, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of the non-set value will not be the control target after one non-set value can be specified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, during the predetermined period of cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode is set after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode is started. Until the end. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the point when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is ended (the ending of the normal jackpot game is started. Point). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), when the normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the initial hit is the normal jackpot and the single hit jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. From the time until the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. That is, in the case of a one-time jackpot, the predetermined period corresponds to the specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining section 38. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot game is started), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. It is a period from the start of the probability variation big hit game for the first hit, which is a trigger, until the opening/closing execution mode of the big hit game for the normal jackpot, which is a trigger for ending the big hit condominium. That is, in the case of the jackpot game, the predetermined period does not match the specific period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38, and a plurality of predetermined periods are set according to the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not finished in the middle of the jackpot game or is not finished in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances. Therefore, by setting the specific period for which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining section 38 for each big hit game, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. Also, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game to the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the jackpot game open/close execution mode to the regular jackpot. By setting up to, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. Then, in the jackpot game, in the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period, the number of stays of the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 in the specific period (the special out ball hole 373 of the clune device 37 is entered By controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99, information (all or a part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) that the non-set value can be specified or estimated is displayed, and In the ending after the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot, a non-set value can be specified or estimated in correspondence with the cumulative number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to non-set values) is displayed. As a result, even when a player who cannot know the timing at which a non-set value other than the set value can be specified or estimated progresses the game, the game ends before the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or estimated. Is prevented. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which a non-set value can be specified or estimated can specify or guess the non-set value, and specify the set value by identifying all the non-set values. Will also be possible. In addition, it is possible to exclude the so-called hyena action of other players who play games aiming at the timing when the non-set value can be specified or estimated.

In addition, the specified period is set for each jackpot game that is started in the predetermined period, so that in the condominium jackpot, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot consort. Therefore, in the Renso jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in a single shot, and the larger the number of times the big hit game is executed, the longer the predetermined period is. As a result, there is a high possibility that the Rensou jackpot wins more game balls 99 into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37 than the single hits. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out opening 373 increases. As a result, as the number of jackpots increases, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired, but also obtains more information for identifying or estimating the non-set value, and thus the non-set value and thus the set value. The benefit is that it is easier to guess or identify the value.

In addition, the start of the specific period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 may be set during the big hit game, and the opening/closing execution mode is started (not only at the start of the big hit game) (the opening of the first hit is finished). It may be at the point of time. Further, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is preferably set as one section including the opening/closing execution mode for one big hit game. As a result, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 316 in the opening/closing execution mode (the game ball 99 that has passed through the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37). The information for identifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the lapse of the specific period. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373, and after the opening/closing execution mode, that is, after the lapse of a specific period By paying attention to the contents displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to enjoy the game by identifying or guessing the non-setting value based on the display contents.

Also, the start of a predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started. Instead, just set the jackpot game. Preferably, it is the time when the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode), for example, the opening and closing execution mode of the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started (the opening for the first hit is finished). May be. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the initial hit, the predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of the single shot jackpot and Renso jackpot. An opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value for a win is guaranteed at least once.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is ended, and may be set during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically, the ending of the jackpot game is set. It is possible. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game is ended (end of the jackpot is ended), or the time saving mode which is shifted after the normal jackpot is ended. Further, in the present embodiment, the description is given on the assumption of the loop probability variation machine, but in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one-two-kind mixers, a predetermined period is set according to the mode. It is also possible to set it. For example, in the V-ST machine, when there is no V prize in the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set similarly to the case of the normal jackpot in the loop probability variation machine, and when there is a V prize in the first hit (probability jackpot) ), the start of the big hit game or opening and closing execution mode for the first time, the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the big hit without V winnings, or the end of the specified number of big hit lottery in the high probability mode, etc. It can be considered as the end of the predetermined period.

Further, the predetermined period may be set to a period in which the variable game is executed (a period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the big hit game) regardless of the big hit game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) in which all or part of the specific information (number) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and the normal gaming state (high probability mode and Period of staying in low-frequency support mode (from the end of time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), period of staying in time saving mode (from the end of normal jackpot to the normal gaming state) Period), the period of staying in the low probability mode (usually from the end of the big jackpot until the next big jackpot game starts), until a predetermined number of jackpot lottery in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode Of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or until a predetermined number of ordinary lottery in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or in the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Until a prize is won, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, or A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second winning opening 315 on both sides, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. , The high probability mode and/or the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are hit on the game board 31 can be mentioned. Further, the predetermined period may be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern). In this case, the entire period of one variation game may be the predetermined period, or a part of one variation game may be the predetermined period. When a part of one variation game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the reach state of the decorative pattern, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Until the development effect such as the special reach effect is started, the period when the decorative pattern is in the reach state until the development effect is started, and the period when the decorative pattern is in the reach state and the development effect is ended , A period during which the development effect is executed, and the like.

In this way, by setting the predetermined period to the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to identify or infer the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value even in the period other than the period in which the jackpot game is executed. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period when the variable game is executed.

Then, when the predetermined period is set to a period in which the variable game is executed, the sorting means such as the clune device 37 normally issues the game ball 99 that has been launched in the left side area of the game board 31 to the left. The position where 99 is divided into the normal out opening 378 and the special out opening 373 (for example, the left area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or side of the first winning opening 314) ) May be provided. In this case, a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (a right strike that launches the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31). Thereby, without lowering the probability of entering the game ball 99 into the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the player can enjoy the identification or estimation of the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual. You can

Further, the start of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of the specific condition. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of the specific condition.

In addition, as a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 sorted by the sorting device such as the clune device 37 being inserted into the special out ball hole 373 in a predetermined period, a specific area other than the special out ball hole 373 is provided. The game ball 99 passes through, for example, the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 enters the various winning openings 313 to 316.

In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, or the like, or guides the game ball 99 that passes through the through gate 317 to the sorting means such as the clune device 37, and is sorted by the sorting means. The specific condition may be that the ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373. Also in this case, it is possible to enjoy the identification or estimation of the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without performing special launch.

Further, the specific condition may be that a specific event that may occur in the progress of the game occurs. The specific event in this case may be either a favorable situation or a disadvantageous phenomenon for the player. When the specific event is an event that is advantageous to the player, the player may obtain all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) in addition to the benefit obtained by the occurrence of the particular event. Can be further obtained. On the other hand, when the specific event is an unfavorable event for the player, the player uses all or one of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a relief for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the particular event. More parts can be obtained. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more (a jackpot game being executed a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more), a certain number of odds or regular jackpots (one time) Winning (more than a certain number of times) (probably change or regular jackpot game is played a predetermined number of times (including one) or more), the number of jackpot games has reached a certain number of times or more (ordinary change before winning the jackpot) You must win the jackpot more than a certain number of times in succession, the number of jackpot lottery until you win the jackpot reaches a certain number or more, and win the game ball 99 that exceeds the upper limit number in the round game of the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game. (Over prize) may occur.

Further, the specific event may be that a specific effect set in advance is executed in the variable game or the jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set, for example, to any of the non-reach effect and the reach effect, and may be set to any of the opening effect, the round game effect and the ending effect. Typically, a specific effect is a premium effect in which a big hit or a probability variation big hit of the variable game effect is determined, and a holding condominium is executed after the end of the big hit game in the big hit game (at the start of the big hit game, At the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, a lottery result is included in the hold at a specific point of the jackpot game). .. Furthermore, as a specific event, it is also conceivable that the decorative display is stopped and displayed in a specific combination in the design display unit 341, or is temporarily stopped (intermediate stop). For example, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed at “777” in the design display portion 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach-off eye such as “767”, a specific non-reach-off eye such as “367” is displayed. Temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed when the development effect such as super reach effect or special reach effect is executed as the reach effect in addition to the case where the stop effect is displayed (interlaced). Display) is considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is executed, for example, “7 development 7”, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a reach state (intermediate stop display), and It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as “development” is executed is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, the specific condition may be that a plurality of specific events of a specific combination occur.

Further, the specific condition may be satisfied in relation to the set value. That is, the specific condition may include the setting value, and for example, the specific condition may be satisfied when a specific event occurs at the specific setting value. In this case, while the type of the specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is defined by the set value as described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating the non-set values are displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39 in a different order depending on the type of the specific condition. This allows you to set the display order for each set value, for example, whether the jackpot lottery probability is high or low, and you can also characterize the display of numbers that show multiple non-set values for each set value. become.

In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specified period for displaying the specific information indicating a non-set value or a part of it (special information) is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of the jackpot game, and other It may be a timing, and it may be set according to a relationship with a predetermined period, a relationship with a specific period, a relationship with a specific condition, or the like. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the prescribed period is typically set after the elapse of the prescribed period as described in a second embodiment to be described later, and the jackpot game. Other than this, for example, it may be after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the predetermined period is set as the execution period of the variable game, for example, when the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable game is started, the temporary stop display timing in the reach state of the decorative pattern, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. It can be considered that the development effect is started, the development effect is being executed, and so on. That is, the specified period may be set to a period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed by the variable display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, the specific information can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the same time. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the variable game by displaying the specific information.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position. A sectional view, FIG. 10C is a sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention section 38 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

As shown in FIG. 6, FIG. 8 and FIG. 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains the game ball 99 in which the game ball enters the special out nozzle 373 for a specific period, and the retention lane 381. , A discharge lane 382 and a stopper portion 383.

The retention lane 381 accepts the game ball 99 entered into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to remain. The retention lane 381 has an open upper portion and is inclined downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game sphere, and at least a part of the game sphere 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4 ). As a result, it is possible to visually confirm that the game balls 99 are retained in the retention lane 381, and the number of the retained game balls 99, that is, the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is entered within a specific period. The number of game balls 99 can be visually confirmed. Further, the retention lane 381 is preferably formed of resin or the like so as to be transparent. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible. The number of gaming balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 can be displayed by, for example, the number of lamps turned on or an image displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the retention lane 381, and guides the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined portion, for example, a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Further, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. The special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the stay lane 381 moves in the discharge lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out aperture 373 of the clune device 37 within a specific period. Used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the output from the special out ball sensor 384 is monitored by the MPU 41, so that the MPU 41 is It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved on the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later. In the process, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and displays the 7 segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The contents are controlled (see the command determination processing in FIG. 37 and the set value suggestion processing in FIG. 40).

As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is vertically moved between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. .. The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion projects upward, and the stopper 383 is at the upper limit position, so that the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not project upward, and the stopper 383 is at the lower limit position so that the game ball 99 of the retention lane 381 can be discharged through the discharge lane 382 (FIG. 10 (C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game balls 99 to be retained in the retention lane 381 and for discharging the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, and for example, a stopper that can be moved back and forth. Alternatively, other means such as a stopper, which is rotatable between the upright state and the prone state, may be used. Further, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. .. Further, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game balls 99 are retained and a state in which they are discharged. For example, by holding the retention lane 381 at a position lower than the discharge lane 382 to retain the game ball 99, while moving the retention lane 381 to a position higher than the discharge lane 382, the game ball 99 is discharged lane 382. It may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening capable of discharging the game ball 99 on the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381, and the game ball 99 can be retained from the opening in the game board 31. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between itself and a position where it can be discharged to the back side. Further, instead of the retention lane 381, by moving a box-shaped movable body, the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display unit 39 includes seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each of the segments A to G and the dot point DP can be individually turned on and off, and the numbers are at least 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B) and at least A to as shown in FIG. 11(C). The alphabet F can be displayed. In the present embodiment, in the 7-segment display unit 39, a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (see FIGS. 14A and 14B). From the value (numerical value information), a plurality (five) of game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical value information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 A number (specific information) indicating each of (specific numerical information)) is displayed as a number by turning on or off each segment A to G. Specifically, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the number 1 is displayed by lighting the segments B and C on the 7-segment display section 39, and the non-set value is the game set value. When the number is 2, the segments A, B, D, E and G are turned on to display the number 2, and when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the segments A to D and G are turned on. By doing so, the number 3 is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the segments 4 are displayed by turning on the segments B, C, F and G, and the non-set value is the game setting. When the value is 5, the number A is displayed by turning on the segments A, C, D, F and G, and when the non-set value is the game set value 6, the segments A, C to G are When the light is turned on, the numeral 6 is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is turned on at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

The numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set values are changed, as will be described later (FIG. 35 and FIG. 35). 36). As will be described later, the control sequence of turning on or off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( Fixed).

Then, in the 7-segment display section 39, a segment corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period) that entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period as described later. Is a control target of turning on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 indicate non-set values other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game setting value but a part of the specific information indicating the non-setting value, and corresponds to the special information. .. In other words, the special information is displayed by using a part of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information), so that the player displays the number on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this case, not only the non-set value can be specified, but also the non-set value can be estimated based on a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, even when the numbers are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to guess the non-set value based on a part of the numbers and enjoy the game.

It should be noted that whether or not each of the segments A to G is the control target in the 7-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is a control target, it is easier to estimate the set value than when it is not explicitly stated. In the present embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method in which it is difficult to estimate the set value is adopted. Has been done. In addition, when clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is a control target, for example, by blinking the segment to be controlled, the segment is clearly controlled to the player, and the control target is controlled. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by lighting the segment in a color different from that in the case of lighting the segment.

Further, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display the information for identifying the non-set value in the alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the letter A is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the letter B is displayed, and the non-set value is the game set value 3. If the letter C is displayed, the letter D is displayed when the non-set value is the game set value 4, and the letter E is displayed when the non-set value is the game set value 5, and the non-set value It is conceivable that the letter F is displayed when is the game setting value 6 (see FIG. 11C).

The main display portion 36 is a normal symbol display portion 361, a first special symbol display portion 362, a second special symbol display portion 363, a first reserved number display portion 364 and a second reserved number, which are arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. The display unit 365 is provided.

The ordinary symbol display portion 361 includes a pair of LEDs as an ordinary symbol (general symbol), and is a lottery in a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b executed upon winning the prize in the through gate 317. The result is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the LED pair (variable display of the normal symbol) upon winning the prize in the through gate 317, and turns on or off each LED after the variation display time elapses, thereby drawing a lottery per ordinary figure. Display the result of.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), whether or not to execute the jackpot game executed upon winning the first winning opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, big hit lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variably displays the first special symbol) triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, and changes each segment after the variation display time elapses. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed upon winning a prize in the second winning port 315. The result of lottery in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, big hit lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variably displays the second special symbol) upon the winning of the second winning opening 315, and changes each segment after the variation display time elapses. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

The first holding number display unit 364 includes an LED group including four LEDs, and the holding number N of the first special map of the variable display caused by the winning of the first winning hole 314 is determined by the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

The second holding number display unit 365 includes an LED group including four LEDs, and the holding number M of the second special figure of the variable display caused by the winning of the second winning opening 315 is determined by the number of four LEDs turned on. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores a ball game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls of the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of payout balls of the game balls by the payout device 132. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to a control device and a driving unit provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes the main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main controller 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a ROM 411 and a RAM 412 built therein. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the main controller 4 and outputs a control signal from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with ball input sensors 313a to 317a, an out ball sensor 318a, a special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a, and the through gate 317. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with a voice lamp controller 5, a payout controller 7, a launch controller 8, a power controller 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41, to the voice lamp control device 5, a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game. Outputs commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, and setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it includes information on the jackpot type. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26, which will be described later, based on the information stored in the pending storage area 412b, which will be described later, when the symbol variation display by the main display unit 36 is started. It The fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying only the fluctuation display time to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and the jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command, when the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations stored in the holding storage area 412b described later increases, the lottery result, the variation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, and the variation pattern, This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number N of holdings or the number M of holdings. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (see FIG. 22, which will be described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area RB1 to the fourth holding area RB4 when the holding number N or the holding number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the hit/miss information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and when the jackpot gaming state shifts to FIG. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Further, the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command to start the jackpot game. Not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the audio lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command for starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game and notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , Is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to understand that the opening ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, Alternatively, the opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening/closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the round game is to be ended in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. It

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is over, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and will be described later with reference to FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display section 39.

The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the change of the set value and the changed set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. ..

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control unit 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as a means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs the clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 causes the main timer interrupt (to be described later) every time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the embedded processing is started and executed. The oscillating circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply an operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the holding storage area 412b, and the electric power holder holding area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outlying type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining a variation display time in the main display portion 36 and the symbol display portion 341. Be done. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric prize 315b of the second winning opening 315 should be in the electric power open state, and the initial value setting of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, in the case of collectively explaining the plurality of types of counters, they are simply referred to as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at a short time interval and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA, and the type of variable game that the first special symbol display unit 362 displays in a variable and stopped manner is referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second holding storage area REB includes a first holding area REB1, a second holding area REB2, a third holding area REB3, a fourth holding area REB4, and a holding number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the second special symbol display unit 363 displays in a variable and stopped manner is referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

When a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as win/fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. Further, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 are jackpots. It is acquired as win/loss information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the hit/miss information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the processing according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counters 412a (such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1) are individually associated with the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 has the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the REA4 and the second holding storage area REB.

Therefore, the variable game executed based on the winning/discarding information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB is used for 19 games. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the win/fail information is empty in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 in which the hit/miss information is stored is stored as the number of holding N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning/retiring information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the hit/miss information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning area 314 is formed by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as winning history to the second winning port 315.

It should be noted that it may be considered as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and even in this case, up to a total of eight holding areas are provided. It is possible to hold the winning/losing information as the winning history. The storage process of the hit/miss information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 36 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the hit/miss information stored in. Specifically, the hit/fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the hit/fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the number of reserved storage areas NAB is 0, the hit/fail information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA and the number N of holdings stored in the number-of-holding storage area NAB of the second holding storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. Further, it may be considered as another embodiment that the hit/fail information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like on the basis of the numerical value information stored in the execution area AE as the win/loss information at the start of one variation game. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/miss information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, The hit/fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the hit/fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/fail information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1 and the third holding area REB1. The hit/fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the hit/fail information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area of the ROM 411 in correspondence with the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation gaming state. Here, FIG. 14(A) is a diagram showing an example of the low probability mode hit/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14(B) is a diagram showing an example of the high probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B), the probability (big hit probability) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit as the low probability mode hit/miss table and the high probability mode hit/miss table, respectively, is set as the game setting value. A plurality of different win/loss tables are provided accordingly. The low-probability mode win/loss table and the high-probability mode win/loss table each include six win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

In the game setting value 1, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table, and high. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode hit/miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

In the game setting value 2, of the 65536 random number values from 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode hit/miss table, and high. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability table hit/miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

In the game setting value 3, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) and high for the low probability mode hit/miss table. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability table hit/miss tables. That is, with the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

In the game setting value 4, of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table, and high. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability table hit/miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

In the game setting value 5, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) and high for the low probability mode hit/miss table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability table hit/miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

In the game setting value 6, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) and high for the low probability mode win/loss table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability table hit/miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value that is a jackpot winning result, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

Here, in the low-probability mode hit/miss table and the high-probability mode hit/miss table, the random numbers that result in a big hit in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that become big hits are not common. To be Further, the random numbers to be won as a jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

Further, the low-probability mode win/loss table and the high-probability mode win/loss table are provided six by six according to the game setting values in six stages, but at least one win/fail table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game set value is not limited to 6 levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode hit/miss tables corresponding to a plurality of levels of game setting values, while providing one high-probability mode hit/miss table. That is, it is possible to set a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low-probability mode and make the jackpot probability uniform without providing a staged game setting value for the high-probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be uniform, and a plurality of stages of game setting values may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19 and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14C, in the case where the type of the variation game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that are the 5R probability variation jackpot is 0 to 10 The number of random numbers that is a 16R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is a 5R regular jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4 and the 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of the fourth random numbers is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop certainty machine, which has the same probability of a certainty variation jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that of the first special symbol. That is, in the probability variation game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high), the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low-probability mode and electric role) Compared to the low frequency support mode in which the open probability of the object 315b is low), the expected value of winning a game ball when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a first prize opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and an individual shaking for each second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. The minute table is set, the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the gaming ball has won, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the jackpot type distribution probabilities are the same in the game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability variation machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-and-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, and “5R normal jackpot”. It is determined whether it is a “big hit” or “out”.

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R certainty variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variation jackpot, the open/close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of 5R certainty variation jackpot or 16R certainty variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the certainty variation game state which is a high probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric auditors 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R regular jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the low-probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low and the high-frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high is shifted to the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) informs the player of a lottery result in a predetermined number of jackpot lottery preset times such as 50 times and 100 times. Until, or if the player is determined that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the stipulated number of times has passed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability variation machine, a jackpot of a preset specified number (for example, 50 times or 100 times) after the jackpot game at the probability variation jackpot is finished. If the lottery is executed in the probability variation game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support) Mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out, the big hit game state and the time saving game state are not shifted. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability jackpot, 16R probability jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two-round probability jackpot 2 It is also possible to have other jackpot types, such as round jackpot, 16R jackpot.

In addition, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display portion 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of alignment. Specifically, by the detachment type table stored in the detachment type table storage area in the ROM 411, a front-rear detachment reach in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach has occurred, and a reach also occurs After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of out-of-bounds, that is, the out-of-front and out-of-reach, in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and the out-of-reach that does not occur, is set.

Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the disconnection type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14D, the value of the random number that is the out-of-position reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is the reach other than the out-of-position is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of the range is 39. ~238. The MPU 41 determines that the reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R certainty jackpot, the 16R certain jackpot, or the 5R regular jackpot, that is, the variation game that shifts to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the reach indicates a state in which it is likely to be a symbol combination of decorative symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won in a period from the start of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit 341 to the stop display of the symbols. This is a fluctuation state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a changed state. Also, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect Person participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. During execution of these effect processes, the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be reduced or enlarged.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c. For example, when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is considered to be won, and when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is considered to be a win.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 allows the rough variation game production such as high-speed variation production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production, super reach production, and special reach production. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the MPU 41 executes a main process described later, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and the preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of the variation pattern by referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

Here, FIG. 15(A), FIG. 15(B), and FIG. 15(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 15(A), FIG. 15(B) and FIG. 15(C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the deviation variation table, variation patterns are set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R regular jackpot", the regular jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery If the result is “out”, the out variation table is referenced to identify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach production pattern with the variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the normal reach production pattern in the symbol display unit 341. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as a variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the super reach production. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach production pattern having the longest variation display time of 90 s as the variation type (production pattern), and the symbol reach 341 displays the special reach production pattern. The effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 15C, in the deviation variation table, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined for each stop type at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front/rear deviation, reach other than front/rear, complete deviation). Correspondence between the and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is the front/rear outreach or the reach other than the front/rear outreach, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely disengaged, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 7 s as a change type (effect pattern type), and displays a symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the unit 341. When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having the variable display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display corresponding to the variation pattern “04” is displayed as a variation display at the time of deviation, and the variation display is stopped without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the variable display is disengaged with a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed, and the variable pattern of the disengagement pattern is stopped. Executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as the notice effect.

The types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, and any one of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, a plurality of types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the performed super reach effects is executed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach production, and the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit (expectation degree) is higher than the normal reach production, and the jackpot is won rather than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (degree of expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”, a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the performed special reach effects is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect whose variation time is longer than that of the normal reach effect, and is an effect which develops from the normal reach effect or the super reach effect, for example. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of jackpot winning is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single-shot operation effect in which the single-shot operation is reflected in the effect, the operation button 20 by the player is displayed. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the player's long press operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 and the symbol display portion 341 of the main display portion 36, and the variation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R regular jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating that the 5R regular jackpot is the variation pattern “01” to “03” to the variation pattern command “. Any one of "A01" to "A03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds a “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is the 5R certainty variation jackpot to the variation pattern command “B01”. ~ Any one of "B03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variable jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that the 16R probability variable jackpot is in front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "C03" is output. When the lottery result is “miss”, the MPU 41 changes pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the change is before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Will be output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination section 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process for determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information regarding game history, payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, "the number of out balls", "the number of general winnings payout coins", "the number of first winnings payout coins", "the number of second prizes payout coins" , "Variable winnings payout number", "setting value", "base information", "continuous character ratio information", "character ratio information", "cumulative jackpot lottery number", "unit jackpot lottery number", The “number of big hits” and the “number of consecutive failures” are stored. Among these game information, "setting value", "base information", "continuous character ratio information", "character ratio information", and "number of lots per unit lottery" are game information (performance information) regarding payout performance. Corresponds to.

The “out ball number” is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot on the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The "out ball number" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later.

The "general winning award payout number" is an integrated value of the gaming balls paid out for winning the general award winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "general winning prize payout number" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the winning hole 313 in the normal game state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the general winning opening 313 in the processing, it is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for this prize. ..

The “first prize-winning payout ball number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the first prize-winning port 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "first winning prize payout number" is the winning ball of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later when the winning sensor 314a detects the winning of the first winning prize 314 in the normal game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current prize when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process. To update.

The “second winning award payout ball number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for the winning of the second winning a prize mouth 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "second winning prize payout number" is the winning ball of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 315a detects the winning of the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for this prize when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process. To update.

The “variable winning prize payout number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the variable winning prize 316 in the jackpot gaming state. This "variable winning opening payout number" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 316a detects a winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state. In the process, when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the variable winning a prize port 316, it is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the present prize. ..

The “set value” is for selecting the low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/win determination). In other words, the “setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, six-stage setting values (six types of low-probability mode win/loss tables (see FIG. 14A) and high-probability mode win/loss tables (see FIG. 14(B)) having different jackpot probabilities) Is being prepared. The “setting value” is updated in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later.

The "base information" is information about "base" which is a payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "out ball number" in the normal gaming state. Is the ratio of the total number of paid-out coins of the "number of general-prize-winning coins paid-out" and the "number of first-prize-coin-payout-balls". When the “base” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “base”=100×(“general winning award payout ball number”+“first winning award payout ball number”)/“out ball number”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the two-time-before-60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the two-previous-time 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent out ball number reached 60,000 balls was the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous out ball number reached 60,000 balls was The base B2 of the 60,000 balls before the last time is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. When the counter value of the number of out-balls is calculated as the current base BL until the counter value reaches 60,000, the "base information" includes the "general-winning-prize-payout-number-of-balls" and the "first winning-prize" described above. In addition to the “number of paid-out balls” and the “number of out-balls”, the “general-prize-winning-coupon payout-number”, the “first winning-court-payout-number” and “out-ball-number” for base calculation are stored.

In the present embodiment, the "base information" includes "current status base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1" and "previous two-time 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are the history. However, the 60,000-ball base for the past three times or more may be recorded as the history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

"Continuous prize ratio information" is the total number of coins paid out by winning all prize holes (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) for which prize balls are paid out. In the above, it is the information about the "continuous winning character ratio", which is the ratio of the variable payout prize payout number. When the "continuous winning character ratio" is expressed by a mathematical expression, "continuous winning character ratio" = 100 x "variable winning prize payout number"/"total payout number". The “continuous accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous winning character ratio information" is stored as a cumulative continuous winning character ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "continuous accessory ratio information" is a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state is executed. Alternatively, it may be a continuous accessory ratio with respect to the number of out balls reaching a fixed number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in a fixed number of periods.

The "characteristics ratio information" is the total number of coins paid out by winning all the winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315, and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. , Is information about a "feature ratio" which is a ratio of the total number of payout coins of the second number of payout coins and the number of variable payout coins. When the "feature ratio" is expressed by a mathematical expression, "feature ratio"=100×("the second number of winning coin payouts"+"the number of variable winning coin payouts")/"total number of payouts". The "feature ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “role character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative role ratio from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "feature ratio information" is for a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state is executed, It may be the ratio of the accessory to the number of out balls reaching a fixed number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio in a fixed number of periods.

The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is a jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present. The number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is a cumulative variation display in which the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 is executed in response to the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of times. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of times the jackpot lottery is taken as the opportunity to win the first winning hole 314 per a certain number of minus difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main It is the number of times the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display unit of the display unit 36 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is “250 balls”, and the difference is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the “number of general winnings payout coins” and the “number of first winnings coin payouts” from the “number of out balls”. In other words, the "number of lots per unit lottery" is the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display portion 362 of the average of 1000 yen (the lottery lottery) is reached when 250 balls are lent for 1,000 yen at the game hall It is the number of times I received it. The “unit jackpot lottery number” may be the number of times the jackpot lottery is received for a fixed number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery number” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is a fixed period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot numbers (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state, It may be for a fixed number (for example, a period until the number of out-balls reaches 60,000). Of course, as the “unit jackpot lottery number”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a fixed number of periods may be stored as the game information.

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed until the present until the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall is a jackpot. The “number of big hits” is incremented by one each time the game state is changed to the big hit game state in the game state shift process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. The “number of jackpots” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of consecutive misses" is the number of times the lottery results in the big hit lottery were missed in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If the lottery result is a big hit, it becomes 0 times. Cleared. The “number of times of continuous deviation” is the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the low probability mode hit/miss table in step S1603 when the symbol fluctuation display of the main display portion 36 is started in step S1606 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. If the result is off, 1 is added to it, and if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. In the present embodiment, the “number of times of continuous disconnection” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive disconnections" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. .. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also possible to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display portion 362 and/or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36.

The 7-segment display devices 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the letter "B", the dots are lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and displayed as "8.", and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit and displayed as “0.” to distinguish it from the number “0”. Further, when displaying any of the alphabets from "A" to "F", it is possible to turn on the dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the “base type” is displayed by an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segments. The indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432, which are identification segments, the abbreviation “BL” of the current base BL is “8.” and “L”. And the base values “31” are displayed as “3” and “1” on the two right 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches on/off the power supply of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing operation, and is located at a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded. It is provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the power display switch 44 is turned on, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power display switch 44 is turned off, the power supply to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 18A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is hidden. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the “base information” is the present base BL→60,000 last time. The base is looped in order from the ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, and the current base BL is sequentially displayed, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) shows that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 18(C) shows that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. 18(D). In the example shown in (2), the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% before the second. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a current state base BL, a program for calculating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying the BL, the 60,000-ball base B1 of the previous time, and the 60,000-ball base B2 of the previous two times in order at regular time intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous accessory ratio information" or "accompaniment ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display device, but may be configured by a display device of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14B) that are referred to in the jackpot lottery. For displaying the above-mentioned set values of, and is constituted by a 7-segment display. The set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. The set value may be displayed.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power supply of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and when the power supply of the 7-segment display is on, the set value change operation unit 46 can be rotated to change the set value. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a display example on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when the set value display 45 is turned off and the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized to set the value display unit. A number is displayed at 45. The number displayed at this time is the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current set value. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, if the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the set value display unit 45 is in the lighted state, the power supply to the 7-segment display is cut off and the set value display unit 45 is turned off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the set value display 45 is in a lighting state and a rotation operation is performed on the set value change operation part 46, the number displayed on the set value display 45 is changed. .. In the illustrated example, the set value display unit 45 is rotated to the right to increase the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, and the set value display unit 45 is rotated to the left to display the set value display unit 45. The number that is displayed becomes smaller. Then, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the set value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as a set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation unit 46 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before is set as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects the low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14A) or the high-probability mode win/loss table (FIG. 14(B)) selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The jackpot lottery can be performed based on (see).

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value changing operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining a set value by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) after rotating the set value changing operation unit 46, or setting by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) repeatedly or holding it down Displaying the set value by changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45, or by inserting the key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 and rotating the key. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the portion 45 may be used.

Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, the outside of the game machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11). ), it is possible to select a visible state and an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display portion 45 cannot be visually recognized, while opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11. The set value display section 45 can be visually confirmed with. As a result, when the player executes a game on the game machine 10, the set value display section 45 is not visually recognized unless the game board 31 is opened. Therefore, the set value is set by the number displayed on the set value display section 45. The player is prevented from knowing the value. Then, the set value display unit 45 is turned off when the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed when the set value display unit 45 is on. Therefore, by keeping the set value display unit 45 off during business hours of the game hall, the set value display unit 45 can be visually confirmed by opening the game board 31 due to a jam of the game machine 10 or the like. Even if the state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set value by the set value display unit 45.

On the other hand, the set value display unit 45 is turned on when the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed when it is in the off state, and the number corresponding to the set value is hidden. Therefore, by opening the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11 and depressing the set value change operation unit 46 outside the business hours of the game hall, the set value display unit 45 is turned on. The set value can be confirmed based on the numbers displayed on the set value display unit 45, and the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value outside the business hours by a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the setting value during the business hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a variable display of symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and Perform performance display.

[Voice lamp controller 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and lamp blink patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 receives a command based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electric decoration section 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display section 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the output of the reproduced sound from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Further, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Further, the speaker 26 and the electric decoration section 27 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51, based on the command input from the main control device 4, the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination part 27, the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the, the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like. By the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 is controlled by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out The state where the balls are retained and the state where the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged through the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the electric decoration section 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4.

Specifically, the MPU 51, when the variation pattern command is input, based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern (stop design combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 38A)), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 38). (See (B))) and effect pattern type (see FIGS. 39A to 37C), and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37). (See step S2105 in the command determination processing), the symbol variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display portion 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a detachment, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built therein. Further, the display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit that measures time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a plurality of types of images such as a variable pattern such as a decorative pattern used in the pattern variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and an out effect image are stored. ing. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, whereby the symbol variable display and the effect display are realized.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built therein.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 is for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopping member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out, It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout controller 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, whereby the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are obtained. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to the card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The firing control device 8 includes a firing control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321. Let it feed on. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 with a clock signal that is switched ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22, the larger the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22, the higher the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for allowing the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stopping switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stopping switch 21b is operated by the player. When it is detected, the game ball launch mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by rotating the firing handle 22 and operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, a driving unit, etc., a +5V voltage for a logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for charging with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the electric power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like when it determines that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment, it is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. To judge. When the main controller 4, the voice lamp controller 5, the payout controller 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power controller 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a power outage. NMI interrupt processing is executed. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the description of the start-up processing, the NMI interrupt processing, etc. is omitted, and the main timer interrupt processing and the main processing will be described. In the startup process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt process of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process of determining the detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected. When the out-ball sensor 318a detects an out-ball, the MPU 41 updates the number of out-balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out-balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. To do. Further, when the special out ball sensor 384 detects a special out ball, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores this special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and those counter values have reached the maximum value. In that case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes the firing control processing (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the firing control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated, provided that the game ball is in operation. Is a process to enable the launch of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a normal winning lottery as to whether or not to set the electric winning object 315b of the second winning port 315 to the electric winning state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c. Perform the through-gate processing that is performed. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, in the case where the high frequency support mode is not set, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Judge that there is. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that there is. When the MPU 41 determines that the hit is normal in the through gate process, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the second winning opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the first winning opening 314 has been won (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number N of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number N of reservations (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23), which is updated in the main processing described later. And S1312), and stores the counter value in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the content of the hit/miss information before the hit/non-take information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a jackpot judgment object in a variation start process (S1408 and FIG. 26 in FIG. 24) described later. The first hold command setting process for checking and setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 based on the check result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the second winning opening 315 has been won (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it is determined that the second winning opening 315 has not been won (step S1106: No). ), the start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the number M of reservations stored in the number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number M of holdings is the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number M of reservations (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23, which is updated in the main process described later). And S1312), and stores the counter value in the first free holding area of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hit/non-win information for the second suspension acquired in step S1109 is the target of the jackpot win/fail judgment in the variation start process (S1408 and FIG. 26 in FIG. 24) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second suspension command setting process for setting the second suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, if “first hold command” is replaced with “second hold command” and “holding number N” is replaced with “holding number M” in the first holding command setting process of FIG. Good.

[First hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the hold number N. .. Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the number of holdings N from the number of holdings storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the high-probability mode is set. If the high-probability mode is set (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the high-probability mode is not set (step S1202). : No), and the procedural steps proceed to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON at the time of transition to the high-probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 of FIG. 23) in the main processing, which will be described later, to determine whether or not it is in the high-probability mode. It is determined based on the high-probability mode flag that is set to OFF when shifting to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. Based on, the winning/non-winning judgment of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. Based on the win/loss table, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, the win/fail judgment is executed based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table or the low-probability mode hit/miss table stored in accordance with the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. In step S1203 or S1204, the setting value stored in step S1710 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, is read out, and then the high-probability mode hit table or the low-probability mode hit table corresponding to the set value is read one by one. You may make a selection and judge whether or not it is true or false.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is determined that the counter value read from the value does not correspond to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning/losing information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type included in the winning/holding information stored in the third holding area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read. In addition, among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the winning/discarding information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21 is the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. Can be judged by.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the number N of holdings to the first holding command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp controller 5 that receives the first hold command causes the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to receive the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 the first hold command corresponds to the hit/miss information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the variation type counter CS1 and the number N of suspensions in the first suspension command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. Is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first hold command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of the variation game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, for example, and the counter updating processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. It

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 outputs output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output process to be sent to. For example, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery number update command are set in the RAM 412. If so, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, whether a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, if a prize has been generated, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the MPU 41 stores in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 is won. The number of payout coins for general winning a prize or the number of payout balls for a first winning a prize is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present winning. Further, the MPU 41, in the time saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or the probability variation game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), when the winning is generated in the second winning port 315, the RAM 412. The number of coins paid out for the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of coins paid out for the present prize. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning award coin payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the prize is generated in the variable award winning coin 316, the number of payout coins due to the present prize. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variable pattern command necessary for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. To be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20, and the fluctuations updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this processing. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result and the variation display time of the jackpot lottery is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of opening, opening and closing execution mode and ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and thus the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (the jackpot type). ). For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game five times when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot and the 5R certainty variation jackpot, and the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R certainty variation jackpot. In the jackpot game control process, the round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the open/close execution mode, and the ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting the ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state in which the open/close execution mode is executed, a probability variation game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high probability mode. It shifts to a time saving game state which is a frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the like.

For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game informing the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is over, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that has triggered the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R certainty variation jackpot or the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, after the jackpot game is over, it is shifted to a time saving game state. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lottery is finished in the time saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variation game.

In addition, when the transition of the gaming state is transitioned, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to OFF and sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probability variation gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high-probability mode flag is set to OFF, while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

Further, when shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the “bonnet number” stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes setting value change processing. In this set value change processing, processing for controlling display or non-display of the set value or change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to an operation on the set value change operation unit 46. The details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process and before the start of the game ball is started. It is also possible that it is executed. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the set value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed during the business hours of the game hall. ..

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the present embodiment, as the specific performance information, the base information, the number of lots per unit lottery, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are updated. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1301 and executes the above-described processing of S1301 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not come (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main processing comes, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing. During the remaining time until reaching the step S1310, step S1311 and step S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control processing executed in step S1304 in the main processing of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and when it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variation game control process is executed. When the big hit game is not finished (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not to execute the jackpot game, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, is set to ON when transitioning to the jackpot game state, and OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag that is set to.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON at the time of the variation display start of step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), It is determined based on the variation display flag which is set to OFF in step S1405 of the variation game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variable display, and when determining that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), moves the process to step S1404. However, when it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41, in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, as a result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variation game. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the holding storage area 412b and the number of holdings M stored in the number-of-holding storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0, MPU41 complete|finishes the said variable game control process. On the other hand, when either the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations is not 0, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes the data setting process for the data of the hit/miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the hit/miss information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of reservations corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes). The process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of reservations (step S1502), and the execution area AE is changed from the first reservation area REA1. The hit/miss information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit/miss information of the second holding area REA2 to the fourth holding area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the hit/fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the hit/fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4 is moved. The hit/miss information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 shifts when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts when both or one of the number M of holdings and the number N of holdings is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. Yes (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number N of reservations is not 0, and thus executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit/miss information from the first holding area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit/miss information of the second holding area REB2 to the fourth holding area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit/fail information of the second holding area REB2 is moved to the first holding area REB1, the hit/fail information of the third holding area REB3 is moved to the second holding area REB2, and the fourth holding area REB4 is set. The hit/miss information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the hit/fail information of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of held symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 is set to ON. .. When the gaming state is the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low-probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 stores the pending storage area 412b based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information stored in the execution area AE as numerical information is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines the pending storage area based on the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

It should be noted that in steps S1602 and S1603, the success/failure determination is executed based on the high probability mode success/failure table or the low probability mode success/failure table stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. In steps S1602 and S1603, the setting values stored in step S1710 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, are read out, and then the high-probability mode hit table or the low-probability mode hit table corresponding to the set values is read one by one. You may make a selection and judge whether or not it is true or false.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15A). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). .. Further, when the result of the hit/miss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is a 5R regular jackpot to “A01” to “O”. Any one of "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 is one of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R certainty variation jackpots. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" with "C" indicating that the variation pattern "01" to "03" is a 16R probability variation jackpot. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. When the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of change pattern “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information indicating whether the reach is out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/out, or completely out.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36, and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of symbols on the main display unit 36, it sets the variable display flag to ON. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 is being performed. Further, when starting the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 36, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery number” stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit/no hit determination based on the low probability mode hit/miss table in step S1603 is out, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive outs” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit/win result is a big hit. If there is, clear "Number of times of continuous deviation" to 0 times.

[Setting change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the setting value changing process is ended. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag that is turned on in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and when it is the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value When the change processing is finished and the jackpot gaming state is not set (step S1702: No), the processing is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display state nor the jackpot game state (No in steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting. It is determined whether or not the value changing operation unit 46 is operated to turn on the power of the set value display unit 45. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1704 and switches the power of the set value display unit 45 from off to on. If not (step S1703: NO), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704). A number indicating the read set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 (step S1705). As a result, the current set value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the set value display flag indicating that the set value is being displayed on the set value display unit 45 (step S1706), and ends the set value changing process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. When the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708, and when the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). That is, when the set value display unit 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the set value changing process is ended.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1709, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, and vice versa. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation is displayed.

If the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is “6” and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, it is displayed on the set value display unit 45. If the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is "1" and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the setting is performed. The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". Further, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is “6”, it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is “1”. In addition, it may not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the set value displayed on the set value display unit 45 as a set value, and ends the set value changing process. Thereby, when the power of the set value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as a valid set value and the game information of the RAM 412 is finally set. It is saved in the storage area 412d. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the set value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the set value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display section 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, set value change. It is determined whether the operation unit 46 is operated to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1712, and the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. In the case (step S1711: No), the setting value changing process is ended. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the set value display unit 45 displays the set value by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment display. Is turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the low probability mode hit/miss table according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. (See FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag to off, and ends the set value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14A) and a high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is selected. That is, since the win/loss table having the same set value is selected as the low probability mode hit/miss table and the high probability mode hit/miss table, the operation of changing the set value is easy. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the setting value of the low-probability mode is set to "1" and the setting value of the high-probability mode is set to "6". It becomes possible to do.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the number of out balls read out reaches 60,000. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1805, and when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of general winning award coins and the number of first winning award coins for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 sets the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information read out in step S1801, the number of general winning award coins for base calculation of the base information read out in step S1803, and the first number of award winning coins payout. Based on this, the current state base BL is calculated, and the current state base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29(A)). The current state base BL (%) is calculated as 100×(number of coins paid out in general winning a prize+number of coins paid out in a first winning prize)/number of outs.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(A) and FIG. 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base two times before in the base information (step S1805), BL is shifted to the 60,000-ball base B1 last time (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the general winning award coin payout number, the first award winning coin payout number and the out ball number, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S1808). ).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 ends, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates another specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809). ), and the specific performance information update process ends. The specific performance in this case is, for example, the number of lots per unit lottery, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current status base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1908 of FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ), the process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 in-display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. When the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1917 of FIG. 32, and when the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No). ), the process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before the previous time, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. When the B2 currently displayed flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and when the B2 currently displayed flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No). ), the process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 displaying flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), The display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information saved in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag ON (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 30 (step S1901) (step S1901). (S1908), it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), and the procedural steps proceed to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "1" indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33%. , “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 in-display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the 60,000-ball base B1 last time on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1913), and The display control process ends.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the current-state base BL by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step). (S1916), the display control process is ended.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 31 (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. (S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No). ), the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before, which is included in the information (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% two times before. , “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that configure the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 in-display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the constant time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is displayed. The letters and numbers that indicate are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 in-display flag to off (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1923). (S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 32 (step S1902: step S1922). (S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), and the procedural steps proceed to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to off (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current status base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag on (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display devices 431 to 434, and thus the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed two times before. The letters and numbers that indicate are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to off (step S1933) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). (S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination portion 27, startup processing at startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at power failure, etc. Description of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process of 1 msec cycle.

As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 performs display order setting processing (step S2000), counter updating processing (step S2001), command determination processing (step S2002), and variable game production processing (step S2003) in the sub-timer interrupt processing. , Jackpot game effect processing (step S2004), and set value suggestion processing (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game setting value (setting value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 and displays the 7-segment display portion 39 in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In the present embodiment, five numbers for identifying a plurality (five) of game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value by executing the setting value suggestion process in the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order of displaying the five numbers that specify the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is the numerical display order determining table referenced in the display order setting processing of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example. Hereinafter, details of the display order setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers that specify the non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. .. Further, the display order setting flag is initially set to off when the game machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the sub-timer interrupt process by the startup process of the voice lamp control device, it is displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The order of numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016, which will be described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set.

By the way, the power of the game machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, so that the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Can be prevented from being monotonized.

Here, when the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2012, and when the display order setting flag is OFF (step S2011: No), the processing is step S2014. Move to.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
When the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set for defining the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is used in the command determination processing of FIG. 37 described later. In step S2121, it is turned on. When the setting value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to off (step S2013), and then shifts the processing to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set. By setting the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 when the set value is changed in this way, it is possible to determine the display order of the numbers according to the set value. It is possible to prevent monotonous presentation of information on the display unit 39.

On the other hand, when the set value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512, and further refers to the setting value and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 ( Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of a numerical display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a display order and 7-segment display section 39 described in the numerical display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A). It is a figure which shows the correspondence with the display order of the number in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the numeral display order determination table, lottery is performed for each of the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the game machine 10. The display order of the numbers is defined by the random number value. The lottery random number value is 120 from 0 to 119, one display order is associated with each lottery random number value, and the selection probabilities of the respective display orders are the same. The display order is the display order A1 to A120 selected when the set value is 1, the display order B1 to B120 selected when the set value is 2, the display order C1 to C120 selected when the set value is 3, and the setting Including the display order D1 to D120 selected in the case of the value 4, the display order E1 to E120 selected in the case of the setting value 5, and the display order F1 to F120 selected in the case of the setting value 6, the setting value 1 For each of ~6, 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

The display order A1 to A120 that is selected when the setting value 1 is the five numbers "2" that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 ~ The order of displaying "6" is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, since the set value is 1, when any of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the random number value, the number "1" that identifies the set value 1 is 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value 2 is specified specifies setting values “1”, “3” to “6” setting values 2 to 6 other than the numeral “2” that specifies the setting value 2. The order of displaying the five numbers "2" to "6" is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, since the setting value is 2, when any one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the random number value, the number "2" that specifies the setting value 2 is 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

The display order C1 to C120 that is selected when the setting value 3 is set includes five numbers "1" and "1" that specify setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1. The order of displaying "2" and "4" to "6" is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number “3” that specifies that the setting value is 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

The display order D1 to D120 that is selected when the setting value 4 is set includes five numbers "1" to "1" that specify the setting values 1 to 5, 5 and 6 other than the number "4" that specifies the setting value 4. The order of displaying "3", "5", and "6" is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number “4” that specifies that the setting value is 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

The display order E1 to E120 selected when the setting value 5 is five numbers “1” to “4” that specify the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number “5” that specifies the setting value 5. , "6" are displayed in the specified order (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when any one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the setting value is 5, the numeral “5” that specifies that the setting value is 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value 6 is displayed displays five numbers “1” to “5” that specify the setting values 1 to 5 other than the number “6” that specifies the setting value 6. The order to perform is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when any of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the numeral “6” that specifies that the setting value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

Then, when the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, the MPU 51 is set to define the jackpot probability in the game machine 10 when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes). The order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set according to the game set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on, the number display order determination table is changed by changing the set value. The display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the. As a result, when a predetermined condition (for example, power-on or setting change) is satisfied, it becomes possible to display the numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order during the specified period. In the game hall, since the power of the game machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the store, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. The display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Can be prevented from being monotonized.

In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and when the set value is changed. The display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are satisfied. The predetermined condition in this case will be described in a third embodiment to be described later, but as the predetermined condition, for example, a predetermined period is started, a big hit game is started, a big hit game opening/closing execution mode. Is started. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set by the satisfaction of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the monotonous display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Further, in the numerical display order determination table shown in FIG. 36A, for the same set value, all numerical display orders have the same probability, but the numerical display order is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, the numerical display order determination table may be set such that the probability that at least a part of the numerical display order is selected for the same set value is different from other numerical display orders. That is, it may be possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and, on the contrary, to make it difficult to select a specific display order. In this way, if the probability that at least a part of the numerical display order is selected according to the set value is set to be different from the other numerical display order, it is easy to select a specific numerical display order according to the set value. However, it is also possible to make it difficult to select a particular numerical display order. That is, unlike the case where the display order of all the numbers is selected to be the same, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. It is also possible to do. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the possibility that the set value is high and the possibility that the set value is low. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (eg, set value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to the high set value (eg, set value 5 or more) is delayed. You may In this case, by leaving the possibility of being a high setting value to the end when it is a low setting value, it is possible to make it a low setting value while making the player have an expectation of being a high setting value. It is possible to prevent the player from being identified early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine 10 from being terminated early while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine 10. On the contrary, when the set value is the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) is delayed. May be. In this case, the number corresponding to the high setting value and the number corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the setting value is identified as the high setting value, and the player The possibility of being a low setting value remains until just before it is understood that is a high setting value. As a result, the player can enjoy the throb feeling until just before the player is aware that the high set value is a high set value that is advantageous to the player or a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player. .. Further, regardless of the set value, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not slow, and for example, the slowest display order may be easily selected. In this case, the number showing the most unfavorable non-setting value for the player is displayed last, so until the last number is displayed, the most unfavorable non-setting value for the player and the player more than that. The possibility of non-set values that are advantageous to As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the game setting value (big hit probability) is the most unfavorable for the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the machine.

Further, it is conceivable to set the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the high set values and the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set values such that the display order is delayed so that the numbers can be easily selected. For example, a numerical display order in which at least one of “1” and “2” corresponding to the low set value and at least one of “5” and “6” corresponding to the high set value is displayed later is selected. It is also possible to make it easier. Also in this case, the set value may be a high set value that is advantageous to the player and a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value. You can enjoy the excitement as if it is a high setting value or a low setting value until just before you grasp.

Further, except when the set value is the highest set value (the set value is 6), the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values higher than the set value is delayed so that the number display order is set easily. It is possible. For example, the priority of a number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is higher than the set value is lower than the number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is lower than the set value. Is possible. In this way, by delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values higher than the setting value, it is possible to make the player expect the setting value to be higher than the actual setting value just before grasping the setting value. You can As a result, it is possible to infer the non-set value (set value) while enjoying the possibility that the set value is high until just before the user grasps the set value. On the contrary, unless the set value is the minimum set value (the set value is 1), the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values lower than the set value is delayed, and thus the number display order is easily selected. It is possible to set it as follows. For example, the priority of a number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is lower than the set value is lower than the number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is higher than the set value. Is possible. In this way, by delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values lower than the set value, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set value are not displayed immediately before the set value is grasped. It is left as a display number. As a result, the final set value candidates are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, finally, the player's advantageous game set value is grasped as the set value, so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

Further, regardless of the set value, it is conceivable that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value of 5 or more) is delayed is set so as to be easily selected. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) are earlier to be selected easily. In this way, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value is delayed, so that the higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to expect a high set value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the set value is expected to be high while the non-set value is expected. You can enjoy by guessing (setting value).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values in the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stopped symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by 1. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination processing executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command is received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and becomes the processing target. Remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a fluctuation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and an effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51, the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38 (A)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, the variation type table (see FIG. 38 (B)) and the effect type table ( The variation pattern is determined based on FIGS. 39A to 39C) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Moreover, MPU51 sets the jackpot flag according to a jackpot classification to ON, when the fluctuation pattern command contains the information regarding a jackpot classification. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R regular jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot type. Is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols consists of the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is secondly stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(A)) corresponding to normal reach, a super reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(B)) corresponding to super reach, and a special reach. The special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39C) is included.

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display portion 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38(A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot), which is a symbol combination, "777". "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, and the other than "333" and "777" is a 5R regular jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot and 16R certainty variation jackpot. It is assumed.

The lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular big hit", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is the 5R certainty jackpot or the 16R certainty jackpot (probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the symbol combinations of the doublet other than the symbol combination “333” indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333", which is the decorative symbol stop display result suggesting the 5R normal jackpot, can be stopped and displayed. And when the lottery result is "5R certainty variation jackpot", when a decorative symbol other than "3" except "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, MPU51 is a 5R certainty variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probabilistic change promotion effect that is explicitly specified.

Further, the lottery result is "16 probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns of "1" to "9", the first stop with a predetermined probability from the decorative pattern of "1" to "9" The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the symbol display stop display of the decorative symbols is a display other than the "777" symbol combination indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R certainty variation jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, and determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the first stop symbol determined earlier. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 at the game time is determined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols “1” to “9”. To be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “out”, the out type selected based on the out type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the first stop previously determined The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the disengagement type is front-rear reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the release type is a reach other than the front/back detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. Further, when the disengagement type is completely disengaged, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol in the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 38B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the fluctuation type table, the contents of the fluctuation display time and the fluctuation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “A01” whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern is “01”. In addition, the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “02”. The variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “C03” in which the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “03”. Further, the variation pattern time “7s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “D04” in which the lottery result is “out” and the variation pattern is “04”. The fluctuation pattern command “D05” with the result “out” and the fluctuation pattern “05” is associated with the fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern”.

Furthermore, FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 39(B) is the last in the variable game effect. FIG. 39C is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual effect type is the super reach effect, and FIG. 39C is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect. It is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where there are five types of effect corresponding to each variation type, but the number of effect types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). Are defined as "effect pattern X1" to "effect pattern X5". Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the effect patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are effects in which the normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state is executed after the high-speed variation effect in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed is completed. The final individual effect type is an effect that is a normal reach effect.

Further, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Has been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the high-speed variable effect is finished, and the final individual effect type has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect. This is a production that develops into a super reach production that is expensive and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super-reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super-reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super-reach effect after the high-speed variable effect ends without passing through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Has been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the special reach effect pattern type selection is performed according to the lottery result for the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high speed variable effect is finished, and further the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are the final individual effect types. It is a production that has a higher expectation of jackpots than the reach production and develops into a special reach production that has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. In addition, the special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after completion of high speed fluctuation production or normal reach production without passing through at least one of normal reach production and super reach production. You may stay.

Then, the MPU 51 sends to the RAM 512 the display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter updating process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and the MPU 51 changes based on the variable display counter whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed. It is possible to determine the remaining display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) to the display control device 6 to determine the command. The process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses, The variation of the decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of the decorative pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the change type (effect pattern type) specified by the display change pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. ..

Further, when the display variation pattern command is output to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variation game effect in-progress flag to ON. The variable game effect flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that the big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107. If the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process To Step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening/closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The big hit game effect start flag is a flag for starting the big hit game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the big hit game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when making a judgment.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is started, and is set when the round game is started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2110, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2109: No), the process To step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to on (step S2310) and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when ending the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the round game end command (step S211: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2112, and if the received command is not the round game end command (step S211: No), the process To step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out-ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and the main timer of FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, when the received command is the special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2114, and when the received command is not the special out ball detection command (step S2113: No). , And the process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out-ball detection flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The special out-ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out-ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending in the jackpot game is started, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2116, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), the process is performed. The procedure moves to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. Further, the ending effect start flag is referred to in step S2201 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40 when it is determined whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. It

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command indicating that the big hit game is ended, and is set in the big hit game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process To Step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect (ending effect), and whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the big hit game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when determining. Further, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 when it is determined whether or not to turn off the illuminated segment on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a setting value change command. The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the changed game set value and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. 27. .. Here, when the received command is the setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2120, and when the received command is not the setting value change command (step S2119: No), the processing To step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the set value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed set value included in the set value change command and stores the changed set value, and ends the command determination process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 and is referred to for determining the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the variable game that notifies the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the variation pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. 37 is performed. A variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration unit 27, and the like.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) of the sub timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In the present embodiment, in the ending effect, the ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Set value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled, and the turning on and off of each segment A to G of the 7 segment display part 39 is controlled. To be done. Further, in the set value suggestion process, as an ending effect of the big hit game, a process of displaying an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the big hit game on the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect with the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process is step S2206. Move to.

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. As a result, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion moving downward flag which indicates that the stopper portion 383 is moving downward. Yes (step S2203). The stopper part moving down flag is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending effect start flag to off (step S2205). The set value suggestion process ends.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper downward movement flag that is set on at step S2203 is set on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is a timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2207 when the stopper downward movement flag is on (step S2206: Yes), and the processing when the stopper downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No). The process moves to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the stopper downward movement flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out-ball detection flag is set on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination processing of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. Yes (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that have entered the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37 in the big hit game opening/closing execution mode are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38. The number of special out balls thus counted is referred to in order to control lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control processing of FIG. 41 described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is whether or not the special out ball is detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is continuously off a predetermined number of times or more. You may judge by. If the condition that the stopper 383 is returned to the upper limit position is that no special out balls are detected for a certain period, even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted. ..

Here, when the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2212, and when the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), The set value suggestion process ends.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns on in step S2203. The stopper downward movement flag that is set is set to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the turn-on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, the MPU 51 responds to each jackpot game according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device during the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game at the ending of the jackpot game after a specific period has elapsed. Then, the 7-segment display control process for controlling the turning on/off of the 7-segment display 39 is executed. The details of the 7-segment display unit control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process for displaying the additional image corresponding to the light-on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. By this ending-added image control processing, it is possible to confirm the turn-on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 also in the symbol display unit 341. The details of the 7-segment display unit control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper part moving down flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set on (step S2216). The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination processing of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the big hit game effect (ending effect) with the big hit game effect end flag. Here, when the big hit game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2217, and when the big hit game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the setting. The value suggestion process ends.

<Step S2217>
When the big hit game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segments A to G that are turned on in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 puts all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 in the off state when the jackpot game effect is finished. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the game machine 10 will be a big hit. All or part of the number corresponding to the setting value) is displayed. Therefore, each time the jackpot game is executed, the player can obtain information for identifying or inferring a non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game. As a result, the player can specify or estimate the non-set value each time the jackpot game is executed, and thus can enjoy the identification or guess of the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of jackpot games increases, all (5) non-set values are grasped by obtaining information that can identify or infer a non-set value for each jackpot game. In that case, it is possible to grasp the set value. That is, since the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). Further, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag (5R certainty variation jackpot flag, 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to off (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. (Step S2301), it is determined whether or not the value of the special out-ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning port 316 and entered the special out port 373 of the clune device 37 in the open/close execution mode for the jackpot. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2303, and when the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 ( Step S2302: No), and since it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, the 7-segment display unit control process is ended.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37). .. Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303. Is determined (step S2304), and the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed based on this control content (step S2305). The details of the determination and control of the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already-displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42A) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306) and clears the value of the special out ball counter. (Step S2307), the 7-segment display unit control process is ended.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and FIG. 42(B) shows an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing an example of an initial state (unupdated) of the already-displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes the control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period (a period in which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is accumulated). This is an area for storing the order of the numbers to be displayed and the control target order of the segments A to G when displaying the numbers. The control order storage area includes a numerical display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

The numeral display order storage area is a 7-segment display section 39 or a segment display area until a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the regular jackpot). The order of the numbers to be displayed (number display order) is stored. The numeral display order is based on the numeral display order determination table (see FIG. 36) set for the setting value defining the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot drawing will be a big hit. Is determined in. In the numeral display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42(B), in the numeral display order setting process described above, the display order A1 is set based on the numeral display order determination table in the case of the setting value 1, and 7 in the predetermined period. “2”→“3”→“4”→“5”→“6” is stored as the display order of the numbers on the segment display section 39. That is, unless the setting is changed during the business hours of the game hall, a fixed order is determined for each business day as the number display order, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period during the same business day. .. In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same order every time the predetermined period starts, It is easy to display the numbers in the order that the numbers are displayed earlier, and it is difficult to display the numbers in the order that the numbers are displayed later. For example, when the numerical display order is “2”→“3”→“4”→“5”→“6”, the numbers are displayed in this order, so that “2” or “3” is likely to be displayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to display "5" or "6". Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily specified while allowing the setting value to be estimated and specified, and it is possible to enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. Also, since the numerical display order is fixed during the business day, it is easy to display the numbers in the earlier numerical display order, and it is difficult to display the numbers in the later numerical display order.For example, when the set value is low, If the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is low, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the low setting with a small number of initial hits. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game early, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

Further, it is expected that the larger the number of specific periods in the predetermined period (the greater the number of big hits), the more numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, as the number of jackpots increases, the number of non-setting values that can specify a plurality of non-setting values other than the setting value also increases. As a result, since the number of jackpots increases, a large amount of information for identifying a non-setting value can be obtained, and thus setting value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, the player can specify all non-set values by entering 35 or more game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period, and as a result, recognize the set values. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while identifying all the non-set values, that is, recognizing the set values, and whether or not the jackpot consort is continued (the jackpot type is a probable variation jackpot). Is it a normal jackpot?) You can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on it, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that the number display order is not limited to that set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10 or when the setting is changed, and when a jackpot game for a jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is started, etc. May be determined. In this way, the number display order is determined when the big hit game such as the first hit is started, so that the number display order is determined for each predetermined period, for example. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the number display order, and thus variations in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to identify all the non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and it is possible to recognize the set values early. As a result, the player has displayed all the non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past for the purpose of identifying the non-set values and recognizing the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that no numbers will be displayed.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of the segments A to G when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed to segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, changing the setting, winning the jackpot, etc., but is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10. In this way, the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, so that the player controls the segments A to G when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. As a result, the player can grasp the number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, since the player can guess and enjoy the numbers that have not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Note that the segment control order is fixed during the same business day by being determined when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the setting value is changed, like the numerical display order, while it is determined for each business day. It is also possible to do so. In this case, as compared with the case where the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp the numbers that have not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. This increases the difficulty of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values, so for example, when the set values are low (when the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from early recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

Further, the segment control order is determined when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started) or the like, as described in a third embodiment described later. Good.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already-displayed information storage area stores the numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period, the numbers in the middle of display, and the information regarding the segments A to G which have already been controlled. It is an area. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information about a flag indicating whether or not the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The already displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already displayed flag, a number 2 already displayed flag, a number 3 already displayed flag, a number 4 already displayed flag, a number 5 already displayed flag, and a number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 1 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 2 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 2 is not displayed on the part 39. The number 3 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 3 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the number 3 is not displayed on the part 39. The number 4 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 4 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 4 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 5 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 5 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 5 is not displayed on the part 39. The numeral 6 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 6 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. It indicates that the numeral 6 is not displayed on the part 39.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the display target number is a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The numeral 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is a target to be displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to ON, and the number 1 is 7 segment display when it is set to OFF. This indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 2 is 7-segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39. The numeral 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 3 is 7 segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39. The numeral 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 4 is 7-segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39. The numeral 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 5 is 7 segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not a display target in the section 39. The numeral 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to ON, and the number 6 is 7 segment display when it is set to OFF. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39.

The already-existing target segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been turned on/off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This already-target segment flag information includes segment A already-target flag, segment B already-target flag, segment C already-target flag, segment D already-target flag, segment E already-target flag, segment F already-target flag, and segment G already-target flag. including. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on/off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment A already-targeted flag indicates that the segment A has been the control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment A when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment B of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on/off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment B already-targeted flag indicates that the segment B has become the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment B when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment C already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on/off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment C already-targeted flag indicates that the segment C has become the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment C when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment D already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to be turned on/off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment D already-targeted flag indicates that the segment D has become the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment D when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been turned on/off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment E already-targeted flag indicates that the segment E has become a control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment E when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to be turned on/off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment F already-targeted flag indicates that the segment F has been the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment F when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment G already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on/off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment G target flag indicates that the segment G has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment G when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target.

In the already displayed information storage area, in the initial state, all the flags included in the already displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the already target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state is a state outside a predetermined period, that is, when the jackpot game for the jackpot (first jackpot) in the low-probability mode is started (the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37). Shows the state at the beginning of a predetermined period of accumulating. In the present embodiment, all the flags included in the already-displayed information storage area are determined when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46 described later (step S2404: Yes). That is, it is set to off (cleared) when the end of the predetermined period is a normal jackpot that is set.

43 to 45 are diagrams showing a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control information storage area and an update example of the already-displayed information storage area. 43 to 45, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39 and an update example of the already-displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content. (Step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 (the special out ball mouth of the clune device 37 during the specific period set for the jackpot game). It is determined according to the number of game balls 99 entered in 373). For example, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)) and the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, when the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are Some of the segments are controlled by turning on and off. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37 during the specific period is 5), the control order storage area When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to OFF), the 7-segment display unit 39 The five segments A to E in FIG. Then, when the content of the control order storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 42(B), since the numeral 2 is displayed first, the segment A is turned on and the segment B is turned on, The segment C is turned off, the segment D is turned on, and the segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, from the all extinguished state (non-control state) in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. 43(A) are extinguished, the segment A, the segment B, and the segment shown in FIG. 43(B) are displayed. D and the segment E are changed to a partially controlled state in which they are lit.

Note that the change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be performed all at once, or the segments AE may be sequentially controlled as the segments to be controlled. May be performed stepwise by turning on or off. When the segments A to E are sequentially turned on or off as control targets, the segments A to E that are control targets may be blinked or the like to explicitly indicate that they are control targets. Of course, it is not always necessary to explicitly indicate the segment to be controlled.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is finished, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already-displayed information storage area is shown in FIG. 42(C). The contents shown in FIG. 43C are updated from the initial state in which all the flags are set to OFF. Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 first displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E of the segments A to G are set as control targets. Therefore, the segments F and G are not control targets. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), in the already-displayed number flag information, since the numbers 1 to 6 are not displayed, the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, and the number 3 already-displayed flag are displayed. , The number 4 already displayed flag, the number 5 already displayed flag, and the number 6 already displayed flag are all kept off. Further, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2 whose five segments A to E are control targets is set to ON. Further, in the already-displayed segment flag information, since the segments A to E are control targets, the segment A already-targeted flag, the segment B already-targeted flag, the segment C already-targeted flag, and the segment D already-targeted flag for the segments A to E. , And the segment E already-targeted flag are set to ON.

Further, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), the value of the special out ball counter (set to the jackpot game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41. When the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 during the specified period exceeds 7, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37 during the specific period is 10), the 7-segment display section 39 In, a total of 10 segments A to G are to be controlled. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, seven (all) segments A to G are controlled to turn on/off, so that the numbers in the first display order are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the second display is performed. With respect to the numbers in the order, the three segments A to C are control targets for the second turn-on/off. Specifically, when the content of the control order storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (all flags are set to OFF). However, since the number in the first display order is 2, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, from the uncontrolled state in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. 44(A) are extinguished, the segments A, B, D, E and G shown in FIG. 44(B) are displayed. Is turned on and segments C and F are turned off to change to the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Further, in the segment display section 39, as shown in FIG. 44) is changed from the all segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed to the partial segment control state in which the segments A to C shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 44C, since the second number displayed is 3, the segments A to C are lit.

Note that a change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), and a part shown in FIG. 44(C) from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B) The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed stepwise by sequentially turning on or off the segments A to G or the segments A to C. Further, when the segments A to G or the segments A to C are sequentially turned on or off, the segment to be controlled may be blinked or the like to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, it is not always necessary to explicitly indicate the segment to be controlled.

When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the partial segment control state shown in FIG. 44(C) through the all segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B). In this case, the already-displayed information storage area is finally displayed after the contents shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B) from the initial state in which all the flags shown in FIG. 42(C) are set to OFF. 45(C) is updated. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), all the segments A to E of the segments A to G for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are control targets. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for the segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the number 2 has been completed, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The 2 already-displayed flag is set to ON, and in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag is set to OFF, while the displayed number 3 flag is set to ON. Then, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to off. Further, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the already-displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-targeted flag, the segment B already-targeted flag, and the segment C already-targeted flag for the segments A to C are set to ON. That is, every time all the already-targeted flags of the already-displayed segment flag information are set to ON (every time seven segments A to G are controlled), the already-displayed number flag information is displayed. The already-displayed flag for the number is set to ON, and the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the displayed number flag information is set to OFF, while the display target flag for the next display target number is turned ON. Is set.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled in accordance with the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, so that the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 is performed. All or part of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit are displayed. As a result, the player can specify or infer the non-set value based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, can recognize the set value.

By the way, as a gaming machine, like the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the gaming hall side being able to select the setting value. In this case, the gaming hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected payout value. When the set value is set low, the player does not know the set value because the player does not want to stop the game because the player recognizes that the set value is low. They tend to want to be gaming machines.

On the other hand, the player can infer (set down to a plurality of set values) or recognize the set value for the game machine having the set value in order to play the game on the game machine 10 having a higher expected payout value. I want good gameplay. As described above, the game hall and the player tend to wish to conflict with each other with respect to the game machine that suggests or clearly indicates the game set value.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the specific period from the start of the jackpot game for the first time to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for the normal jackpot, of the gaming balls 99 that have won the variable winning port 316, the special of the clune device 37 is special. The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball opening 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retaining section 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 after the lapse of the specific period is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled as many as the count number. To do. That is, unless the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit and the big hit game is entered, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor lighted. Therefore, unless the jackpot game is entered, the set value is not guessed or recognized.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, and for example, 1 to 2 (about 1 in 10R minutes of the round game) for one 16R jackpot game. It is expected that the game ball 99 will enter. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or estimate the non-set value by the 7-segment display unit 39 in one big hit. On the other hand, in the 7-segment display unit 39, after the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low-probability mode becomes a jackpot is started, the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game ends (ending is It is controlled according to the total number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period until the start). In other words, during the predetermined period, if the first hit is a probability varying big hit, it will not end as long as the big hit condominium in the high probability mode continues, and the opening and closing execution of the normal big hit game when the normal big hit is won It continues until the mode ends. That is, in the present embodiment, while having the playability that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and thus the set value, as the jackpot series in the high-probability mode continues, the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37 is used. When a large number of game balls 99 are expected to be entered, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and when 35 or more game balls 99 are entered into the special out nozzle 373 in a predetermined period, A non-set value (set value) can be specified with certainty. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, there is information capable of inferring a set value according to the number of specific conditions established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Since the expected value of the number of entered balls of the game ball 99 into the special out nozzle hole 373 is low in a single-shot jackpot, it is difficult to guess or recognize a non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, it is difficult to estimate or recognize a non-set value (set value) when the number of consecutive holidays is small, but as the number of consecutive holidays increases, a game ball to the special out ball end 373. Since the expected value of the number of incoming balls of 99 is high, the game is less difficult to guess the non-set value (set value). That is, in the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated by identifying or estimating some or all of the plurality of non-set values by stacking all or some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. is there. In this way, in the gaming machine 10, while suppressing the setting value from being easily specified or guessed (narrowed down), a more accurate non-setting value (setting value) can be set by the jackpot condominium while meeting the wishes of the store. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the wishes of the player. This provides the gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, an image suggesting or clearly indicating a set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed. The image that suggests or clearly indicates the setting value is displayed on, for example, a jackpot confirmation screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as ART or AT, a continuation screen, and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. To be done. Specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate a setting value as a jackpot game end screen, there is a certain probability that it is a specific setting value or more (for example, an intermediate setting. Value (setting value 4 to 6) or more), high setting value (eg setting value 5 or 6), odd setting value (eg setting value 1, 3 or 5), even setting value ( For example, a screen is displayed that indicates or clearly indicates that the setting value is 2, 4 or 6), that it is not a specific setting value (for example, negation of the setting value 1), or that it is the highest setting value (for example, setting value 6). ..

However, in the conventional suggestion or manifestation of the set value in the slot machine, the probability that a default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate the set value is presented is set so that the set value is not easily specified or inferred, and the set value is set. The probability that a screen that suggests or clarifies is presented is set low. In particular, the probability that the suggestion or manifestation of the set value for the advantageous set value for the player or the manifestation of the specific set value is executed is set low. Further, the suggestion of an odd set value or an even set value tends to have low reliability, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Further, in the slot machine, even if it suggests or clearly indicates that it is a high setting value, no suggestion or manifestation that denies it is a high setting value (for example, setting value 5 or 6) is executed, and it is particularly high. No suggestion or clarification that the value is set value (for example, set value 6) is executed. That is, in the slot machine, the presentation of information disadvantageous to the player, such as denying the high set value, is not executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is set according to the number of specific conditions established in the predetermined period as described above, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Information (non-set value) whose value can be estimated is displayed as numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, since the numbers of the non-setting values are displayed one by one on the 7-segment display unit 39, the setting values can be guessed because a part of the non-setting values can be specified or guessed. Since all the non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, the set value can be specified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fundamentally different from the suggestion or indication of the set value at a fixed rate as used in a gaming machine such as a slot machine. The set value can be recognized by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the. Further, in the present embodiment, the non-set value (set value) is explicitly shown depending on the number of specific conditions (the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out nozzle 373) that is satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Or, it is suggested, and also in this respect, it is different from the conventional gaming machine in which the suggestion or manifestation of the set value is executed at a constant rate. Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of jackpots increases, the difficulty of identifying or inferring a part or all of the plurality of non-set values is reduced. It is different from the suggestion or explicitness of the setting value of.

Then, in the present embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out nozzle 373) satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Unlike the conventional gaming machine, the frequency of presenting the information for specifying the set value does not decrease, and as long as the predetermined period continues (the jackpot Renso continues. As long as the information for specifying the non-set value (set value) is continuously presented, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the set value and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values in the predetermined period, all the non-set values can be specified. In other words, regardless of whether the non-setting values are high or low, all the non-setting values including information that is disadvantageous to the player are presented to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the set value is suggested or clearly shown in the conventional slot machine, even the disadvantageous information to the player is presented so as to deny the highest set value or the like. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as the information for specifying or inferring the set value, so that the game is continued in the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. It can be determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value of 5 or more) is delayed so that the numbers can be easily selected. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) are earlier to be selected easily. In this way, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value is delayed, so that the higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to expect a high set value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the set value is expected to be high while the non-set value is expected. You can enjoy by guessing (setting value).

[Ending added image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51 updates in step S2401 various information of the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41, that is, the current specific period elapses. The already-displayed number flag information, the displayed number flag information, and the already-displayed segment flag information are read out, and an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined based on these pieces of information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image showing the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image for which a non-set value can be specified or estimated (FIG. 47(B1), FIG. 47(B2), and FIG. 47(C). )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command for displaying the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending effect to the display control device 6. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, an additional image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47(A1) is a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 in the ending first half of the probability variation jackpot game, and FIG. 47(A2) is a screen of the symbol display unit 341 in the ending first half of the normal jackpot. Here is an example. 47(B1), FIG. 47(B2), and FIG. 47(C) are screen examples (set value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47(A1), in the ending in the probability variation jackpot game, it is clarified that the symbol display unit 341 shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the probability variation jackpot game as the first half part of the ending effect. The image to be displayed is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47(B1), in the ending in the normal jackpot game, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (time saving mode) after the end of the normal jackpot game in the symbol display section 341 as the first half part of the ending effect. An image that clearly indicates that you want to move to is displayed. In addition, in the first half part of the ending effect, in addition to the image that clearly shows the game mode to be transferred after the end of the big hit game, an image that clearly shows the number of big hit consorts and the number of coins played is displayed.

On the other hand, in the latter half part of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process of FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, It includes five setting value suggestive images simulating the 7-segment display unit 39 on which the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), as shown in FIG. 47(B1), the 7-segment display unit 39 is shown. The additional image including the image simulating the display state of is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) through the state shown in FIG. 44(B), as shown in FIG. 47(B2). An additional image including a set value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a set value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. Is displayed. Furthermore, when all five numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the end of the predetermined period, each number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C). The additional image including the setting value suggestive image simulating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47C, an image indicating that the numbers “2” to “6” other than the number “1” are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. In this case, it can be specified that the non-setting value is "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the setting value is "1".

Thus, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the second half part includes the addition of five setting value suggestive images simulating the 7-segment display unit 39. It is displayed as an image. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the jackpot game. As a result, when it cannot be known that the information regarding the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or the past 7-segment display unit in the predetermined period is displayed. Even if the display content on 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or infer the non-set value at the ending, and recognize or infer the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

As an ending effect of the jackpot game, whether or not an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is a design matter, and the ending effect In, it is conceivable that no additional image is displayed on the symbol display portion 341. In this way, when the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect, if there is a number displayed in the past in the predetermined period, if that number is not stored or recorded, it is first displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39. It becomes difficult to identify or infer a non-set value based on the numbers given, and thus to infer or recognize the set value. That is, by not displaying the additional image in the ending effect, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is increased, so the setting value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least it is not a high setting value. It can be prevented that it is recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from being ended early, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that triggered the jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R regular jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305. If the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending addition image control process is performed. To finish.

<Step S2405>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: YES), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF) and ends the ending additional image control process. That is, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area when the jackpot is the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or inferred, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified, or in order to increase the accuracy of inference, in a predetermined period. It is necessary to insert more game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, the game hall has an advantage that the player cannot easily know the set value. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or estimated. In addition, it is possible to identify or infer the setting value by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the estimation of the setting value is increased by the continuation of the definite variation jackpot (Okatsu Renso), and in some cases the setting value is It is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a game property of being recognizable. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

In addition, when the jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there is special circumstances, and in the high probability mode, the game is not ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first time to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. Thereby, even when the player who cannot know the timing (end of the predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated advances the game, the non-set value (set value) is specified or It is prevented that the game is ended immediately before the guess can be made. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to exclude the so-called hyena action of another player who plays a game at a timing when a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low-probability mode of the first hit, at least once before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. Not only is the jackpot winning of the condition a condition, but even if the predetermined period is started, the non-set value (set value) is high due to the high hurdle to identify the non-set value (set value) as described above. Until a certain amount is guessed or specified, a considerable number of game balls 99 are shot to the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot lottery are drawn. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the unit jackpot lottery number (easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery) can be sufficiently judged. As a result, when the player can guess or identify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the gaming machine 10 including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the unit jackpot lottery number is played. Since it is possible to determine the payout performance of, it is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of lottery units is large, it is possible to comprehensively consider and determine to continue the game. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of lots per unit jackpot is small, it is possible to comprehensively consider and abandon the continuation of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or estimating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 is a symbol at the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display unit 341. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the jackpot game. As a result, when it cannot be known that the information regarding the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or the past 7-segment display unit in the predetermined period is displayed. Even if the display content on 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player identifies or infers a non-setting value at the ending based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game, and recognizes or infers the setting value to advance the game. You can enjoy.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display unit 39 is It may be displayed on a display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display history in the predetermined period may be displayable in a special period other than the specified period. For example, in the standby state in which neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is displayed on the display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 by a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player. May be displayed. Thus, by displaying the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past 7-segment display This makes it possible to confirm the contents displayed on the section 39 if the contents are forgotten. As a result, it becomes possible to specify or infer the non-set value based on the display contents on the past 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like will be described in detail in a fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed in the symbol display portion 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, it becomes possible to confirm when the display content in the past 7-segment display portion 39 is forgotten. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed in the symbol display portion 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, anyone can confirm the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the vacant gaming machine 10. You can That is, it is possible to piggyback on a privilege obtained by another person to specify or infer a non-set value (set value), and so-called hyena action is allowed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to confirm the display history in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history in the predetermined period is limited in the period other than the specified period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to exclude a hyena act of piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person to specify or infer a non-set value (set value).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first hit is a probability variation big hit, a predetermined period is set from the start of the big hit game of the first hit to the normal big hit game for the normal big hit in the high probability mode, One predetermined period may be set for each big hit regardless of the kind of big hit. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is a first hit or a long-distance hit. In the predetermined period in this case, the start time of the big hit game or opening/closing execution mode is started, and the end time of the big hit game or opening/closing execution mode is ended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In the case of, the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 displays a number or an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value, and the non-set value is clearly displayed in the design display portion 341. You may make it perform reach production. As the non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, for example, it is conceivable to stop and display the decorative design with the number of the solo eye corresponding to the non-set value. In this way, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, and the symbol display portion 341 does not display the numbers. By executing the non-set value explicit reach effect that explicitly indicates the set value, not only whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game is a jackpot, but the player also has the first special symbol display portion 362 in the variable game. Or, paying attention to the numbers etc. stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display portion 363, and paying attention to the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 341, the variable game can be enjoyed. Further, when the non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, in the reach of the decorative pattern of the number corresponding to the set value, the number is not aligned with the doublet and is stopped and displayed as the outlier. It is also possible. For example, when the set value is 1, the decoration pattern can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555" and "666", but not displayed at "111" and the decoration pattern can be displayed. If 1 is 1, the reach is always missed. In this way, it is desirable that the decorative pattern is normally stopped and displayed as the number of the solo eye because the doublet of the number corresponding to the set value is not stopped and displayed. Since it is preferable that the solo display is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to enjoy the reach production from a viewpoint different from the conventional one.

Further, the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, such as the display of numbers or the like corresponding to the non-set value, or the non-set value explicit reach effect can be executed only at a specific timing Can also be considered. In this way, by limiting the display to the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 such as a number corresponding to the non-set value, or by executing the non-set value explicit reach effect by limiting to a specific timing, You can enjoy the game focusing on the variable game that is executed at a specific timing.

As the specific timing, for example, in the variation game executed in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery The timing of notifying that the jackpot is a big hit can be considered. In this way, by explicitly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in the variation game in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, the high frequency support mode allows the hold to be exhausted at high speed, and the probability variation game state or the time saving game state tends to be monotonous. You can enjoy the floating game in. Further, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games executed after the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is shifted is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times, when the number of variable games executed after the probability variation game state is changed is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more). ) May be set. That is, when a big jackpot is made early after the transition to the probability variation game state, or when the number of fluctuation games until the big hit is a humiliating state, a non-set value may be explicitly indicated or suggested. In this case, a non-set value is explicitly indicated or suggested as a bonus for the early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or as a relief for Hamari. Further, the predetermined number of times, when the number of variable games executed after the transition to the time saving game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or just before the end of the time saving game state (for example, 90 to 100 times). It is possible to set it. In this case, a non-set value is explicitly indicated or suggested as a bonus for the big hit early after the big hit game or the big hit just before the end of the time saving.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and steps similar to the processing procedure will be omitted. In addition, it is also possible to select each configuration and each processing function of the above-described first embodiment and the following other embodiments and combine them arbitrarily.

[Second Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for the jackpot game for the jackpot) A specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set, and the number satisfying a specific condition (the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 within the specific period). In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set based on the number of), all or part of the specific information (number) corresponding to each of a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) is displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39. The case when presented to was explained.

By the way, when the specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in the predetermined period as in the first embodiment, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of the continuous holidays are predetermined in the jackpot game. It is set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot game, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of the jackpot game. That is, at the jackpot festival, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple times. However, if all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, if all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple times, it is executed first. If the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game is not stored or recorded, it is not possible to specify the non-setting value (setting value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game that is executed first. It will be difficult. That is, when the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or infer the non-set value (set value), there is the trouble of accurately storing or recording the specific information presented in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, and as a result, It is also assumed that the player gives up specifying or guessing a non-set value (set value). In this case, it is possible to identify or infer a non-set value (set value), and the meaning of improving the interest of the game is buried.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific period is not set in the predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above, and 1 is set for each predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Only once, the specific information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is presented. As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific information for specifying or inferring the non-set value (set value) is set only once for the predetermined period based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Is presented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience in the case where the specific information is presented a plurality of times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is eliminated. That is, in the present embodiment, since the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and There is no specific information to store or record. As a result, the player can identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information presented only once for the predetermined period of time. The annoyance of accurately storing or recording the specific information is released. Therefore, the player can easily or effectively specify or infer the non-setting value (setting value), so that the player can enjoy the game while specifying or inferring the non-setting value (setting value). The interest is improved.

In the example of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for the jackpot game for the regular jackpot. The specific condition is that the game ball is inserted into the special out end of the clune device. Further, in the example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is set to one predetermined period. On the other hand, it is only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending addition image control process are different from those in the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is executed by the set value suggestion process of FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process performed, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

[Set value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggesting process in the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), the setting value suggesting process in the above-described first embodiment (FIG. 40). Different from (see), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), a game ball that has entered the special out mouth 373 of the clune device 37. Control of vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 that receives 99, and processing for counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 during a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). .. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 during the predetermined period. Is counted once.

Further, in the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, on condition that it is a 5R normal big hit game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 is controlled, and the game ball is retained for a predetermined period. By performing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the unit 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending addition image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , 5R normal jackpot game is set on the condition that the end of the predetermined period is the 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203), which is set on the condition that it is the 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203) (step S2203) S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control process]
The 7-segment display control process in the present embodiment is executed when the ending is started in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display unit control process in the present embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display unit control process (see FIG. 41) in the above-described first embodiment, When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the 7-segment display unit control is performed instead of reading the control order of the 7-segment display unit control information and the already-displayed information (see FIG. 42). Only the control order of information is read (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control processing of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is displayed only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period (after the end of the predetermined period). Since 39 is controlled (specific information is presented), it is not necessary to read the already-displayed information to control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending added image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending additional image control processing in the present embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control processing (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment described above, but the first additional image processing described above is performed. Step S2404 in the ending additional image control processing in the embodiment is omitted. That is, the ending-added image control process of the present embodiment is executed with the 5R normal jackpot as a trigger (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggesting process of FIG. 48) until it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot is hit. In step S2405, the already-displayed information storage area is initialized.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, the specific information (numerical value) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is set only once in the predetermined period. All or part of) is presented. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be stored or recorded by the player. As a result, the player can identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information presented only once for the predetermined period of time. The annoyance of accurately storing or recording the specific information is released. Therefore, the player can easily or effectively specify or infer the non-setting value (setting value), so that the player can enjoy the game while specifying or inferring the non-setting value (setting value). The interest is improved.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) are specified or inferred after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the specific period. The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information (numerals) for displaying is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as the specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set values are changed. The case of displaying according to (see FIG. 36) has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the number display order when numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed has been described.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-setting values as the specific information are displayed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the setting values are changed (FIG. 36). In the case of displaying each number on the 7-segment display section 39, unless the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the setting value is changed, The control order of the segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information than the specific information already presented is obtained, It is not possible to obtain new specific information. As a result, if it is expected that a small number of specific conditions will be satisfied in a predetermined number of times, such as a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, a specific condition to be satisfied , There is a concern that interest in specific information presented after a specific period of time may decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the order in which the specific information is presented (the numerical display order and the segment display order) is determined (changed) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, by determining the order of presenting the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is more than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even if the number is small, there is a possibility that new specific information will be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, such as a big hit game for a single-shot jackpot, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period is satisfied. It is possible to make the number of specific conditions of interest and also the specific information presented after the lapse of a specific period of time. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can specify or infer a non-setting value (setting value) according to the number satisfying a specific condition. Become.

The predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which the specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, opening a jackpot game, opening/closing execution mode, or starting the jackpot game ending. Is possible. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) each time the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the presentation order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, and thus the same specific information is repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time the jackpot game is executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to make the presentation order of the specific information in the jackpot game interesting, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game.

Also, as a predetermined condition, to win a specific jackpot (eg, probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, or jackpot in low probability mode), a specific jackpot game (eg, probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, or low probability mode) It is conceivable that the opening of the jackpot game for the jackpot), the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined condition in this manner, the number of times the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced as compared with the case where the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or a jackpot game. Therefore, the possibility that new information is presented with respect to the specific information that is presented in advance is reduced, thereby increasing the difficulty in identifying all non-set values (set values). , It is possible to prevent all the non-set values from being specified (setting values are specified) early. Thereby, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is possible that a predetermined period or a specific period starts or ends. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it may be considered that a specific effect is determined or executed as the variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, for example. Typically, the specific effect is a premium effect in which a big hit or a probability variation big hit among the variable game effects are fixed. Furthermore, as a specific effect, it is also conceivable that the decorative display is stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop) in a specific combination in the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed at “777” in the design display portion 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach-off eye such as “767”, a specific non-reach-off eye such as “367” is displayed. Temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed when the development effect such as super reach effect or special reach effect is executed as the reach effect in addition to the case where the stop effect is displayed (interlaced). Display) is considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is executed, for example, “7 development 7”, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a reach state (intermediate stop display), and It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as “development” is executed is temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when the predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as the predetermined condition, it is possible that the single-shot jackpot is consecutive multiple times, the presentation order of the same specific information is consecutive plural times, and the like. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information. Therefore, new information can be easily obtained as the specific information, so that a feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined condition that is first satisfied may be given priority, or finally. You may give priority to the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined conditions to be satisfied.

In an example of the present embodiment, a plurality of non-settings as the specific information are provided on the condition that the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started (the predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the values and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders (ending of the predetermined period After the elapse), all or part of the numbers for specifying the plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table referred by. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting processing, which is a difference from the above-described first embodiment.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The big hit game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the big hit game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination processing of FIG. 37. When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order is displayed. The setting process ends.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game effect is a jackpot in the low-probability mode (step S2602). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the big hit is the first hit and the predetermined period is started. Whether or not it is a jackpot in the low probability mode, for example, when the jackpot game is started, whether the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game is a low probability mode or a high probability mode In addition to including the probability mode information indicating the jackpot game start command, when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5, based on the probability mode information in the command determination process of FIG. The determination can be made by setting a flag indicating a big hit in the low-probability mode to on or off and confirming the flag by the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2603 when it is a big hit in the low-probability mode (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the big hit is a big hit (a big hit which is the start of a predetermined period). On the other hand, when it is not a big hit in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, when it is a big hit in the high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
When it is a big hit in the low-probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39. Is determined (step S2604), the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is the same as that in step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. It is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in. The determined display order of the numbers is stored in the RAM 512.

In addition, the control order of the segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders for the segments A to G are defined by the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process in FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. Probability is set to the same. The control order of the segments A to G is determined to be the same order for each number from a plurality of control orders depending on the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. It Further, the determined control order of the segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

In the present embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G are all controlled in the same order with respect to the numbers. May be different. That is, the control order of the segments A to G may be individually determined for each of the plurality of numbers corresponding to the non-set values.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order of presenting the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is more than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even if the number is small, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, such as a big hit game for a single-shot jackpot, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period is satisfied. It is possible to make the number of specific conditions of interest and also the specific information presented after the lapse of a specific period of time. As a result, it becomes possible to more effectively improve the enjoyment of the game by presenting the specific information in accordance with the number satisfying the specific condition in which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. ..

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the same design changes as the design change items in the above-described first and second embodiments can be made within the applicable range.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (ending of a jackpot game), specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is set. The case has been described in which all or part is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is finished with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined specified period (after the specified period has elapsed).

By the way, when a player misses or forgets to present specific information in a prescribed period, he or she forgets to specify or infer multiple non-setting values in consideration of the specific information displayed in the past. It is expected that you will want to reconfirm the information. Further, when the player is changed, it is assumed that the changed player desires to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the specified period, the specific information cannot be reconfirmed because the specific information is not presented outside the specified period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented in a special period other than the specified period. As described above, since the specific information presented in the past during the special period other than the specified period can be presented, the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past during the special period. That is, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when the player misses or forgets to present the specific information in the prescribed period, and when the player is replaced, the game after the replacement The player can confirm the specific information presented to the player in the past. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the player in the past, so that the non-setting values (setting values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

Here, as the special period, for example, there is a period in a standby state (waiting state for customers) in which neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is the standby period in this way, it is possible to confirm the specific information presented in the past while the game is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual effects of various effects, such as the variation game effect and the jackpot game effect, which are executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., from being obstructed as the game progresses.

In addition, when it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state, a predetermined input such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed on the specific display screen that can be shifted in the standby state. It is also conceivable that the operation is performed. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending or the like in the jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, the password or command is displayed by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game, and reading the matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone. It may be possible to enter by so-called mobile interlocking, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, on condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past in the waiting period, Only a player who can enter a password, command, etc., that is, only a player who has been presented with all or part of the specified information, can confirm all or part of the specified information that was presented in the past during the waiting period. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a so-called hyena act or a free ride in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by another player.

In addition, by reading a matrix type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be moved in the standby state using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone, all or part of the specific information presented in the past on the mobile terminal. It is also possible to make it be presented.

Further, the special period may be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending. By thus setting the special period during the jackpot game, the past specific information is presented in a state in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not clearly shown or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation or suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of the specific information. In addition, the jackpot game tends to be less attractive to the player because it is executed after the variable game clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but such jackpot games have been presented in the past. By presenting the specific information, the interest in jackpot games is improved.

Further, as the special period, it is possible to set it during a variable game. Here, in the total time that the game is executed (the time when the power is turned on in the game machine 10 excluding the time in the standby state), as a theoretical value, a variation game compared to the execution time of the jackpot variation game. Takes longer to run. Therefore, since it is possible to present the past specific information during the variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which the past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during the variable game, a certain period before the decorative design is stopped and displayed, for example, during the non-reach state in which the reach effect is not executed as the variable game effect or when the variable time is short, It is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation or indication of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery due to the stop display of the decorative pattern from being disturbed.

In addition, the presentation of the past specific information in the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed by the player's intention.

When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to present the past specific information at a timing that the player does not expect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game machine 10 with an unexpected game playability. Further, since the past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the game machine 10 without the player performing any operation on the game machine 10, even a player who has little knowledge of the game machine 10 , It becomes possible to know the specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among the players.

Here, as an example of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state, a variable game In the case where a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the reach effect is executed at a fixed rate (including 100%), a variable game or For example, it is decided to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the jackpot game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as the demonstration screen in the standby state, the player considers the past specific information presented in the demonstration screen and the gaming machine for executing the game from the empty base. Since it becomes possible to select 10, the degree of freedom and convenience in selecting the gaming machine 10 for executing a game are improved. Further, when the specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable game, when the specific information presented in the past is presented before the reach effect is executed, the presentation of the past specific information is performed. Since it plays a role as a prior announcement effect for the execution of a specific reach effect, the interest in the variable game is improved. In addition, the presentation of the specific information in the past in the variable game is an expectation suggesting effect (including a confirming effect indicating that it is a big hit) that suggests the degree of expectation (reliability) when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. It may be possible to execute it as a chance-up effect for improving the expectation (reliability). Even in this case, the interest in the variable game is improved. Further, when the specific information presented in the past is presented by the lottery executed at the specific timing of the variable game or the jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at the random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. For this reason, it is possible to particularly impart the unexpectedness to the game. In addition, when the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing. Is improved.

On the other hand, when the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the player's intention, the special information is presented without passively waiting for the past specific information to be presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10. During the period, the player can positively confirm the past specific information at his/her favorite timing. Therefore, when a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) are specified or estimated in consideration of the past specific information, the intention of the player is reflected in the timing at which the past specific information is presented without being limited by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, convenience is improved.

Here, as an example in which the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the player's intention, the operation button 20 is operated by the player in the special period set in the standby state, the variable game, and the jackpot game. For example, presenting the specific information presented in the past when a predetermined operation is performed for.

In an example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numerals) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the ending of the jackpot game (specified period) is displayed, and During the period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation buttons 20 and the selection determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the ending of the last three jackpot games is displayed. It is displayed on the symbol display portion 341. In the example of this embodiment, all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or a command. Is.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided in the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is a push button that is operated by the player, receives a pressing operation of the player in a standby state described later, and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as a top menu screen in a standby state screen transition process of FIGS. 61 and 62 described later. This includes the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214. Here, the tentative selection means a state in which the content of the tentative selection is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is, as shown in FIG. 54, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch which switch an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5. 211d is provided. These switches 211 a to 211 d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the selection buttons 211 to 214 are operated based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is started, it is determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is performed. Of course, when it is detected that the operation of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continued or that the operation of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is completed, it may be determined that the operation of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is performed. ..

On the other hand, the determination button 21B is operated by the player to determine the temporarily selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the determination operation switch 21Ba is operated based on the input signal of the determination operation switch 21Ba.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the determination button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives a player's operation on the touch key is provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the determination button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 for receiving a player's operation. It is also possible to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). The selection switches 211a to 211d and the determination operation switch 21Ba are contact switches and the like, but may be piezoelectric elements or the like as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player. ..

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, in addition to the process (steps S2000 to S2005) similar to the sub timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above, an operation detection process ( The step S2701) and the standby state screen shift process (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process of detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, 21B. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 determines the operation button operation detection process (step S2801), the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), and the selection operation detection pattern determination. Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of will be determined. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Further, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection processing, the processing of steps S2901 to S2903 is executed, so that the operation state of the operation button 20 for the three most recent operation states at 1 msec intervals is the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination processing of step S2802 in the operation detection processing, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history is set. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38(A)). Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started (see FIG. 38(A)). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is completed (see FIG. 38(A)). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination processing. Further, FIG. 59A is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3002, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3004, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times, and the second operation pattern is set. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. .. Accordingly, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continuing, and thus the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can grasp the time. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the long press operation is performed on the operation button 20 based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated, and thus the operation button effect based on the long press operation is performed. Can be executed.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), it is determined whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. It is determined (step S3005). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3006, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3007, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off. That is, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the first operation pattern to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process is ended. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3010, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and the first operation pattern is set. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). it can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 59(A)). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes the up selection button operation process, the down selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description will be omitted. It should be noted that in the lower selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description will be omitted. In the left selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

<Right select button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects an upper position from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “up selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “up selection operation pattern” It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three times as the operation states of the upper selection button 211. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. The MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “lower selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 41 detects the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times. Set all off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 that is determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “left selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the left selection button 213. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times. The 1st left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 for three times. The 1st left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “right selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the right selection button 214. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times. The 1st right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times. The 1st right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. The MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the enter button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the enter button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “determination button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

[Decision operation detection pattern determination processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. To set an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the decision button 21B. Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, and thus detailed description will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 generates operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). ..

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has ended). ..

Further, when the operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the decision button 21B for three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. The MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operation state when all the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off.

[Standby screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition processing executed in 2702 of the sub timer interruption processing, in the standby state in which neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button. In response to an operation on the button 21B, the screen of the symbol display portion 341 is moved, and processing for enabling the player to make various selections and settings is executed. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the symbol display portion 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the variable display of the decorative design is stopped, the number of holdings N and the number of holdings M are “0”, and when the jackpot gaming state is not entered, the variation of the decorative design is stopped. The status change stop screen is maintained. Then, when the player operates the operation button 20 after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and a cursor image.

The plurality of screen transfer images are images for selecting the display screen of the transfer destination, and include a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transfer destination). The multiple screen transition images are the 7 segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to the 7 segment display history selection screen displayed as "7 segment display history", and the character selection displayed as "character selection". A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen displayed as "character customization", and a transition stop screen for transitioning to "return" Includes transition stop screen transition image.

The cursor image is an image showing which of the plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected. Among the plurality of screen transition images, the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image is displayed. This is a temporarily selected item. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that “7-segment display history” is provisionally selected. In addition, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize the temporary selection. .. The change of the provisional selection item can be performed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (display screen of the transfer destination) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to the item is transferred. For example, when the enter button 21B is operated when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history", the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. Will be moved to.

The 7-segment display history selection screen is a screen that can be changed to a history screen in which the content of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display 39 is displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the three most recent predetermined periods, and the previous history screen in which the content of the specific information for the one previous period is displayed. It includes a two-time history screen in which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period two times before is displayed, and a three-time history screen in which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period three times before is displayed. Each history screen has a history image of the same form as the additional image (see FIG. 47(B1), FIG. 47(B2) and FIG. 47(C)) displayed on the symbol display portion 341 in the latter half part of the ending of the jackpot game. including. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of a predetermined period of time, and five settings imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 on which a number corresponding to a non-set value can be displayed. Including value suggestion image. In the example shown in FIG. 60, when the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period one time before, the segment 2 is displayed after the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It shows that C has a history of being lit.

Further, the 7-segment display history selection screen is a cursor image indicating that it is temporarily selected, and a previous history screen for shifting to a previous history screen displayed as "History 1 (previous)". Transition image, 2 times ago history screen transition image for transitioning to the 2 times ago history screen displayed as "History 2 (2 times ago)" 3 times ago displayed as "History 3 (3 times ago)" It includes a three-time history screen transition image for transitioning to the history screen, and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen displayed as “End”. Then, on the 7-segment display section history selection screen, the temporarily selected item (display screen of the transfer destination) is determined by operating the determination button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the enter button 21B is operated when the player temporarily selects the previous history screen transition image of "history 1 (first time)", the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display history selection screen to 1 Move to the previous history screen. Also, when "History 2 (2 times before)" is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is moved to the 2 times before history screen, and when "History 3 (3 times before)" is selected. Is moved from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the history screen three times before. When "End" is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is moved to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to switch from the 7-segment display history selection screen to any one of the one-time-before history screen, the two-time-before history screen and the three-time-before history screen by the player's selection. That is, the player can confirm the history information desired by himself by shifting to the history screen desired by himself. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the history while avoiding confirmation of history information such as previously confirmed information and information having a small amount of information, so that the history can be efficiently confirmed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information for identifying the non-set value in the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 different from the symbol display unit 341 in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Therefore, even when the information for specifying the non-set value is displayed, the visual confirmation of the image effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, since the display area of the symbol display unit 341 is generally large, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the symbol display unit 341. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be used to make various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the history information can be confirmed by the same operation as the operation for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of confirming the history information is improved.

In this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also possible to display a plurality of history information on one screen at the same time. In this case, since many histories can be confirmed at once, the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

Also, on the top menu screen, the display screen is moved to the character selection screen when the "character selection" character screen transition image is selected, and is displayed when the "character customization" character customization screen transition image is selected. The screen is moved to the character customization screen. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in a variable game effect and the like, and it is possible to customize the costume, accessory, hairstyle, etc. of the character.

When the “return” fluctuation stop screen shift image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen shifts to the fluctuation stop screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods is confirmed by operating the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state. You can Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, and the player can The player after the replacement can check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39, and thus the non-set values (set values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

Here, FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state screen shift process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the procedure of the standby state screen shift process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen shift processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the standby state is set (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effect flag set to ON in step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 to OFF (step S3101: No), and the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the big hit game effect process of step S2004, when the big hit game effect flag in the case of being set to ON when the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 is set to OFF (step S3102: No), in the standby state. Judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in the standby state when the variable game effect flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes). To judge.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3103 when it is in the standby state (No in steps S3101 and S3102), and ends the standby state screen shift processing when it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102). ..

<Step S3103>
When it is in the standby state (No in steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is the fluctuation stop screen. This variation stop screen flag is changed from the variation game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags except the variation stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state, which will be described later with reference to FIG. Is set to ON in step S3120. The fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is changed to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, when the fluctuation stop screen flag is changed from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109 of FIG. 62 described later, the fluctuation stop screen flag is displayed in the previous history screen process of step S3113. Is changed from the previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen, the display screen is changed from the second time history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen in the second time history screen process of step S3115, and in step S3117. It is also set to ON when the display screen is changed from the history screen processing for three times to the fluctuation stop screen in the history screen processing for three times. The fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the decorative display fluctuation display is started.

When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3104, and when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). , And the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination processing of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen shift processing is ended.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (FIG. 60). reference). That is, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen when the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen to ON (step S3106), and sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to OFF (step S3106). (S3107), the standby state screen shift processing is ended.

<Step S3108>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when shifting the display screen from the various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3109, and when the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), executes the process. The procedure moves to S3110.

<Step S3109>
When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen process, the item temporarily selected is changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated, specifically, the fluctuation stop screen, the 7-segment display history selection screen, the character selection screen, or the character Move the display screen to the customization screen. Further, when the display screen is moved from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transfer destination screen to on, while setting the top menu screen flag to off.

<Step S3110>
When the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen is set to ON. It is determined (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), The process moves to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), is the MPU 51 set to the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3112). The previous-time history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous-time history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. 63 described later. It If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112). S3112: No), and moves the process to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen processing, the display screen is shifted from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen when “Return” is selected. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), is the MPU 51 set to the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the second previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The second-time history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the seven-segment display history selection screen to the second-time history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. 63 described later. It Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3115 when the second time history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), and when the second time history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114). S3114: No), and the procedural steps proceed to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process twice and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second-time history screen process, the display screen is changed from the second-time history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen when “Return” is selected. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the second-time history screen flag is set to off (step S3114: No), is the MPU 51 set to the third-time history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the third-time history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6th previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. 63 described later. It Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3117 when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set on (step S3116: Yes), and when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3117). (S3116: No), and moves the process to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the previous history screen flag for three times is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process for three times and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when “Return” is selected, the display screen is changed from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the previous history screen flag for three times is set to OFF (step S3116: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON. Yes (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. When the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), the other screen process corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition process ends. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: NO), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
When another screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120) and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when all the screen flags are off when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, the variable game state or the jackpot game state is shifted to the standby state, and it is possible to determine that the display screen is the variation stop screen. Set the stop screen flag to on.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition processing, the display screen is displayed in the 7-segment display history according to the operation of the selection determination section 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) by the player. A process of shifting from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, or the three-time history screen is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the upper selection button 211 has been started, and the upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56. It is set to ON in the pattern determination processing. When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. Execute. For example, when "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time before)". (See FIG. 60). If the upper selection button 211 is operated when the “history 1 (one time before)” displayed on the uppermost side of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display should not be changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is not started, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection pattern flag to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the lower selection button 212 has been started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56. It is set to ON in the pattern determination processing. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. To execute. For example, when "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times before)". (See FIG. 60). It should be noted that if “down” displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected and the lower selection button 212 is operated, the provisional selection display may not be changed. The temporary selection display may be changed to "History 1 (one time before)" displayed on the uppermost side of the image (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the decision button 21B has been started, and is set to ON in the decision button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. It That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205). S3205: No), and the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and temporarily selects when the decision button 21B is operated. It is determined whether the item that has been done is "end" (step S3207). When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3208, and temporarily when the enter button 21B is operated. When the selected item is not “end” (step S3207: No), the process proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3207: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to ON (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen shift processing.

<Step S3210>
When the temporarily selected item is not “end” when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is “history 1 (one time before)”. It is determined whether or not (step S3210). When the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (one time before)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3211, and the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (one time)". If not) (step S3210: No), the process proceeds to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
When the temporarily selected item is “history 1 (one time ago)” (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3210). (S3211) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3212), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

<Step S3213>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “history 1 (one time before)” (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines that the item temporarily selected is “history 2 (2). Before)” is determined (step S3213). When the temporarily selected item is "history 2 (twice before)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3214, and the temporarily selected item is "history 2 (twice)". If not” (step S3213: NO), the process proceeds to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
When the temporarily selected item is “History 2 (2 times before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2 times before history screen (step S3213: Yes). (S3214) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3215), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “history 2 (twice before)” (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 determines that the item temporarily selected is “history 3 (3). Before), the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous 3 times history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60) and the previous 3 times history screen flag is set to ON. Then (step S3217), the 7-segment history selection screen process is ended.

As described above, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, and the three-time history screen. Then, it corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 for the predetermined period of the past three times. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, and the player can The player after the replacement can check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39, and thus the non-set values (set values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

In particular, in the standby state, the display screen is the history screen (previous history screen) unless the player intentionally shifts the screen unless the variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99. There is no transition to other screens such as the fluctuation stop screen from the 2nd previous history screen and the 3rd previous history screen. Therefore, the player maintains the standby state by stopping the launch of the game ball 99 without being restricted in time such as when the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. Thus, it is possible to check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, carefully and carefully at his/her own pace. With this, when the player specifies or infers a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) based on the past identification information, the player can consider carefully at his/her own pace. The convenience for specifying or guessing the set value is improved.

In the present embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39, which can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state, is a predetermined period for the past three times. However, the number of past specific information that can be displayed is not limited. That is, the specific information for a predetermined period of one time, two times, or four times or more in the past may be confirmed.

Further, the display of the past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and other display means may be used as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, is separately provided to display the past specific information. It may be a display unit. In addition to the symbol display unit 341, when there is a display unit provided for executing a part of the effect such as the variable game effect, past information may be displayed on the display unit. Conceivable.

Further, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first to third embodiments can be made.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, each of a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) is dealt with after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the specific period. The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is terminated as the jackpot game ends. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the specific information is displayed each time the specific period set as the predetermined period elapses during the specified period set after the specific period elapses.

By the way, when the numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled so that the numbers (non-displayed) are displayed. Setting value) can be specified. Further, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when the segments A to G are control targets in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, the first control target segment A is turned off. And the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are “1” and “4”. Then, the sixth control target segment F can be recognized as "4" by being turned on, and can be recognized as "1" by turning segment F off. That is, the number “1” or “4” can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. When the segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. Then, the second control target segment B can be determined to be either "2" or "3" by being turned on, and the segment B is turned off to be "5" or "3". 6”. Further, the segment C, which is the third control target, can be recognized as "3" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when the segment C is turned off. That is, the number “2” or “3” can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it is possible to recognize that the fifth control target segment E is “6” when it is turned on and “5” when the segment E is turned off. That is, the number “5” or “6” can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. That is, the numbers “2” and “3” can be recognized when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers “5” and “6” are the fifth control target segment. E can be recognized when the light is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the sixth control target segment F is turned on or off.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G are control targets. Therefore, even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are controlled, the next display must be made unless all the segments A to G are controlled. The control of the segments A to G for displaying the target number is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the number to be displayed next is started. Up to this point, information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in order to specify the number already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G have been controlled, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays unnecessary information for the player. May be displayed on the screen, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game each time a specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, so that it corresponds to each of a plurality of non-set values. All or part of the number (specific information) to be performed is dispensed every time the specific period elapses. Therefore, when a number corresponding to any of the non-set values is displayed in the previously passed specific period, the number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to identify or infer the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display section) having a plurality of information display sections (six individual lamp sections) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display section The information (number) for identifying the non-set value is displayed by. Each information display unit has two modes, that is, a display state in which specific information is presented (lighted state) and a non-display state in which specific information is not presented (light-off state). The non-set value can be specified by the specifying information displayed on the information display section. As described above, by setting the information display unit to one of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, as the identification information, only the information that can identify the non-set value is displayed, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, since the specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, unnecessary specific information is presented. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

The non-set value display means is not particularly limited, but for example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups capable of individually turning on and off, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display portions, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, dots Examples include matrix displays and plasma displays. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display units corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is set to the display state, and the end of the predetermined period is set until the jackpot game ends, at least the specific period. The information display unit that was previously in the display state is brought into the display state. For example, the information display unit that is in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display unit that is in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that at least in the specific period during the predetermined period But you can check. Therefore, without forgetting the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, when specifying a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, by extension the convenience of specifying or guessing the set value The property is improved.

In addition, the information display unit that is in the display state in the specific period may be always kept in the display state until the jackpot game in which a predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set to end, and only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp units to which any one of the numbers 1 to 6 is attached, a game ball is inserted into a special out nozzle of the clune device in a specific period. By winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed on the occasion of, the individual lamp part with the number corresponding to the non-set value is attached at the stage when the lamp lighting lottery is won without waiting for the elapse of the specific period. It is turned on. Then, in the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modifications of the present embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 64. Reference numeral 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on/off the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge portion 38A instead of the game ball retention portion 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and the above-described first embodiment. A lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 in the embodiment.

The special out ball discharging section 38A discharges the game ball 99, which has entered the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37, to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge portion 38A has a configuration in which the stopper portion 383 is omitted in the game ball retention portion 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and the game ball retention portion 38 except that the stopper portion 383 is omitted. It has the same configuration as. In such a special out ball discharge part 38A, the game ball 99 entered in the special out ball outlet 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharge part 38A. To be done. Therefore, the game ball 99 entered in the special out ball mouth 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the elapse of the specific period as in the above-described first embodiment, but is in the specific period. Even when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information for specifying a non-set value, and a plurality of (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be individually turned on and off. including. The first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are arranged side by side in a line (linear) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. Accordingly, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356 can be individually turned on and off.

The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp part 351, and one of a plurality of non-setting values is the game setting value 1 by turning on the first individual lamp part 351, and the game setting value is the setting value. 1 is denied. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp part 352, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 2 by turning on the second individual lamp part 352, and the game set value is the set value. 2 is denied. The number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp unit 353, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 3 by turning on the third individual lamp unit 353, and the game set value is the set value. 3 is denied. The number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp part 354, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 4 by turning on the fourth individual lamp part 354, and the game set value is the set value. 4 is denied. The number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp unit 355, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 5 by turning on the fifth individual lamp unit 355, and the game set value is the set value. 5 is denied. The numeral 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp portion 356, and one of the plurality of non-setting values is the game setting value 6 by turning on the sixth individual lamp portion 356, and the game setting value is the setting value. 6 is denied.

That is, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set value corresponding to the numbers is denied as the set value. R. When the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The numbers corresponding to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the state correspond to the set values.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set values are 2 to 6, and it is specified that the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66B, when the first and third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned off, the non-set value is 1, It is 3 to 6 and the set value is specified to be 2. As shown in FIG. 66C, when the first, second, and fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is turned off, non- It is specified that the set values are 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66D, when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, non- It is specified that the set values are 1 to 5, 5 and 6 and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is 5 is specified. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp parts 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp part 356 is turned off, the non-setting values are 1 to 5 and the setting values are set. The value is specified to be 6. Then, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Set value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of. The procedure of the setting value suggestion process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect with the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), the process is step S3311. Move to.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out-ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination processing of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3303, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the setting. The value suggestion process ends.

<Step S3303>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, if it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set. A lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the lamp. That is, every time the game ball 99 is entered into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. This allows the set value to be recognized. Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, in order to display the five numbers, the seven segments A to G need to be controlled five times each, so that the specific condition is 35 times (7×5 times). ) The above needs to be established. That is, it is necessary to insert 35 game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are in the lighting state. And, it is controlled only in two modes of the off state. Therefore, in order to display the five non-set values by the lamp display unit 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition may be satisfied five times or more. Further, in the present embodiment, the clune device 37 similar to that of the above-described first embodiment is adopted. Therefore, when the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display non-set values are displayed. It is clear that it will be lit with a few jackpots.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, The condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the difficulty of turning on the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily specified. That is, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily recognized.

Then, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is such that the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displays five numbers by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the above-described first embodiment. The difficulty level is set to be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or to at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356.

If the winning probabilities in the lamp lighting lottery are set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, a gaming property is provided in which the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value are lit is stabilized. It When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100×(1/7)% (=14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). To be done. This is because in the above-described first embodiment, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 by inserting seven game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37. This is also in the present embodiment so that, by inserting the seven game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373, on average, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is turned on. When the winning probabilities in the lamp lighting lottery are set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probabilities are not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and may be appropriately set. It can be changed.

In addition, the lottery conditions that trigger the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp part 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to the plurality of non-set values are special conditions of the clune device 37. When it is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the out-mouth opening 373, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the difficulty level of establishing the lottery condition. That is, if the difficulty of establishing the lottery conditions is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set low, and the higher the difficulty of establishing the lottery conditions, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is considered. To be In this way, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the degree of difficulty of establishing the lottery condition, it is possible to specify the degree of difficulty of fulfilling a specific condition necessary to light one individual lamp unit 351 to 356. It can be made uniform regardless of the type of condition. As a result, various conditions can be applied as the specific condition (more precisely, the lottery trigger).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp part 351 to 356 is different from that of the other individual lamp parts 351 to 356, a game having variations in the probability that the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value are turned on. Sex is given. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, it is conceivable that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having a slower control sequence are set to have lower winning probabilities. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 whose control sequence is earlier.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has won the lamp lighting lottery. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not won (step S3304: No), the set value process ends. ..

<Step S3305>
When the lamp lighting lottery is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads the already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already-lit lamp information is information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 which are being lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information, as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The already-lit lamp flag information is a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, and a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. , A third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth individual lamp section It includes a fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp section 356 is lit. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and is set to OFF when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are extinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), and all the first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned off. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 68C, the second already-lit lamp flag is set to ON, the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF, and the second individual lamp unit 352. Indicates that the first and third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all the already-lit lamp flags in the already-lit lamp information are set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the set value suggestion process. That is, when all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are turned on, there is no other individual lamp unit 351 to 356 to be turned on, so the set value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, if there is an already-lit lamp flag set to off in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
When there is an already-lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order of individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by the same procedure as the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the above-described first embodiment. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the setting value stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed. This lamp control order determination table is similar to the numerical display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above, and if the numbers in the numerical display order determination table are considered as the numbers attached to the individual lamps. Good. The numeral 1 in the numeral display order determination table in the above-described first embodiment corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, in the numeral display order determination table in the above-described first embodiment. The numbers 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the display order A1 is determined when the setting value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is the second individual lamp unit 352→the third individual lamp unit. The lamp unit 353 → the fourth individual lamp unit 354 → the fifth individual lamp unit 355 → the sixth individual lamp unit 356. Further, in the numerical display order determination table in the above-described first embodiment, the probability that each display order is selected is the same, and also in the lamp control order determination table in this embodiment, each lamp control order is selected. The probability of being done is the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but may be set when a predetermined period is started. Also, the lamp control order need not have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and the individual lamp units are controlled. The lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, the lamp lighting lottery is executed every time the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, and the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on when the lamp lighting lottery is won. Specific information indicating a non-set value is presented. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the set value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example of the already-lit lamp information shown in FIG. As shown in 68(C), the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp section 352 is set to ON.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lamp lighting lottery is executed every time the game ball 99 enters the special out mouth 373 of the clune device 37, and the individual lamp units 351 to 351 are selected when the lamp lighting lottery is won. The non-set value can be specified by turning on 356. That is, in the present embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by turning on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the specific period has elapsed. In this way, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set to either one of the lighting state and the non-lighting state, so that the non-set value can be specified by the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lighting state. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, unnecessary specific information is presented. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

<Step S3311>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process of FIG. When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3312, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S3311: No), the set value is set. The suggestion process ends.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type to be ended is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R regular jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313. If the jackpot type is not the 5R regular jackpot (step S3312: No), the setting value suggesting process is executed. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether there is a lit individual lamp section 351 to 356 among the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off (step S3313), the already-lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the set value suggestion process is ended. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are extinguished when the end of the predetermined period is the 5R normal jackpot. As a result, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on are maintained in the turned-on state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, the specific information that specifies the non-set value. .. Therefore, the previously presented specific information in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and the convenience in identifying a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, and thus in identifying or inferring the setting value is improved. To be done.

In the present embodiment, when the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is won, the non-set value in the lamp display unit 35 is dealt with. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on, but the lamp lighting lottery is optional, and the game is performed on the special out nozzle 373 without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment. When the ball 99 is entered, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value may be turned on. If the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of the game ball 99 to the special out ball hole 373 of the clune device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball hole 373 is set to the special out ball sensor 384. It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by allocating the route detected by the above and the route not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 that present the non-set value are in one of the two modes of the lighting state and the extinguishing state, and the individual lamp unit 351 that is in the lighting state. Information for identifying a non-set value is presented by the type (numerical value) of ~356. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, unnecessary specific information is presented. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

In addition, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on are immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, The individual lamp parts 351 to 356 which are turned on are maintained in a lighting state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information for specifying the non-set value is confirmed based on whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are always turned on. be able to. Therefore, without forgetting the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, when specifying a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, by convenience when specifying or guessing the set value The property is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, The condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the difficulty of satisfying the specific condition is adjusted by the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of turning on each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily specified. That is, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily recognized.

The lamp lighting lottery will be immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out mouth 373 of the clune device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery will be executed ( The fact that the game ball 99 has entered the special out opening 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly shown to the player on a display means other than the lamp display section 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), it is clearly shown to the player that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (the game ball 99 has entered the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37), and FIG. The result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly shown to the player as shown in (B1) or FIG. 69(B2), and further, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on as shown in FIG. 69(C1) or 69(C2). Information regarding the symbol is clearly displayed on the symbol display portion 341. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned on. There is a possibility, that is, an image for displaying the lamp display portion 35 (roulette) is displayed. In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is executed by the symbol display unit 341 (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out nozzle 373), the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out nozzle 373. Even if you miss the fact that the game ball 99 is entered, the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 also causes the game ball 99 to enter the special out nozzle 373, that is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 It can be understood that there is a possibility that it will be lit.

Then, when the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69(B1), information on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 which are turned on is clearly shown. In the illustrated example, it is clearly indicated that the second individual lamp section 352 is turned on. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery on the symbol display unit 341, it is possible to grasp whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are illuminated not only on the lamp display unit 35 but also on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, the convenience is improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the symbol display portion 341, during execution of the jackpot game (at least during execution of the opening/closing execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are lit is continuously displayed. To be done. That is, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 of the individual lamp part 35 which is lit are displayed on the symbol display part 341. In addition, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, for example, in the jackpot game (at least the opening/closing execution mode), information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on may be displayed. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-win, an image clearly showing that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-win is displayed as shown in FIG. 69(B1). In this way, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode), the information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 which are lit by the symbol display unit 341 is continuously displayed, and thus the lamp display unit 35 is displayed. Needless to confirm, it is possible to confirm the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit also in the symbol display unit 341, so that convenience is improved.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display unit 341, not on the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display portion 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Further, also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, an ending additional image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, in the ending of the jackpot game, an image simulating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed as the ending additional image on the symbol display unit 341. In the example shown in FIG. 70A, it is clarified that only the second individual lamp section 352 is turned on in the lamp display section 35, and in the example shown in FIG. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp parts 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp part 351 is turned off. Thus, in the ending of the jackpot game, the lamp display unit 341 displays the lighting state of the lamp display unit 35 by the symbol display unit 341, so that the lighting state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 turned on by the jackpot game can be confirmed. Therefore, convenience is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the lamp display unit 35, one in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged side by side in a line shape (linear shape) is adopted, but the lamp display unit 35 includes the individual lamp units 351 to 356. Is not limited to those arranged in a row, but other forms can be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring is used, and as shown in FIG. 71(B), the lamp display unit 35 arranged in a matrix is adopted. You can also As the lamp display unit 35, individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be arranged in a staggered pattern.

Further, instead of the lamp display section 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, a staggered pattern or the like may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first to fourth embodiments can be made within the applicable range.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, each of a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) is dealt with after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the specific period. The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is terminated as the jackpot game ends.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, a jackpot lottery is carried out to determine whether or not a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed by the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is informed by the variation game displayed in the variation display and the stop display. In the variable game, a variable game effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit is executed in various effect devices such as a display device from the time the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable state until the stop table is displayed. .. This variable game effect includes a main effect continuously executed from the variable display of the decorative pattern until the stop table is displayed, and various notice effects executed in the middle of the main effect. The notice effect includes an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree in the variable game, an effect that explicitly or suggests an event that may occur in the variable game in the future such as an indication or suggestion of the development destination of the effect in the variable game effect. ..

The various notice effects are individually determined separately from the main effect at the start of the variable game. Therefore, the contents explicitly or suggested by various notice effects may be duplicated. Specifically, for example, it may be explicitly indicated or suggested that the step-up effect develops into the super effect, and then, it may be explicitly indicated or suggested that the step effect produces the super effect. In this case, since the advance notice effect executed first explicitly or suggests that the super reach effect will be developed, even if the later notice effect explicitly or suggests that the super reach effect is developed. Due to the effect, the player cannot obtain new information. On the other hand, the player expects that new information will be obtained even in the notice production executed later. As a result, when the same effect is specified or suggested several times by the notice production in one variation game, the player may feel uncomfortable with the notice production executed later. It may cause a decrease in interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when multiple notice performances are executed in one variation game, the notice content for an event (future occurrence event) that may occur in the future in the variation game in those notice effects. When the notice effect including the same contents is executed, execution of the notice effect executed later is restricted. In this way, when the notice production including the same contents as the notice contents for the future event is executed, the execution of the notice effect to be executed later is restricted, so that the same notice contents are changed in one variation game. The notice effect is suppressed from being executed, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the notice effect to be executed later. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the same notice contents are duplicated.

Note that, as the notice effect, for example, a dialogue effect, a step-up effect, a mini character effect, a cut-in effect, a voice effect, an operation button effect, an accessory operation effect, a composite effect of two or more of these effects, and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the composite effect include step-up effect with dialogue, cut-in effect with speech, step-up effect with voice, cut-in effect with voice, serif effect by operation on operation button, step-up effect by operation on operation button, operation button Examples include cut-in effect by operation, accessory effect operation effect by operation on operation buttons, and the like.

In addition, when the execution of the notice effect to be executed later is restricted, the notice effect different from the previous notice effect at the execution timing of the notice effect to be executed later is executed under the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to change the contents). In this way, by changing the notice effect of the notice effect of the notice effect to be executed later to be different, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the same notice content being presented by the notice effect to be performed later. Not only that, but it is possible to present the notice content different from the previous notice effect by the changed notice effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as a predetermined condition (change condition) for changing a notice effect to be executed later to a notice effect having different notice contents when a plurality of notice effects including the same notice content are scheduled to be executed, For example, it is conceivable that there is an unpredicted future event at the execution timing of the notice effect executed later. In this way, the content of the unannounced future event can be set as the changed content of the notice by changing the content of the notice performance that will be executed later when there is an unannounced future event. It will be possible. And if the content of the unannounced future event is set by the later notice production when the notice contents are the same, the duplication of the notice contents that would otherwise hurt the player would be reversed. The game is transformed into an advantageous state for the player to be presented with new information, and the interest of the game is further improved.

Further, as a future occurrence event, that is, the notice content after the change of the notice effect later, it is possible to consider the effect (lottery result in the jackpot lottery) executed in the progress of the variable game. In this way, when the notice production including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the notice content after the change of the notice production later is executed in the progress of the variable game (by the jackpot lottery). With respect to the effect to be executed later, it is possible to know the notice content different from the previous notice effect in the later notice effect. As a result, the player expects that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game will be a jackpot based on the effect grasped from the notice contents of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by estimating or recognizing the reliability, the interest of the game is further improved.

Further, as future occurrence events related to the performance (lottery result in the jackpot lottery) executed in the progress of the variation game, for example, the total number of pseudo runs, the number of unexecuted pseudo runs, the occurrence of reach, the development destination after reach Comprehensive type (eg, normal reach effect, super reach effect, special reach effect), specific type of development effect after reach (eg, specific normal reach effect in normal reach effect (eg effect pattern X1 (see FIG. 39(A))) Normal reach effect type executed in step S), a specific super reach effect in the super reach effect (for example, a super reach effect type executed in the effect pattern Y1 (see FIG. 39B)), a special special in the special reach effect Reach effect (for example, special reach effect type executed in effect pattern Z1 (see FIG. 39(C))), an indication that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a sudden change jackpot. Occurrence of an indication of something, a change in the hold display (a change in the hold display mode (for example, color or pattern) such as an icon indicating the hold of the right to execute a variable game on a display device such as a pattern display unit) .. That is, the notice contents after the change of the notice effect later may be the effect (lottery result in the jackpot lottery) executed in the progress of the variable game. In this way, when the notice production including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the notice content after the change of the notice production later is executed in the progress of the variable game (by the jackpot lottery). With respect to the effect to be executed later, it is possible to know the notice content different from the previous notice effect in the later notice effect. As a result, the player expects that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game will be a jackpot based on the effect grasped from the notice contents of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by estimating or recognizing the reliability, the interest of the game is further improved.

Also, as the content of the notice after the change of the notice effect (future event that has not been previously announced) after the change of notice effect, there is another notice content that is pre-classified into the same notice content group as the notice content in the notice effect executed earlier. Conceivable. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when a plurality of notice effects including the same notice contents are scheduled to be executed, the notice effect is earlier in the notice contents group including the same notice contents. The notice content of the later notice production is changed to the notice content selected from the notice content different from the notice content (duplicate notice content). In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice content in the notice production to be executed later is changed to a notice content different from the notice content that overlaps from the notice content group that includes the notice content. Depending on how the content group is divided, it is possible to change the content of the notice in the notice production later to various contents.

Further, it is conceivable that the notice content group of the notice content is divided for each notice content of the same type or the same system. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when a plurality of notice effects including the same notice contents are scheduled to be executed, the notice contents in the later notice effect and the notice contents in the previous notice effect are Will be changed to a different type or similar notice. In this way, when a plurality of notice effects including the same notice contents are scheduled to be executed, the notice contents in the subsequent notice effect are the same or different from the notice contents in the previous notice effect or By changing the notice contents of the same system, it is possible to obtain two types of information about future events of the same system or the same system. With this, based on the different notice contents of the same kind or the same system, which are grasped from the notice contents of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, it is possible to infer or recognize a future event (effect) and enjoy the progress of the game. Because it is possible, the interest of the game is further improved.

Further, as the notice contents of the same type or the same system, for example, notice contents that can be classified as a notice effect group by having comprehensive identity, commonality, or relevance can be considered. Examples of such notice production groups include a pseudo-relation notice production group regarding pseudo notice, a development production notice production group regarding development production, a big hit confirmation notice production group regarding jackpot confirmation, a hold display change notice production group regarding hold display change, etc. An example of a notice production group that can be assembled is as follows. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when a plurality of notice effects including the same notice contents are scheduled to be executed, the notice contents of the notice effect of the later notice are the notice contents of the notice effect of the previous notice (duplicate). The notice content is changed to a notice content different from the notice content of the preceding notice effect in the notice effect group including the notice effect. As described above, when a plurality of notice effects including the same notice contents are scheduled to be executed, the notice contents of the later notice effects are the notice contents of the first notice effects (overlapping notice effects). Two types of information about future events that have comprehensive identity, commonality, or relevance can be obtained by changing the notice content from the notice content of the previous notice effect included in the notice effect group. Obtainable. As a result, future events (effects) are estimated or recognized based on different notice contents that have comprehensive identity, commonality, or relevance understood from the notice contents of the previous notice effect and the later notice effect. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is further improved.

Here, the pseudo-repeated notice production group includes, for example, a pseudo-repeated execution notice for notifying that the pseudo-repeation is to be executed, an unexecuted pseudo-repeated notice notice effect for notifying the number of unexecuted pseudo-repetitions, and a total pseudo-repetition number. Includes a total pseudo-repeated notice announcement. As the amount of information (specificity), the number of unexecuted pseudo-repetition number notice productions and the total number of pseudo-repeated notices are larger than that of pseudo-repeated execution notice productions, and the former notice production details the contents of the latter notice production ( It is also a materialized one. Therefore, for example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the pseudo-repeated execution effects are to be executed in duplicate, the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is first executed, and then the pseudo-repeated execution scheduled to be executed later. The notice is changed to the unexecuted pseudo-repetition number notice effect or the total pseudo-repetition number notice effect (the notice content is stepped up (upgraded) or detailed (reified)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort for the player by avoiding the execution of the advance notice of the same advance notice content, and thus it is possible not only to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered, but also to change the advance notice content. The detailed information increases the amount of information obtained by the player, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game based on the newly obtained information, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, in the development effect notice effect group, for example, a comprehensive development effect notice effect that gives a notice of a comprehensive type of the development effect executed after the high-speed variation effect in which the decorative pattern is changed at a high speed, and the high-speed variation effect is executed after the speed variation effect. It includes a specific development production preview production that gives a preview of a specific type of development production.

The comprehensive development effect preview effect includes, for example, a normal reach preview effect, a super reach preview effect, and a special reach preview effect. The normal reach notice effect is an effect for notifying that the normal reach effect will be executed (reaching the reach state), and can be executed when any of the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect is executed. The super-reach notice effect is an effect for notifying that the super-reach effect will be executed, and can be executed when either the super-reach effect or the special reach effect is executed. The special reach notification effect is an effect that notifies that the special reach notification effect is executed, and can be executed only when the special reach effect is executed.

Here, the development performance is the normal reach performance, the super reach performance, and the special reach performance in which the jackpot expectation (reliability) is the highest in this order, and the reach performance is stepped up (higher rank, more advantageous) in this order. ) Will be done. Therefore, in the comprehensive development production preview production, the jackpot expectation level (preliminary production level) is stepped up (ranked, advantageous) in the order of normal reach preview production, super reach preview production, and special reach preview production. .. Then, for example, when it is determined that the normal reach advance notice effect is to be executed in duplicate, the normal reach notice effect that is scheduled to be executed after the normal reach notice effect is executed first is the super reach notice effect or the special reach effect. It will be changed (step up) to the notice production. In this way, when the notice effect having the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the notice effect is stepped up, so that the notice effect having the same notice content is prevented from being executed, whereby the player Not only is it possible to prevent the unpleasantness of the game from being reduced by preventing the occurrence of discomfort, but it is expected that the advance notice content will be stepped up so that it is in a more advantageous state for the player. You can enjoy the progress of the game more, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

On the other hand, the specific development effect preview effect is for notifying a specific type of the development effect, and is executed in a specific normal reach effect (for example, effect patterns X1 to X5 (see FIG. 39A)) in the normal reach effect, for example. Type of normal reach effect), specific in super reach effect Type of super reach effect (for example, super reach effect executed in effect patterns Y1 to Y5 (see FIG. 39B)), specification in special reach effect The type of the special reach effect (for example, the special reach effect executed in the effect patterns Z1 to Z5 (see FIG. 39C)) is announced. That is, the specific development effect preview effect does not give a comprehensive warning that the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, or the special reach effect is executed, but which reach effect in the reach effect is executed. This is a notice specifying a specific type. When it is determined that the comprehensive development effect preview effect is to be executed in duplicate, after the comprehensive development effect preview effect is executed first, the comprehensive development effect preview effect to be executed later is The notice production is changed (detailed and embodied) with the notice content that a specific reach production in the reach notice production is executed.

Here, generally, in any of the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect, a plurality of reach effect types having different jackpot expectations (reliability) are included. For example, even if the same special reach effect is comprehensively included, not only the special reach effect having a high jackpot expectation (reliability) but also the special reach effect having a low jackpot expectation (reliability) is included. The same applies to the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the jackpot expectation degree (reliability) in the variation game according to the development destination of the reach production (specific reach production type). Therefore, when it is determined that the comprehensive development effect preview effect is to be executed in duplicate, after the comprehensive development effect preview effect is executed first, the comprehensive development effect preview effect to be executed later is By changing (detailing, embodying) the notice effect that the notice content is that a specific reach effect in the reach notice effect is executed, execution of the notice effect having the same notice content is avoided. This not only prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and reduces the interest in the game, but also improves the amount of information that the player can obtain by increasing the details of the notice. Based on the information obtained in the above, the progress of the game can be enjoyed more, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the content of the notice effect to be executed later is detailed (embodied), it is possible to change the notice content of the notice effect later even if the notice content cannot be stepped up (ranked). Become.

In addition, in the jackpot confirmation notice production group, the jackpot notice production in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variation game announces (explicit or suggestion) the jackpot, and the lottery result announces (explicit or suggestion) a certain change jackpot Includes a sudden change jackpot notice production. The probability variation jackpot advance notice effect is to refine the advance notice content of the jackpot confirmation effect in the sense that the advance notice content is a probability variation jackpot, and to step up (rank). When the predetermined conditions are met when it is determined that the jackpot preview effects are to be executed in duplicate, after the jackpot notification effects are executed first, the jackpot notification effects that are to be executed later are suddenly changed. The production is changed (the notice contents are stepped up and detailed). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort for the player by avoiding the execution of the advance notice of the same advance notice content, and thus it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered, and the advance notice content is It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while being convinced that the jackpot is a sure jackpot by being stepped up and detailed from the jackpot to the jackpot jackpot, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the change of the notice content within the same notice content group is limited to the change of the notice content after the change to the notice content regarding a future event that has not been noticed. This prevents the occurrence of a contradiction in which a notice regarding an event that does not occur in the future is executed. Further, when the specific condition is satisfied, the notice content in the notice production later may be intentionally made to be a contradiction as the notice content regarding an event that does not occur in the future. As the specific conditions, for example, an effect that clearly indicates that it is a jackpot is scheduled to be executed, an effect that clearly indicates that it is a probability jackpot is scheduled to be executed, that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and the lottery It is conceivable that the result is a probable change jackpot, that a production with a high expectation (reliability) for a lottery result such as a special reach presentation is scheduled to be executed. When such a specific condition is satisfied, by generating a contradiction between the notice content of the subsequent notice effect and a future event, it is in a state advantageous to the player due to the occurrence of the contradiction, for example, the lottery result It is possible to know in advance that the jackpot is a big hit and that the special reach effect will be executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the occurrence of the contradiction while expecting the occurrence of the contradiction, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, when there is no unannounced future event in the same announcement content group, an unannounced future event included in another announcement content group may be the announcement content in the subsequent announcement effect. In this way, the unannounced future event included in the other announcement content group is treated as the announcement content in the later announcement production, so that even if there is no unannounced future occurrence event, it will be duplicated in multiple announcement productions. Information about future events (effects) different from the duplicate content is presented while preventing the content from being foretold. As a result, it is possible to infer or recognize future events (effects) based on different notice contents and enjoy the progress of the game, which further enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the predetermined condition is satisfied when the notice effect having the notice content that overlaps with the previously executed notice effect is executed, execution of the notice effect that is executed later is limited. The limiting method is not limited to changing the notice content of the notice effect executed later, and may be another method. For example, as a method of limiting the notice effect to be executed later, it is considered that the notice effect to be executed later is not executed with a certain probability. This certain probability is determined, for example, in the range of more than 0% and 100% or less, preferably in the range of 5% or more and 95% or less, and more preferably in the range of 10% or more and 90% or less. In this way, when the execution of the notice effect to be executed later is restricted, the subsequent notice effect is not executed with a certain probability, so that it is possible to infer a specific future event based on the setting of the certain probability. Since a variety of playability can be given, the interest of the game is improved. For example, by setting a certain probability according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, it is possible to predict the game performance that can predict the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the expectation (reliability) that the lottery result is a jackpot. It is possible to add various playability. Specifically, by setting the certain probability when the lottery result is a big hit, lower than the certain probability when the lottery result is out, that is, the lottery result is the non-execution probability of the later notice effect. By making the case of a big hit larger than the case of a big hit, a gaming property is provided in which the degree of expectation of a big hit when the notice effect of the same notice content is executed is increased. On the contrary, by setting the certain probability when the lottery result is a big hit, higher than the certain probability when the lottery result is out, that is, the non-execution probability of the later notice effect is the lottery result. By making the case of being a big hit smaller than the case of being a big hit, game performance is provided in which the degree of expectation of being a big hit when the notice effect of the same notice content is executed is reduced.

Further, when the lottery result is a big hit and the notice effect to be executed later is not executed with a certain probability, the certain probability may be set according to the kind of the big hit. For example, it is conceivable that the certain probability is set to decrease in the order of 16R certainty variation jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot, and 5R regular jackpot. That is, it is conceivable that the greater the jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the lower the non-execution probability of the notice effect to be executed later. In this case, when the notice production of the same notice content is executed, the amusement property that the expectation that the jackpot is more advantageous to the player becomes higher, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Of course, when the fixed probability is set according to the jackpot type, for example, the fixed probability may be set to be lower in the order of 16R certainty variation jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, or set in other order. You may.

Further, the certain probability may be set to be different between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. For example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, it is possible to set the fixed probability lower than in the case of a normal jackpot, and conversely, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the fixed probability may be set lower than in a normal jackpot case. To be In this way, by making the certain probability different between the probability variation jackpot and the regular jackpot, the probability variation jackpot expectation and the regular jackpot expectation when the notice production with the same notice content is executed can be made different. The interest of the game is improved.

If the notice production that should be executed later is not executed with a certain probability, there must be no unannounced future events in the same notice content group, or that there are no unannounced future events in any of the notice content groups. May be a condition. In this case, if there are no unannounced future events in the same announcement content group, or if there are no unannounced future events in any of the announcement content groups, the announcement production scheduled to be executed later is restricted. it can. Of course, even if there is an unannounced future event in the same announcement content group, or if there is an unannounced future event in any of the announcement content groups, there is a certain probability that the announcement effect scheduled to be executed later will be executed. May be limited, and the execution of the notice production scheduled to be executed later may be limited with a certain probability regardless of the presence or absence of an unannounced future occurrence event.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the predetermined condition is satisfied when the notice effect having the notice content that overlaps with the notice effect previously executed is executed, the execution of the notice effect executed later is limited to Instead of the effect, it is also possible to execute an effect having contents unrelated to a future event in the variable game. For example, the following notice effect is given on condition that there is a hold of the right to execute the variable game. A notice about the variable game for the hold executed after the end of the variable game (for example, a notice of occurrence of a lookahead effect, a lookahead effect It may be changed such as a notice of contents, a notice of change of display on hold), a game description (a game method at the time of a big hit game, a description about various game settings such as a volume adjustment method, a character selection method in addition to a big hit probability). In this way, instead of the later notice effect, there is no unannounced future occurrence event in the variable game by executing an effect having contents unrelated to the future event in the variable game. Even in this case, it is possible to limit the execution of the notice effect that will be executed later.

Further, the notice content may be divided into the notice effect groups randomly for each content of the same type or the same system, and the notice content is randomly selected without dividing the notice content into the notice effect groups. The notice content of the notice effect to be executed later may be changed to the notice content.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 72 to 89.

Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, in the command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received, in addition to the processing of the first embodiment described above, a notice effect is produced. The setting process is executed.

[Command judgment processing]
<Step S3401>
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives the variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the stop symbol combination and the effect type (effect pattern) are determined as in the first embodiment described above ( (Step S2103), the notice effect setting process is further executed (step S3401), the processes of steps S2104 to S2105 are executed as in the first embodiment, and the command determination process ends. Here, the notice effect setting process is a process of determining various notice effects executed in the variable game and storing the decided notice effects in the RAM 512.

[Advance notice setting process]
In the notice effect setting process, pseudo notice effect, step-up effect, dialogue effect, character group effect, and other notice effects are set. Other notice effects include, for example, mini-character effects other than character group effects, cut-in effects, voice effects, operation button effects, accessory operation effects, and composite effects of two or more of these effects. Examples of the composite effect include step-up effect with serif, cut-in effect with serif, step-up effect with voice, cut-in effect with voice, serif effect by operation on operation button, step-up effect by operation on operation button, and operation button Examples include cut-in effect by operation, accessory effect operation effect by operation on operation buttons, and the like.

Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 72. As shown in FIG. 73, in the notice effect setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 causes the pseudo-repeated notice effect setting process (step S3501), the step-up effect setting process (step S3502), the dialogue effect setting process (step S3503), The character group effect setting process (step S3504) and other notice effect setting process (step S3505) are executed, and the notice effect setting process ends. It should be noted that details of the pseudo-announcement notice effect setting process (step S3501), step-up effect setting process (step S3502), dialogue effect setting process (step S3503), and character group effect setting process (step S3504) will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described later with reference to 84.

Here, FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a relationship between various notice effects and notice contents. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times of pseudo-repeating is 4, and the upper limit number of step-ups in the step-up effect is 5.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), the pseudo-repeated announcement effect is an effect that gives an advance notice that the pseudo-reed will be executed. The notice production and the pseudo-relation 4 notice production are included. It should be noted that the pseudo-run 2 advance notice effect, the pseudo-run 3 advance notice effect, the pseudo-reverse 3 advance notice effect, and the pseudo-reverse 4 advance notice effect are advance notice effects that announce the total number of pseudo consecutive times. Further, the pseudo-repeated notice effect may be executed in, for example, the high-speed variable game effect, and is not executed in the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect. The pseudo consecutive notice effect may be executed a plurality of times according to the total number of pseudo consecutive times, and in the present embodiment, the execution timing is different from other notice effects as shown in FIG. 77, for example. The timing Ta, the timing Tb, and the timing Tc are set three times, and may be executed three times at the maximum.

The pseudo-repeated execution notice is an effect that only informs that the pseudo-repeated execution will be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pseudo-repeated execution such as "another time" or "NEXT" is executed. This is an effect in which a character image indicating that is displayed is displayed (see FIG. 75(A)). The pseudo-repeated execution notice can be set when an effect pattern in which at least one pseudo-repeated execution is performed is set.

The pseudo-run 2 notice effect is an effect that announces that the total number of pseudo-repetitions is two, and when the decorative design is temporarily stopped, a pseudo-run such as "one more time" is executed. In addition to the character image indicating, the character image indicating that the total number of consecutive pseudo repetitions is 2 such as “NEXT×2” is the effect (see FIG. 75(B)). In addition, the pseudo-run 2 notice effect is also an effect for giving notice that the normal reach effect is executed. That is, the pseudo-run 2 notice effect is a notice effect having the notice content that the total number of pseudo-repetitions is 2 and the normal reach effect is executed, and the pseudo-run and normal reach effect are performed twice. It can be set if the pattern is set.

The pseudo-repeated 3 notice effect is an effect that announces that the total number of times of pseudo-repetition is 3 times, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, for example, "another time" is executed. In addition to the character image indicating, the character image indicating that the total number of times of pseudo-repetition such as “NEXT×3” is 3 is displayed (see FIG. 75(C)). In addition, the pseudo-ream 3 notice effect is also an effect for notifying that the super reach effect will be executed. That is, the pseudo rendition 3 notice effect is a notice effect having a notice content that the total number of pseudo renditions is 3 times and that the super reach effect is executed, and the pseudo rendition and super reach effect are executed 3 times. It can be set when the effect pattern is set.

The pseudo-repeated 4 notice effect is an effect that announces that the total number of pseudo-repeated times is 4, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, for example, "another time" or the like is executed. In addition to the character image indicating, the character image indicating that the total number of pseudo consecutive occurrences is 4, such as “NEXT×4”, is an effect (see FIG. 75D). In addition, the pseudo-relation 4 advance notice effect is also an effect for notifying that the special reach effect is to be executed and that the probability variation is a big hit. That is, the pseudo-run 4 notice effect is a notice effect in which the total number of pseudo-repetitions is 4, the special reach effect is executed, and the probability is a big jackpot. The effect pattern for executing the special reach effect may be set, and may be set when the lottery result is a big hit.

In the present embodiment, only the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is determined in the pseudo-reciprocal notice effect setting process, and the pseudo-reaction 2 notice effect, the pseudo-reaction 3 notice effect, the pseudo-reaction 3 notice effect and the pseudo-reaction 4 notice effect will be described later. It can be set only in the notice effect resetting process (see FIG. 86).

Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the pseudo consecutive execution notice and the total pseudo consecutive number notice effect are set as the pseudo consecutive notice effect. An unexecuted pseudo-repetition number announcement effect for notifying the pseudo-repetition number may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the step-up effect is a notice effect in which the effect is continuously stepped up step by step. For example, the white background SU1 effect, the white background SU2 effect, the white background SU3 effect, and the white background SU4. Includes effects, white background SU5 effects, red background SU1 effects, red background SU2 effects, red background SU3 effects, red background SU4 effects, and red background SU5 effects.

In this embodiment, the step-up effect may be executed once in, for example, the high-speed variable game effect, and is not executed in the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect. Of course, the step-up effect may be executed in the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect, or the step-up effect may be executed multiple times. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of execution timings of the step-up effect are set, and the step-up effect can be executed at one of the execution timings. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, as the execution timing of the step-up effect, three timings, timing Td, timing Te, and timing Tf, which are timings different from the other notice effects, are set during the high-speed variable game effect. The step-up effect can be executed at any of timing Td, timing Te, and timing Tf.

In the white background SU1 effect, the effect is executed up to one of the five steps, and the background at this time is a white notice effect. Note that the white background SU1 effect is included in the notice effect because it is a kind of step-up effect, although there is no particular notice content. This white background SU1 effect can be set regardless of which effect pattern is set.

In the white background SU2 effect, the effect is executed up to two out of five steps, and the background at this time is a white notice effect. The white background SU2 effect is a notice effect whose notice content is to execute the normal reach effect, and can be set when an effect pattern for executing the normal reach effect is set.

The white background SU3 effect is a notice effect in which the effect is executed up to 3 out of 5 steps and the background at this time is white. This white background SU3 effect is a notice effect whose notice content is that the super reach effect is executed, and can be set when an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set.

In the white background SU4 effect, effects are executed up to four out of five steps, and the background at this time is a white notice effect. The white background SU4 effect is a notice effect having a notice content that the special reach effect is executed, and can be set when an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set.

In the white background SU5 effect, the effect is executed up to the final stage of the five steps, and the background at this time is a white notice effect. The white background SU5 effect is a notice effect having a notice that it is a jackpot, and can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

In the red background SU1 effect, the effect is executed up to one of the five steps, and the background at this time is a red notice effect. This red background SU1 effect is a notice effect whose notice content is that the normal reach effect is executed, and can be set when an effect pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed is set.

In the red background SU2 effect, the effect is executed up to two out of five steps, and the background at this time is a red notice effect. The red background SU2 effect is a notice effect having a notice content that the super reach effect is executed, and can be set when an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set.

In the red background SU3 effect, effects are executed up to 3 out of 5 steps, and the background at this time is a notice effect with a red background. The red background SU3 effect is a notice effect having a notice content that the special reach effect is executed, and can be set when an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set.

In the red background SU4 effect, the effect is executed up to 4 out of 5 steps, and the background at this time is a red notice effect. This red background SU4 effect is a notice effect having a notice that it is a jackpot, and can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

In the red background SU5 effect, the effect is executed up to the final stage of the five steps, and the background at this time is a notice effect with a red background. This red background SU5 effect is a notice effect whose notice content is a probability variation jackpot, and can be set when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 74(C), the serif effect is a notice effect in which the serif image is displayed, for example, a notice effect for notifying a development effect or the like depending on the color and content of the serif image. This line production is white line 1 production, white line 2 production, white line 3 production, white line 4 production, white line 5 production, red line 1 production, red line 2 production, red line 3 production, red line 4 production, And, including the red line 5 production.

In the present embodiment, the dialogue effect may be executed once in the high-speed variable game effect, for example, and is not executed in the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect. Of course, the serif effect may be executed in the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect, or the serif effect may be executed multiple times. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of execution timings of the serif effect are set, and the serif effect can be executed at one of the execution timings. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, as the execution timing of the dialogue effect, three timings, timing Tg, timing Th, and timing Ti, which are timings different from other notice effects, are set during the high-speed variable game effect, and these timings are set. The dialogue effect can be executed at any of the timing Tg, the timing Th, and the timing Ti.

The white serif 1 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 1 image is displayed in white characters. It should be noted that the white serif 1 effect has no particular notice content, but is included in the notice effect because it is a type of serif effect. This white serif 1 effect can be set regardless of which effect pattern is set.

The white serif 2 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 2 image is displayed in white characters, and is a notice effect having the notice content that the normal reach effect is executed. The white serif 2 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed is set.

The white serif 3 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 3 image is displayed in white characters, and is a notice effect whose notice content is to execute the super reach effect. The white serif 3 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set.

The white serif 4 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 4 image is displayed in white characters, and is a notice effect having the notice content that the special reach effect is executed. The white serif 4 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set.

The white serif 5 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 5 image is displayed in white characters, and is a notice effect whose notice content is a big hit. This white line 5 effect can be set when the lottery result is a big hit.

The red serif 1 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 1 image is displayed in red characters, and is a notice effect having the notice content that the normal reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed. The red speech 1 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the normal reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed is set.

The red dialogue 2 effect is a notice effect in which the dialogue 2 image is displayed in red characters, and is a notice effect whose notice content is that the super reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed. The red speech 2 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the super reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed is set.

The red serif 3 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 3 image is displayed in red characters, and is a notice effect having the notice content that the special reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed. The red serif 3 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the special reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed is set.

The red serif 4 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 4 image is displayed in red characters, and is a notice effect in which the special reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed and the jackpot content is a big hit. The red serif 4 effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the special reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed is set and the lottery result is a big hit.

The red serif 5 effect is a notice effect in which the serif 5 image is displayed in red characters, and is a notice effect in which the special reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed and the notice content is that it is a probability variation jackpot. The red serif 5 effect is set when the effect pattern in which the special reach effect and the pseudo-relation are executed is set, and can be set when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 74(D), the character group effect is an effect in which a group of mini-characters moves the symbol display unit 341 in the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the like. For example, character A group effect, character B group effect, character The group C effect, the character D group effect, the character E group effect, the rare character group effect, and the all character mix group effect are included.

In the present embodiment, the character group effect may be executed once in any of the high-speed variable game effect, the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the special reach effect, for example. Of course, it may be executed in any one of the high speed variable game effect, the normal reach effect, the super reach effect and the special reach effect, and the character group effect may be executed multiple times. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of execution timings for the character group effect are set, and the character group effect can be executed at one of the execution timings. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, as the execution timing of the character group effect, five timings of timing Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, and timing Tn, which are timings different from other notice effects, are set. At any one of the timing Tj, the timing Tk, the timing Tl, the timing Tm, and the timing Tn, the S-character group effect can be executed.

The character A group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini characters A move the symbol display unit 341, and a notice that the super reach effect is executed and the jackpot expectation (reliability) is 33% or more is announced. It is a production. This character A group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set.

The character B group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini characters B move the symbol display portion 341, and a notice that the super reach effect is executed and the jackpot expectation (reliability) is 44% or more is announced. It is a production. The character B group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set.

The character C group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini characters C move the symbol display portion 341, and a notice that the special reach effect is executed and the jackpot expectation (reliability) is 55% or more is announced. It is a production. The character C group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set.

The character D group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini-characters D move the symbol display portion 341, and a notice that the special reach effect is executed and that the jackpot expectation (reliability) is 66% or more is announced. It is a production. This character D group effect can be set when an effect pattern for executing the special reach effect is set.

The character E group effect is an effect in which a large number of mini characters E move the symbol display portion 341, and a notice that the special reach effect is executed and that the jackpot expectation (reliability) is 77% or more is announced. It is a production. This character E group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set.

The rare character group effect is an effect in which a large number of rare mini characters move the symbol display unit 341, and is an effect that gives a notice that a special reach effect is executed and that it is a big hit. The character C group effect can be set when an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set and the lottery result is a big hit. The rare mini-character is, for example, a character that is hard to appear in the variation game production, and is a mini-character in the character group production with a low selection rate.

The all character mix group effect is an effect in which all the characters of the mini-characters A to E and the rare character move the symbol display portion 341, and an effect that gives a notice that the special reach effect is executed and that it is a probability variation jackpot. Is. This all-chara mix group effect can be set when the effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed is set and the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-run is executed, the pseudo-run is executed twice, the pseudo-run is executed three times, and the pseudo-run is executed four times in various notice effects. That the normal reach effect is executed, the super reach effect is executed, the special reach effect is executed, the lottery result is a big hit, and the lottery result is a probability variation big hit. That is, the notice contents in the various notice effects can be classified into a pseudo-remote notice content group regarding the pseudo-remote notice, a development effect notice content group regarding the development effect, and a jackpot confirmation notice content group regarding the jackpot confirmation. Here, FIGS. 76(A) to 76(C) are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice content of the notice effect and the notice level.

As shown in FIG. 76(A), the pseudo-repeated notice content group includes a pseudo-repeated execution notice, a total pseudo-repetition number two times notice, a total pseudo-repetition number three times notice, and a total pseudo-repetition number four times notice. As for the notice content level, the notice of pseudo-execution is low, the notice of two total pseudo-repetitions, the notice of three total pseudo-repetitions, and the notice of four total pseudo-repetitions are high. In addition, the pseudo-run notice is low, and the total pseudo-run count is 2 times, the total pseudo-run count is 3 times, and the total pseudo-run count is 4 times. Also applies. Then, when a plurality of overlapping notice performances are scheduled to be executed with the notice content that the pseudo-relation is executed, for example, the red line 1 effect is executed first, and then the pseudo-relation execution notice is executed. If it is scheduled to be performed, according to the total number of pseudo-repeated games executed in the variation game, the pseudo-repeated execution notice that will be executed later will be the pseudo-repeated second notice effect when the notice operation is performed later. , Phantom 3 notice effect or Pseudo Ren 4 notice effect.

In this way, when it is planned to execute a plurality of overlapping notice productions with the notice content that the pseudo-repeation is performed, the subsequent pseudo-reproduction is executed according to the total pseudo-repeated number of times executed in the variable game. At the time of executing the notice production, the pseudo consecutive execution notice to be executed later is changed to the total pseudo consecutive number notice (pseudo consecutive 2 notice production, pseudo consecutive 3 notice production, or pseudo consecutive 4 notice production). Not only is it possible to prevent the player from feeling unpleasant by avoiding the execution of the same notice contents, but not only to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing, but also to make the notice contents more detailed. By increasing the amount of information that the player can obtain by doing so, the progress of the game can be more enjoyed based on the newly obtained information, and the interest of the game is improved.

If the total number of pseudo-repetitions executed in the variable game is one, that is, if the advance notice contents cannot be stepped up or detailed, for example, instead of the pseudo-repetition advance notice to be executed later, At the time of executing the notice production of, the notice about the development production, the notice about the jackpot, the production unrelated to the variation game (the notice of the event that occurs in the variation game after the next variation (for example, the change of the pending display, the execution notice of the prefetch production, the prefetch) For example, the content content of the effect is changed to a notice of jackpot, etc.), a game explanation), or the like, or the pseudo-execution notice to be executed later is not executed with a certain probability. In this way, instead of the pseudo-execution notice that is scheduled to be executed later, a notice regarding the development effect, a notice regarding the jackpot, an effect unrelated to the variation game, etc. are executed, so that the notice content can be stepped up or detailed. Even if it cannot be realized, it is possible to prevent the player's unpleasant feeling from being generated by avoiding execution of the notice effect having the same notice content, thereby preventing the interest of the game from being lowered.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), the development effect notice content group includes a normal reach effect notice, a super reach effect notice, and a special reach effect notice. Regarding the notice content level, the notice for normal reach production is the lowest, the notice for special reach production is the highest, and the notice for super reach production is intermediate. Then, when a plurality of overlapping notice performances are scheduled to be executed as the notice content that the normal reach effect is executed as the notice content, for example, the notice content in the notice effect to be executed later is super The notice is changed to a notice that the reach effect or the special reach effect is executed (step up or advance the notice content). In addition, when it is planned that a plurality of overlapping notice productions are executed as the notice contents that the super reach effect is executed as the notice contents, for example, the notice contents in the notice effect scheduled to be executed later are It will be changed to a notice that the special reach effect will be executed (step up or advance the notice contents).

In this way, when it is planned to execute a plurality of overlapping notice productions with the notice contents that the same notice content level is to be executed, it will be executed later when the notice effect is executed later. By changing (stepping up) the development notice that has a high notice content level, the development notice with the same notice content is prevented from being executed, which causes player discomfort. Not only is it prevented that the interest of the game is reduced by being prevented, but it is expected that the advance notice content will be stepped up and it will be in a more advantageous state for the player, so enjoy the progress of the game more The interest of the game is improved.

If the effect type (effect pattern) to be executed in the variable game is one in which the advance notice content as a development effect cannot be stepped up, the advance notice effect that is scheduled to be executed later will be detailed. The notice content of is changed. For example, when the final individual production is the normal reach production as the production type (production pattern) and the overlapping notice content is the execution of the normal reach production (when the notice content level is the same), The notice content of the notice effect to be executed is changed (detailed or embodied) to which normal reach effect in the normal reach effect is executed. In this way, the advance notice contents of the same advance notice contents are executed even when the advance notice contents cannot be stepped up by making the advance notice contents of the development effects to be executed later detailed (specific). By avoiding this, the player's discomfort is prevented from occurring, and thus the interest of the game is prevented from being lowered. Further, the details of the advance notice of the development effect can be known, so that the specific content of the development effect can be known. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game based on the content of the embodied development effect (the jackpot expectation).

As shown in FIG. 76(C), the jackpot confirmation notice content group includes a jackpot notice and a probability variation jackpot notice, and the notice content level is higher in the probability variation jackpot notice than in the jackpot notice. Then, if multiple overlapping notice performances are scheduled to be executed with the notice content that it is a jackpot, if the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, a notice effect that is scheduled to be executed later The notice content of is changed to a notice that it is a definite jackpot (step-up, detailed).

In this way, if multiple overlapping notice productions are scheduled to be performed with the notice content that the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot notice to be executed later is changed to a probability variation jackpot notice. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling by avoiding the execution of the same notice contents, but also to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered, and also to make a sudden change in the jackpot. Since you can know that there is something, you can enjoy the progress of the game with confidence.

If the result of the lottery is usually a big jackpot, it is not possible to step up the notice content in the subsequent notice production. , Advance notice about development effect, production unrelated to the variation game (preliminary notice of events that occur in the variation game after the next variation (for example, pending display change, advance notice effect execution notice, prefetch effect content notice, jackpot notice, etc.), It is changed to (game description) or the like, or is not executed with a certain probability of the pseudo-run execution notice scheduled to be executed later. In this way, instead of the jackpot announcement to be executed later, a notice relating to the pseudo-relation, a notice regarding the development effect, a notice regarding the jackpot, an effect unrelated to the variation game is executed, and the notice content is stepped up or Even if the details cannot be refined, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by preventing the notice effect having the same notice content from being executed, thereby preventing the interest of the game from decreasing. ..

Similarly, even if multiple notice performances that are duplicates are scheduled to be executed with the notice content that it is a probability variation jackpot, it is not possible to step up or detail the notice content, so it will be When the notice content is executed later, the notice about the pseudo-relation, the notice about the development effect, the notice unrelated to the variation game (the notice of the event that occurs in the variation game after the next variation (for example, the pending display change, look-ahead) It is changed to a performance execution notice, a pre-reading effect content notice, a jackpot notice, etc.), a game explanation), or the like, or the pseudo-run execution notice scheduled to be executed later is not executed at a certain probability.

In addition, when the notice content overlaps with the jackpot or the probability variation jackpot, it is a notice content that is pleasing to the player. May be executed.

As described above, when a plurality of notice productions with overlapping notice contents are scheduled to be executed, the notice contents of the notice effect scheduled to be executed later will be changed to other notice contents when the notice effect is executed later. Or the like, or the subsequent notice effect is not executed with a certain probability. The change of the notice content in the notice production after that is performed by changing the notice content from the history of the notice production which has been executed in the notice production resetting process (FIGS. 86 to 90) in the notice production process of FIG. It is determined whether or not they overlap, and it is executed with reference to the effect type (effect pattern) determined in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 72 and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, FIG. 76D is a diagram for explaining the storage area for resetting the notice content set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. 76(D), the notice content resetting storage area includes a hit/miss information storage area, an effect pattern storage area, and an announcement effect execution history storage area.

The winning/losing information storage area is an area for storing winning/winning information (information about a lottery result in the jackpot lottery), and is referred to by the MPU 51 when it is determined whether or not the jackpot preliminary announcement effect can be stepped up to a certain variation jackpot. It In the hit/miss information storage area, for example, when the change pattern command includes information that can specify the lottery result, when the change pattern command is received, the hit/fail information is stored based on the change pattern command. On the other hand, the win/loss information stored in the win/loss information storage area is cleared when the variation game is finished. When the information that can specify the win/loss information (lottery result) is transmitted as a command different from the variation pattern command, the win/loss information is stored in the win/loss information storage area when the other command is received. It
Remember.

The effect pattern storage area is an area for storing effect types (effect patterns), and is referred to by the MPU 51 when it is determined whether or not the notice content by the development effect notice effect can be stepped up or detailed (concretized), for example. .. In the effect pattern storage area, the effect type (effect pattern) is stored when the effect type (effect pattern) is determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. 72. On the other hand, the effect type (effect pattern) stored in the effect pattern storage area is cleared when the variable game ends.

The notice production execution history storage area is an area for storing the notice production that has already been executed (the notice content). For example, the notice content in the notice production to be executed is announced by the notice production executed earlier in the variable game. It is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining whether or not it has been completed. In the notice effect execution history storage area, the notice effect (notice content) is stored each time the notice effect is executed. On the other hand, the notice effect (notice content) already executed in the notice effect execution history storage area is cleared when the variable game is finished. In this way, by setting the notice content resetting storage area having the notice effect execution history storage area in the RAM 512, by referring to the notice effect (notice content) stored in the notice effect execution history storage area, the notice is given. It is possible to confirm at the time of execution of the notice production whether or not the notice content in the production is duplicated.

When the winning/losing information and the effect pattern are stored in the storage area of the RAM 512 other than the notice content resetting storage area, the hit/failure information storage area and the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice content resetting storage area are omitted. Can also

[Pseudo consecutive notice effect setting process]
In the pseudo-reminder notice effect setting process executed in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73, the pseudo-reminder notice effect setting is set according to the number of pseudo-reaction effect executed in the high-speed variable game of the variable game effect. Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the pseudo-announcement notice setting process.

<Steps S3601 and S3602>
As shown in FIG. 78, in the pseudo-repeated notice effect setting process, the MPU 51 stores the effect pattern determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. 72 in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Is specified (step S3601), the pseudo continuous number specified from the effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area set in the RAM 512 (step S3602). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area, or may be set separately from the effect pattern storage area. When the effect pattern is stored in the area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern in the variable game is to execute the pseudo continuous effect, based on the pseudo continuous number stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 512 in step S3602. MPU51, when the production pattern in the particular variation game is something which executes the pseudo continuous production (step S3603: Yes), moves processing to step S3604, the production pattern in the particular variation game executes the pseudo continuous production. If not (step S3603: No), the pseudo-announcement notice setting process is terminated without setting the pseudo-announcement notice effect.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
When the effect pattern in the variation game is to execute the pseudo continuous effect (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the pseudo continuous notice effect according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect in the effect pattern. (Step S3604), the content of the notice content storage area is updated according to the determined pseudo-reminder notice effect (step S3605), and the pseudo-reminder notice effect setting process ends.

Here, the notice content storage area is set in the RAM 512 and is updated every time various notice effect setting processes are executed. This notice content storage area is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not it is the execution timing of the notice effect, and when it is the execution timing of the notice effect, the notice effect to be executed at the execution timing is specified. Referenced for.

[Step-up effect setting process]
In the step-up effect setting process executed in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73, the step-up effect is set based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the effect pattern type in the variable game. Here, FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the step-up effect setting process.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 79(A), in the step-up effect setting process, the MPU 51 uses the effect pattern determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. It is specified from the stored contents (step S3701). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area, or may be set separately from the effect pattern storage area. When the effect pattern is stored in the area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3702>
In step S3702, the MPU 51 specifies a winning/discarding determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). For example, when the change pattern command includes information capable of specifying the lottery result, the winning/judgment determination result can be set when the variation pattern command is received (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R Probable variation jackpot flag) is specified. For example, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is on, the MPU 51 can specify that the hit/miss determination result is a 5R normal jackpot, and when the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag is on, the win/no determination result can be identified as a 5R probability jackpot. , 16R probability variation big hit flag is ON, it can be specified that the hit/miss determination result is 16R probability variation jackpot, and when the big hit flag is OFF, it can be specified that the hit/miss determination result is out.

When the information that can specify the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is transmitted as a command different from the variation pattern command, when the other command is received, the win/loss information is stored in the win/loss information storage area. To be done. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning/losing information capable of specifying the winning/discarding determination result (lottery result) is stored in the winning/discarding information storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area set in the RAM 512. Alternatively, the win/loss determination result may be specified from the win/loss information stored in the win/loss information storage area.

<Steps S3703 to S3705>
The MPU 51 determines the execution timing of the step-up effect based on the effect pattern in the variation game specified in step S3701, and the hit determination result specified in step S3702 (step S3703), and the effect of the step-up effect. The content is determined (step S3704). Then, the MPU 51 updates the stored content of the notice content storage area set in the RAM 512 with the execution timing of the step-up effect determined in step S3703 and the effect content of the step-up effect determined in step S3703. The notice content is stored in the notice content storage area, and the step-up effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S3703 that the step-up effect is not executed, the content of the notice content storage area is not updated.

Here, FIG. 79(B) is a diagram showing an example of the step-up effect timing selection table referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3703 to determine the execution timing of the step-up effect. As shown in FIG. 79(B), in the step-up effect timing selection table, the result of winning/decision judgment (in the jackpot lottery) is determined by the value of the SU effect timing determination counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. The execution timing of the step-up effect is defined for each lottery result). In the present embodiment, the step-up effect is executed at any of the timing Td, the timing Te, and the timing Tf (see FIG. 77) at which the high-speed fluctuation effect of the fluctuation game is set, and these timing Td, timing Te, The execution timing of the step-up effect from the timing Tf is determined by the value of the SU effect timing determination counter.

In the step-up effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 79(B), the execution timings of the step-up effect are the timing Td, the timing Te, and the timing Tf evenly in any winning/decision determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). It is decided to either. However, the distribution of the execution timing of the step-up effect may be unequal, and the distribution of the execution timing may be different depending on the result of judgment. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the step-up effect is distributed to any of the timing Td, the timing Te, and the timing Tf, but the allocation of non-execution of the step-up effect may be set.

Here, FIG. 80(A) to FIG. 80(C) are diagrams showing an example of the step-up effect type selection table referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3704 to determine the effect content of the step-up effect. Specifically, FIG. 80(A) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect pattern of the variation game is a normal reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds. 80B is a diagram showing an example of a step-up effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect game effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 60 seconds, and FIG. (C) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up effect type selection table which is referred to when the effect pattern of the variable game is a special reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 90 seconds. 80, the example of the step-up effect type selection table when the effect pattern is non-reach is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 80(A) to 80(C), in the step-up effect type selection table of each effect pattern, the value of the step-up effect type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 35. Thus, a step-up effect type is defined for each win/no determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). Further, in the step-up effect type selection table of each effect pattern, there is a non-execution distribution of the step-up effect, and when the value of the step-up effect type counter corresponds to the non-execution allocation, the step-up effect production is performed. Is not executed.

[Serif production setting processing]
In the dialogue production setting process executed in the notice production setting process of FIG. 73, the dialogue production is set based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the production pattern type in the variation game. Here, FIG. 81(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the dialogue effect setting process.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 81(A), in the dialogue effect setting process, the MPU 51 stores the effect pattern determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. 72, in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. The content is specified (step S3801). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area, or may be set separately from the effect pattern storage area. When the effect pattern is stored in the area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3802>
In step S3802, the MPU 51 specifies a winning/discarding determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). For example, when the change pattern command includes information capable of specifying the lottery result, the winning/judgment determination result can be set when the variation pattern command is received (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R Probable variation jackpot flag) is specified. For example, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is on, the MPU 51 can specify that the hit/miss determination result is a 5R normal jackpot, and when the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag is on, the win/no determination result can be identified as a 5R probability jackpot. , 16R probability variation big hit flag is ON, it can be specified that the hit/miss determination result is 16R probability variation jackpot, and when the big hit flag is OFF, it can be specified that the hit/miss determination result is out.

When the information that can specify the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is transmitted as a command different from the variation pattern command, when the other command is received, the win/loss information is stored in the win/loss information storage area. To be done. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning/losing information capable of specifying the winning/discarding determination result (lottery result) is stored in the winning/discarding information storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area set in the RAM 512. Alternatively, the win/loss determination result may be specified from the win/loss information stored in the win/loss information storage area.

<Steps S3803 to S3805>
The MPU 51 determines the execution timing of the dialogue effect based on the effect pattern in the variation game specified in step S3801 and the hit determination result identified in step S3802 (step S3803), and specifies the effect contents of the dialogue effect. It is determined (step S3804). Then, the MPU 51 updates the storage content of the advance notification content storage area set in the RAM 512 with the execution timing of the dialogue effect determined in step S3803 and the effect content of the dialogue effect determined in step S3803. It is stored in the storage area, and the dialogue effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S3803 that the dialogue effect is not executed, the content of the notice content storage area is not updated.

Here, FIG. 81(B) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue production timing selection table referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3803 to determine the execution timing of the dialogue production. As shown in FIG. 81(B), in the dialogue production timing selection table, the result of the winning/disapproval determination (lottery in the jackpot lottery is drawn) depending on the value of the dialogue production timing determination counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. The execution timing of the dialogue effect is defined for each result). In the present embodiment, the serif effect is executed at any of the timing Tg, the timing Th, and the timing Ti (see FIG. 77) set for the high-speed fluctuation effect of the fluctuation game, and these timing Tg, timing Th, and timing are obtained. The execution timing of the dialogue production from Ti is determined by the value of the dialogue production timing determination counter.

In the dialogue production timing selection table shown in FIG. 81(B), the execution timing of the dialogue production is any of the timing Tg, the timing Th, and the timing Ti evenly in any winning/decision determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). Is decided. However, the distribution of the execution timings of the dialogue effects may be unequal, and the distribution of the execution timings may be different depending on the result of judgment. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the serif effect is distributed to any one of the timing Tg, the timing Th, and the timing Ti, but the non-execution allocation of the serif effect may be set.

Here, FIG. 82(A) to FIG. 82(C) are diagrams showing an example of the dialogue production type selection table referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3704 for determining the presentation contents of the dialogue production. Specifically, FIG. 80(A) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect game effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds. FIG. 80(B) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect game effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 60 seconds. ) Is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect game effect pattern is a special reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 90 seconds. Note that, in FIG. 82, an example of the dialogue effect type selection table when the effect pattern is non-reach is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82(A) to 82(C), in the dialogue production type selection table of each production pattern, according to the value of the dialogue production type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interruption process of FIG. A dialogue production type is defined for each win/no determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). Further, in the dialogue effect type selection table of each effect pattern, there is a non-execution distribution of the dialogue effect, and if the value of the dialogue effect type counter corresponds to the non-execution allocation, the serif effect is not executed.

[Character group effect setting process]
In the character group effect setting process executed in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73, the character group effect is set based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the effect pattern type in the variable game. Here, FIG. 83A is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character group effect setting process.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 83(A), in the character group effect setting process, the MPU 51 stores the effect pattern determined by receiving the variation pattern in the command determination process of FIG. 72 in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. It is specified from the stored contents (step S3901). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern may be acquired from the effect pattern storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area, or may be set separately from the effect pattern storage area. When the effect pattern is stored in the area, it may be acquired from the storage area.

<Step S3902>
In step S3902, the MPU 51 specifies a winning/discarding determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). For example, when the change pattern command includes information capable of specifying the lottery result, the winning/judgment determination result can be set when the variation pattern command is received (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R Probable variation jackpot flag) is specified. For example, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is on, the MPU 51 can specify that the hit/miss determination result is a 5R normal jackpot, and when the 5R certainty variation jackpot flag is on, the win/no determination result can be identified as a 5R probability jackpot. , 16R probability variation big hit flag is ON, it can be specified that the hit/miss determination result is 16R probability variation jackpot, and when the big hit flag is OFF, it can be specified that the hit/miss determination result is out.

When the information that can specify the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is transmitted as a command different from the variation pattern command, when the other command is received, the win/loss information is stored in the win/loss information storage area. To be done. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning/losing information capable of specifying the winning/discarding determination result (lottery result) is stored in the winning/discarding information storage area (FIG. 76D) of the notice content resetting storage area set in the RAM 512. Alternatively, the win/loss determination result may be specified from the win/loss information stored in the win/loss information storage area.

<Steps S3903 to S3905>
The MPU 51 determines the execution timing of the character group effect based on the effect pattern in the variation game specified in step S3901, and the hit determination result specified in step S3902 (step S3903), and effects of the character group effect. The content is determined (step S3904). Then, the MPU 51 updates the execution timing of the character group effect determined in step S3903 and the effect contents of the character group effect determined in step S3903 by updating the stored content of the notice content storage area set in the RAM 512. The notice content is stored in the notice content storage area, and the character group effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S3903 that the character group effect is not executed, the content of the notice content storage area is not updated.

Here, FIG. 83(B) and FIG. 83(C) are diagrams showing an example of the character group effect timing selection table referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3903 in order to determine the execution timing of the character group effect. Specifically, FIG. 83B is a diagram showing an example of a character group effect timing selection table that is referred to when the effect pattern of the variation game is a super reach effect pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds. FIG. 83(C) is a diagram showing an example of a character group effect timing selection table referred to when the effect pattern of the variation game is a special reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 90 seconds. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the effect patterns in the variable game are the non-reach effect pattern and the normal reach effect pattern, the character group effect is not executed. Of course, when the effect patterns in the variable game are the non-reach effect pattern and the normal reach effect pattern, the character group effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 83(B) and FIG. 83(C), in the character group effect timing selection table, it is determined by the value of the character group effect timing determination counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 35. The execution timing of the character group effect is defined for each determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery).

As shown in FIG. 83(B), when the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern, timing Tj set for high speed variation effect, timing Tk set for normal reach effect, timing Tl, set for super reach effect. The character group effect is executed at any one of the timings Tm (see FIG. 77), and the execution timing of the character group effect from these timings Tj, Tk, Tl, and Tm is determined by the character group effect timing determination counter. Determined by value.

In the character group production timing selection table in the super reach production pattern shown in FIG. 83(B), the execution timing of the character group production is equal to the timing Tj, regardless of which win/no judgment result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). It is determined to be any of the timing Tk, the timing Tl, and the timing Tm. However, the distribution of the execution timings of the character group effects may be unequal, and the distribution of the execution timings may be different depending on the result of judgment. Further, in the present embodiment, in the super reach effect pattern, the execution timing of the character group effect is distributed to any of the timing Tj, the timing Tk, the timing Tl, and the timing Tm, but the non-execution allocation of the character group effect is set. May be.

As shown in FIG. 83(C), when the effect pattern is a special reach effect pattern, timing Tj set for high speed variation effect, timing Tk set for normal reach effect, timing Tl, and super reach effect are set. The character group production is executed at any one of the timing Tm and the timing Tn (see FIG. 77) set for the special reach production, and the character group is produced from these timing Tj, timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, and timing Tn. The execution timing of the effect is determined by the value of the character group effect timing determination counter.

In the character group effect timing selection table in the special reach effect pattern shown in FIG. 83(C), the execution timings of the character group effects are substantially the same at any of the hit/miss determination results (lottery results in the jackpot lottery). , Timing Tk, timing Tl, timing Tm, or timing Tn. However, the distribution of the execution timings of the character group effects may be unequal, and the distribution of the execution timings may be different depending on the result of judgment. Further, in the present embodiment, in the special reach effect pattern, the execution timing of the character group effect is assigned to any one of the timing Tj, the timing Tk, the timing Tl, the timing Tm, and the timing Tn, but the non-execution of the character group effect is assigned. May be set.

Here, FIG. 84(A) and FIG. 84(B) are diagrams showing an example of the character group effect type selection table referred to by the MPU 51 in step S3904 for determining the effect contents of the character group effect. Specifically, FIG. 84(A) is a diagram showing an example of a character group effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect game effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds. FIG. 84(C) is a diagram showing an example of a character group effect type selection table that is referred to when the effect pattern of the variation game is a special reach effect pattern having a variable display time of 90 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B), in the character group effect type selection table for each effect pattern, the value of the character group effect type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Thus, the character group effect type is defined for each win/no determination result (lottery result in the jackpot lottery). Further, in the character group effect type selection table of each effect pattern, there is a non-execution distribution of the character group effect, and when the value of the character group effect type counter corresponds to the non-execution allocation, the character group effect Is not executed.

[Advance notice processing]
The notice effect process of this embodiment is a process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and is a process of executing the notice effect set when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 72. Done. Further, in the notice production process of this embodiment, when the notice production of the duplicate notice content is scheduled to be executed, the process of resetting the notice content in the notice production scheduled to be executed later is performed. Done. Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect process of the present embodiment.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
As shown in FIG. 85, in the notice effect process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 reads the value of the variable display counter that measures the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341 (step S4001), the value of the variable counter, and the RAM 512. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect based on the execution timing of various advance notice effects stored in the advance notice content storage area set to (step S4002). And when it is the execution timing of notice production (Step S4002: Yes), MPU51 shifts processing to Step S4003, and when it is not the execution timing of notice production (Step S4002: No), the fluctuation game processing concerned is ended.

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
When it is the execution timing of the notification effect (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 identifies the notification effect corresponding to the execution timing (step S4003), and is further set in the RAM 512 and updated in step S4006 described later. Whether or not the preview effect execution history refers to the preview effect execution history storage area and gives a preview of the same preview content as the preview content specified in step S4003 is included in the preview production execution history. Is determined (step S4004). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the notice content in the notice effect executed first. When the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the notice content in the notice effect executed earlier (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4007 to execute this time. When the notice content in the notice effect of No. does not overlap with the notice content in the notice effect executed earlier (step S4004: No), the process proceeds to step S4005.

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
When the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time does not overlap with the notice content in the notice effect previously executed (step S4004: No), that is, the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time is not yet noticed. If not, the MPU 51 executes the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time (step S4005). Then, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect executed this time in the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 (step S4006), and ends the notice effect process.

<Step S4007>
When the notice content in the notice effect to be executed this time overlaps the notice content in the notice effect executed earlier (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the notice effect resetting process (step S4007), The notice production process is ended.

[Advance notice re-setting process]
In the notice effect resetting process of the present embodiment, a process such as resetting notice effect such as notice content different from the notice content in the notice effect previously executed is executed. Here, FIGS. 86 to 89 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect resetting process.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 86, in the notice effect resetting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 executes the pseudo notice of the notice effect that was scheduled to be executed this time and specified in step S4003 in the notice effect process of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a pseudo-run execution notice effect (see FIG. 75(A)) that gives a notice only of the fact (step S4101). When the preview effect scheduled to be executed this time is the pseudo continuous execution preview effect (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 moves to step S4102 for processing, and the preview effect scheduled to be executed this time is the pseudo continuous execution preview effect. If not (step S4101: No), the process proceeds to step S4107.

<Step S4102>
When the notice effect that was scheduled to be executed this time is the pseudo-execution notice effect (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the pseudo-reaction corresponding to the pseudo-execution notice effect this time is the first pseudo-reaction in the variable game. It is determined whether or not (step S4102). Whether or not the pseudo-relation corresponding to the pseudo-repeated execution notice production this time is the first pseudo-repeation in the variation game, for example, the notice production execution history storage area of the notice production reset storage area set in the RAM 512. Based on the execution history of, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an execution history of a pseudo-repeated notice production such as a pseudo-repeated notice notice production in the variable game. When the pseudo-relation corresponding to the pseudo-repeated execution notice production this time is the first pseudo-repeated one in the variable game (step S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4103, and the pseudo-repeated execution notice of this time is executed. If the pseudo-relation corresponding to the effect is not the first pseudo-relation in the variation game (step S4102: No), the process proceeds to step S4104.

<Step S4103>
When the pseudo-relation corresponding to the pseudo-repeated execution notice production this time is the first pseudo-reaction in the variation game (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 51 notifies the notice production re-setting storage area set in the RAM 512. Based on the execution history of the effect execution history storage area, it is determined whether or not the red dialogue effect (see FIG. 74(C)) has been executed in the variation game (step S4102). Here, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the red serif effect includes red serif 1 effect, red serif 2 effect, red serif 3 effect, red serif 4 effect, and red serif 5 effect. Announces the comprehensive type of development production, and also announces that the pseudo-link will be executed. In other words, when the pseudo-relation execution notice effect is a notice that the first pseudo-relation execution is performed, the pseudo-relation effect is executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-relation execution notice effect. If it is foretold, its execution may be restricted. Of course, it may be possible to limit the execution of the pseudo-run execution notice effect that gives a notice that the second and subsequent pseudo-runs will be executed.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4106 and executes the red serif effect if the red serif effect has already been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo continuous execution notice effect in the variable game (step S4103: Yes). If not completed (step S4103: NO), the process proceeds to step S4104.

<Steps S4104 and S4105>
If the pseudo-relation corresponding to the current pseudo-repeated execution notice production is not the first pseudo-repeation in the variation game (step S4102: No), or in the variation game, the red dialogue is executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-reproduction execution notice production. If the effect has not been executed (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 executes the pseudo-run execution notice effect that was scheduled to be executed this time (step S4104). Then, the MPU 51 updates the notice production execution history storage area of the notice production resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store the execution of the pseudo continuous execution notice production (step S4105), and executes the notice production processing. finish.

<Step S4106>
In the variation game, when the red serif production for announcing the execution of the pseudo rendition has been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo rendition execution notice effect for the first pseudo rendition (step S4103: Yes), the MPU 51 makes the variation game. The pseudo-repeated notice effect corresponding to the total number of pseudo-repeated times is executed (step S4106). Here, the total number of pseudo consecutive games in the variation game can be determined based on, for example, the total number of pseudo consecutive games stored in step S3602 in the pseudo consecutive notice effect setting process of FIG. As the pseudo-repeated notice effect, the MPU 51 executes the pseudo-repeated 2 notice effect instead of the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect when the total number of pseudo-repeated notices is 2 (see FIG. 75B). When the number of consecutive times is 3, the pseudo consecutive 3 notice effect is executed in place of the pseudo consecutive execution notice effect (see FIG. 75(C)), and when the total number of pseudo consecutive times is 4, pseudo consecutive execution is performed. Instead of the notice effect, the pseudo-relation 4 notice effect is executed (see FIG. 75(D)). In addition, when the total number of times of pseudo-repetition is 1, the pseudo-repeated notice effect is executed without changing the pseudo-repeated notice effect (see FIG. 75(A)). Then, when the pseudo-announcement notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the pseudo-execution notice effect is executed ( (Step S4105), the notice effect process is ended.

In this way, when the notice effects of the pseudo-repeated executions are duplicated, instead of the pseudo-repeated execution notice effects, other pseudo-repeated notice effects corresponding to the total number of pseudo-repeated times (pseudo-reaction 2 notice effect, It is possible to prevent the notice effect of the duplicate notice content from being executed by executing the 3rd notice effect of the series or the pseudo notice effect of the 4th pseudo, and to cause the notice effect of the duplicate notice content to be executed. The occurrence of boredom and disgust can be suppressed. In addition, since the other pseudo-repeated notice effect executed instead of the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is an effect for notifying the total number of pseudo-repetition times, the player can execute the total pseudo-reaction before the first pseudo-repeated execution is executed. Since the number of times can be grasped, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the expectation (reliability) of being a big hit based on the total number of pseudo-repetitions.

In the present embodiment, the execution of the first pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is restricted and changed to the pseudo-repeated notice effect for notifying the total number of pseudo-repetition times, but the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is executed a plurality of times. In such a case, the pseudo-run execution notice effect for the second time and thereafter may be changed to a notice effect including the contents relating to the pseudo-reaction as the notice content and executed.

<Step S4107>
When the preview effect scheduled to be executed this time is not the pseudo-run execution preview effect (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 uses the preview effect that is scheduled to be executed this time specified in step S4003 in the preview effect process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the notice content of is related to the development effect (step S4107). Here, the advance notice content related to the development effect is an announcement of a comprehensive type of the development effect, that is, whether the development effect is a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, or a special reach effect. Determine whether or not. Specifically, in the MPU 51, the notice effect is a specific step-up effect among the step-up effects (white background SU2 effect, white background SU3 effect, white background SU4 effect, red background SU1 effect, red background SU2 effect, A red background SU3 effect) (see FIG. 74(B)), a specific serif effect among the serif effects (white serif 2 effect, white serif 3 effect, white serif 4 effect, red serif 1 effect, red serif 2 effect, red) It is determined whether it is any one of the serif 3 effect, the red serif 4 effect, the red serif 5 effect (see FIG. 74C) and the character group effect (see FIG. 74D). Then, when the notice content in the notice production is related to the development production (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4108, and the notice content in the notice production is related to the development production. If not (step S4107: NO), the process proceeds to step S4125 in FIG.

<Step S4108>
When the notice content in the notice production that was scheduled to be executed this time is related to the development production (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 develops higher than the notice content in the notice production as a comprehensive development production. It is determined whether or not is to be executed (step S4108). Here, in the comprehensive development performance, the special reach performance is the highest, the super reach performance is the middle, and the normal reach performance is the lowest. Therefore, for example, in the case where the notice effect includes the notice content that the normal reach effect is executed, the MPU 51 has a super reach effect or a special reach effect whose production pattern in the variable game is higher than the normal reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is a production pattern to be executed (super reach production pattern or special reach production pattern). Further, when the notice effect includes the fact that the super reach effect is executed as the notice content, the MPU 51 executes the special reach effect in which the effect pattern in the variable game is higher than the super reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is the special reach production pattern. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a higher-level development effect is executed as a comprehensive development effect type, that is, whether or not it is possible to step up (higher-order) the notification content in the notification effect.

Then, when the MPU 51 plans to execute a higher-level development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the notification content in the notification effect (step S4108: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4109. On the other hand, when the higher-level development effect is not scheduled to be executed as the comprehensive development effect compared to the content of the notification in the preview effect (step S4108: No), the process proceeds to step S4110.

In addition, as a case where a higher-level development effect is not planned to be executed as a comprehensive development effect than the notification content in the notification effect, there is a case where a reach pattern of the notification content is set as a final individual effect. Applicable Specifically, when the advance notice content is that the normal reach production is executed, when the normal reach production pattern is set in the variation game, when the advance notice content is that the super reach production is executed, the change When the super reach production pattern is set in the game, when the advance notice content is that the special reach production is executed, the case where the special reach production pattern is set in the variable game is applicable.

<Step S4109>
When a higher-level development effect is planned to be executed as a comprehensive development effect than the content of the advance notification in the preliminary notification effect (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a preliminary effect to notify that the higher-level development effect will be executed. To do. For example, the MPU 51 super-reach production when the development production that is one level higher than the announcement content in the announcement production is executed, that is, when the announcement production is an announcement that the normal reach production is executed. Is executed, a special announcement effect is executed (for example, a red background SU2 effect), and if the announcement effect predicts that the super reach effect will be executed, the special reach effect is executed. A notice effect (for example, a red background SU3 effect) for notifying is executed. When the MPU 51 executes the super reach notice effect or the special reach notice effect, the MPU 51 executes the super reach notice effect or the special reach notice effect in the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512. An update to memorize what has been done is performed (step S4105), and the notice effect process is ended.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the development effect of a higher level than the development effect is executed. Execution of the advance notice effect of the thing prevents the notice effect of the duplicate notice content from being executed, and the boredom and disgust caused by the notice effect of the duplicate notice content being executed can be prevented. Occurrence can be suppressed. In addition, the reach production with a higher expectation (reliability) of being a jackpot is announced because it is announced that higher-level development production will be executed (the advance notice content is stepped up (upstream)). Since it is possible to grasp that the game is being executed, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game.

<Steps S4110 and S4111>
When the higher-level development performance is not scheduled to be executed as the comprehensive development performance than the notification content in the preliminary performance (step S4108: No), the MPU 51 has already executed the preliminary performance to notify the specific advanced performance type of the development performance. It is determined whether there is any (step S4110). Here, the advance notice of the specific development effect type of the development effect is a notification that details which development effect is executed among the development effects of the same level (see FIG. 76(B)). For example, if the normal reach production corresponding to the comprehensive development production includes a warin reach production, a Urine reach production, a marine reach production, a whale lucky reach production, and a Sam reach production, these warin reach production, a Urine reach production, a marine reach production, a whale lucky production Each of the reach effect and the thumb reach effect corresponds to a concrete development effect, and that the marine reach effect of the normal reach effects is foretold is a notice of the specific development effect type.

Then, when the notice production for giving notice of the concrete development production type of the development production has been executed (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4112 in FIG. 87, and the specific development production type of the development production. If the notice effect for giving notice is not executed (step S4110: No), the notice effect for giving notice of the specific development effect type is executed (step S4111), and the notice effect resetting process is ended.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type overlaps, the specific development effect type of the development effect is executed. Execution of the advance notice effect prevents the advance notice effect of the duplicate notice content from being executed, and the occurrence of boredom or disgust caused by the notice effect of the duplicate notice content being executed. Can be suppressed.

By the way, in the present embodiment, for example, the normal reach effect pattern includes the normal effect patterns X1 to X5 (see FIG. 39(A)), but the normal reach effect executed as the final individual effect is all the normal effect patterns X1 to X5. There are multiple types of X5 that are not common, and the jackpot expectation (reliability) also differs for each normal reach effect. For example, as a normal reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned warin reach effect, urin reach effect, marine reach effect, whale lucky reach effect, and thumb reach effect are described as an example. In the normal effect pattern X1, the warin reach effect is executed, and the normal effect is performed. Urine reach effect is executed in the pattern X2, marine reach effect is executed in the normal effect pattern X3, whale lucky reach effect is executed in the normal effect pattern X4, and thumb reach effect is executed in the normal effect pattern X5. In addition, in Warin Reach production, Urin Reach production, Marine Reach production, Whale Lucky Reach production, and Sam Reach production, for example, Warin Reach production → Urin Reach production → Marine Reach production → Whale Lucky Reach production → Samreach production, in order of high jackpot expectation (reliability). Become.

Further, the super reach effect pattern includes effect patterns Y1 to Y5 (see FIG. 39(B)), but the super reach effect executed as the final individual effect is common to all effect patterns Y1 to Y5. Instead, multiple types are set, and the jackpot expectation (reliability) also differs for each super reach production. Further, the special reach effect pattern includes effect patterns Z1 to Z5 (see FIG. 39(C)), but the special reach effect executed as the final individual effect is common to all effect patterns Z1 to Z5. Instead, multiple types are set, and the jackpot expectation (reliability) also differs for all special reach productions.

Therefore, from a player's point of view, which normal reach effect is executed in the normal reach effect, which super reach effect is executed in the super reach effect, and which special reach effect is executed in the special reach effect. This is a very important matter, and when the reach effect is executed, there is a great interest in what kind of reach effect is executed. Therefore, when it is not possible to step up (higher order) the notice content as the comprehensive development effect type, instead of the notice effect having the comprehensive development effect type as the notice content, the concrete development effect type is used as the notice content. By executing the notice production, the player can obtain information about the specific development production type executed in the variation game, and therefore, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is estimated based on the specific development production type. You can enjoy the progress of the game by playing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice content as the comprehensive development effect type cannot be stepped up (ranked), the specific development effect type is notified in advance. There is concern that the player may easily grasp the level of the final individual effect when the effect type is announced. For example, if it is announced that the normal reach effect will be executed first, and then a notification of a specific development effect type of the normal reach effect is executed, the variable game does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect, It is understood that the normal reach production will end. Then, if it is found that it does not develop into the super reach effect or the special reach effect, it will be understood that the jackpot expectation degree is low, and thus the interest in advancing the variation game is reduced. Therefore, even if it is possible to step up (higher order) the notice content as a comprehensive development effect type, it is possible to give a notice of a specific development effect type. In this way, even when the advance notice content as a comprehensive development effect type can be stepped up (ranked), it is finally executed by enabling the advance notice of the specific development effect type. It is difficult to understand the reach production level. This makes it difficult to understand the jackpot expectation (reliability), so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the progress of the variation game from decreasing.

<Step S4112>
If the notice production for giving notice of the specific development production type of the development production has already been executed (step S4110: Yes), that is, if the details of the notice cannot be made, the MPU 51 displays the variation of the variation game (the variation pattern). It is determined whether or not the hold display change of) is set (step S4112). Here, the pending display change of the variable display for the variable game means, for example, that the variable display displayed side by side with the pending display for the hold of the right to execute the variable game (the pending symbol) changes. The variable display and the hold display will be described with reference to FIG. 75A. The four small circle images displayed at the bottom of the screen are the hold display, and the large circle image on the left side of the small circle image is the change display. Is.

By the way, the variable display and the hold display suggest the degree of expectation (reliability) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot due to, for example, the color or the pattern. In one example, the variable display and the hold display change in stages, such as the default display→blue display (blue hold)→green display (green hold)→red display (red hold)→jackpot confirmation display. The higher the stage, the higher the jackpot expectation (reliability). Further, the final stage or timing of the change display or the hold display change is set, for example, at the time of jackpot lottery or when the variation of the decorative design is started, and the hold display change can be executed both during the hold display and during the change display. The variable display is not a hold display, but a change in the variable display is also included in the hold change.

Then, in this step S4112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable display hold change is set in the variable game, thereby determining whether the variable display hold change is possible. When the pending change of the variable display is set in the variable game (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4113, and when the pending change of the variable display is not set in the variable game. (Step S4112: No), the process proceeds to step S4115.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
When the hold change of the change display is set in the change game (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the change display to the hold until the final stage in which the change display is set (step S4113). ). Then, the MPU 51 clears the setting of the pending change for the variable display (step S4114), and ends the advance notice effect resetting process.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the development effect of a higher level than the development effect is executed. If it is not possible to give a notice (step-up) of the fact that a concrete development effect is to be executed, the variation display for the variation game is suspended until the final stage. That is, when there is no content that can be announced in advance regarding the development effect in the variation game, a pending change is executed for the variation display that is unrelated to the development effect in the variation game, instead of the announcement effect regarding the development effect. In the variation game, when the notice effect that the same-level development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the pending change for the variable display is executed. Even if there is no content that can be announced in advance regarding development performance, it is possible to prevent the performance of duplicate preview content from being performed, and to feel bored or disgusted due to the execution of duplicate preview content. Can be suppressed. In addition, the development notice production is changed to the hold change at the final stage of the variable display, so that the player can change the variable display, and the final stage can be changed at an early stage, that is, before the reach production is executed. You can get to know it at the stage of change production. As a result, the player can obtain information for inferring the jackpot expectation (reliability) in the fluctuation at an early stage after the fluctuation game is started, so that the player can proceed with the game while expecting the subsequent game. You can enjoy.

<Step S4115>
When the pending change of the variation display is not set in the variation game (step S4112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a jackpot (step S4115). .. Whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag (5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to ON in step S2103 when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 72, The determination can be made based on whether or not the 5R probability variation jackpot flag and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag) are on. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a big hit (step S4115: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4116, and if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a jackpot ( (Step S4115: No), the process proceeds to step S4119.

<Steps S4116 to S4119>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot (step S4115: YES), the MPU 51 carries out the notice lottery execution lottery with a high winning probability (step S4116). Here, the high winning probability in the execution lottery of the notice effect is a probability compared with the low winning probability in step S4119 described later, and the high winning probability is set from a range of 10% or more and less than 100%, for example. It is preferably set within the range of 30% or more and 90% or less, and more preferably within the range of 50% or more and 80% or less.

On the other hand, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a jackpot (step S4115: No), the MPU 51 carries out the notice lottery execution lottery with a low winning probability (step S4117). Here, the low winning probability in the execution lottery of the notice effect is a probability lower than the high winning probability in step S4116 described above, and is set from the range of 0% to 50%, preferably 5% to 40%. It is set from the following range, more preferably from 10% to 30%. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the execution lottery of the advance notice effect has been won (step S4118). When the MPU 51 wins the execution lottery of the notice effect (step S4118: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the notice effect without changing it (step S4119), moves to step S4105 of FIG. 86, and is set in the RAM 512. The notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area is updated to store the execution of the notice effect, and the notice effect process ends. On the other hand, if the execution lottery for the notice effect has not been won (step S4118: No), the process proceeds to step S4120 in FIG.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the development effect of a higher level than the development effect is executed. If it is not possible to give a notice (step-up) of the fact that a specific development effect is to be executed, the execution lottery determines whether or not the notice effect will be executed. If not, execution of the notice effect is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notice effect of the duplicate notice content from being executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of boredom or disgust that is caused by the notice effect of the duplicate notice content being executed. In addition, the development notice production is changed to the hold change at the final stage of the variable display, so that the player can change the variable display, and the final stage can be changed at an early stage, that is, before the reach production is executed. You can get to know it at the stage of change production. As a result, the player can obtain information for inferring the jackpot expectation (reliability) in the fluctuation at an early stage after the fluctuation game is started, so that the player can proceed with the game while expecting the subsequent game. You can enjoy.

In addition, since the winning probability of the execution lottery when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is higher than the winning probability when the jackpot is a win, the development effect of the same level as when the jackpot result is a jackpot ( 76(B)) is executed, the probability that the notice effect is duplicated becomes high. As a result, in the case where the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect is executed in the case of a big hit is duplicated, a game property that the expectation (reliability) that the lottery result is a big hit is high is given, and the advance notice effect is given. The interest in the game can be improved because the interest in can be improved.

<Step S4120>
When the execution lottery of the notice effect is not won (step S4118: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the right to execute the variable game is suspended (step S4120). Whether or not there is suspension of the right to execute the variable game can be determined based on, for example, the first suspension and the second suspension updated when the first suspension command or the second suspension command is received. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4121 when there is a suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4120: Yes), and when there is no suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4120: No), the processing To step S4124.

<Step S4121>
When there is a suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4120: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a suspension change setting of the suspension display for the variable games after the variable game. MPU51, when there is a setting of the hold change of the hold display for the variable game after the variable game (step S4121: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4122, and the hold change of the hold display for the variable game after the variable game is changed. When there is no setting (step S4121: No), the process proceeds to step S4124.

<Steps S4122 and S4123>
When there is a setting of a hold change of the hold display for the variable game after the variable game (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 is set for the hold display for the variable game after the variable game instead of the notice effect. The holding is changed to the final stage (step S4122). In addition, when the setting of the hold change for the hold display for the variable game after the variable game is set for a plurality of holds, the hold change for the hold display for the hold in which the variable game is executed first is executed. Then, the MPU 51 clears the setting of the hold change for the hold changed (step S4123), and ends the notice effect resetting process.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the development effect of a higher level than the development effect is executed. If it is not possible to give a notice (step-up) that a specific development effect will be executed, an effect related to the game after the next change unrelated to the variable game, that is, a hold after the next change The pending change of the pending display for is executed. Thereby, even if the advance notice content of the advance notice effect cannot be stepped up or detailed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted, so that the advance notice effect of the same advance notice content is avoided. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevents the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, by executing the change game in which the hold change of the hold display for the hold after the next change is executed, the player executes the hold change of the game after the next change earlier than planned. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the pending change to the game with respect to the pending display changed and expecting a big hit, so that the interest of the game is improved. It

<Step S4124>
When there is no suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4120: No), or when there is no setting of suspension change of the suspension display for the variable game after the variable game (step S4121: No), the MPU 51 causes the advance notice effect. Instead of this, the game explanation effect is executed (step S4124), and the notice effect resetting process is ended. Here, as the game explanation effect, for example, an explanation of a game method at the time of a big hit game, an explanation of a big hit probability, a description of various game settings such as a volume adjustment method, a character selection method, and the like can be given.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the development effect of a higher level than the development effect is executed. When it is not possible to give a notice (step-up) that a specific development effect will be executed, an effect unrelated to the variable game, that is, a game explanation is executed. Thereby, even if the advance notice content of the advance notice effect cannot be stepped up or detailed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted, so that the advance notice effect of the same advance notice content is avoided. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevents the interest of the game from being lowered. Further, by executing the game explanation, the player can obtain information about the game, and can increase the knowledge about the game.

<Step S4125>
If the notice content in the notice effect is not related to the development effect (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the notice content in the notice effect is a big hit. If the notice content in the notice effect is a big hit (step S4125: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4126. If the notice content in the notice effect is not a big hit (step S4125: No), the notice effect is reset. The process ends.

<Steps S4126 and S4127>
When the content of the notice in the notice effect is a big hit (step S4125: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a probability variation big hit (step S4126). Whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the probability variation jackpot or not is determined by turning on the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag which can be set to ON in step S2103 when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. It can be determined based on whether or not

Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the probability-varying jackpot (step S4126: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the probability-varying jackpot preview effect (step S4127), and proceeds to step S4105 in FIG. The notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area is updated to store the fact that the probability change notice effect has been executed, and the notice effect process ends.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not the probability-variable jackpot (step S4126: No), that is, if the lottery result is the (5R) normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4117 of FIG. 87. That is, if the content of the notice in the notice production is a big jackpot, if the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the notice lottery execution lottery is performed with a low winning probability, and if the execution lottery is won, the jackpot is made. If the execution lottery is not performed, the advance notice effect for notifying that the advance notice effect is executed is not executed.

In this way, if the notice production that announces that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is duplicated, and if the lottery result is a probability jackpot, the notice content will be stepped up to the probability jackpot notice instead of the jackpot notice. Or, a detailed notice effect is executed, and when the lottery result is usually a jackpot, whether or not to execute the notice effect is determined by a lottery with a low winning probability. In the case where the notice production for notifying that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is duplicated, if the lottery result is a positive variation jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the notice content is stepped up or detailed, Not only is it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding the execution of the announcement effect with the same announcement content, but it is also possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game and also to make sure that it is a sure-change jackpot. Because you can know it, you can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variation jackpot, the execution of the notice effect that is executed after including the same notice content is determined by lottery. Therefore, it is confirmed that the execution of the notice effect that is executed after including the same notice content is limited with a certain probability, and that even if the notice effect is executed by winning the lottery, it is a big hit. While the game progress can be enjoyed with peace of mind, the playability is improved.

In addition, when the notice effect that announces that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is duplicated, the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed later without a lottery is executed if it is a probability variation jackpot, but it is a probability variation jackpot. Even in this case, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is conceivable to set the winning rate in the execution lottery of the notice effect in the case of the probability variation big hit higher than that in the case of the normal big hit. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that in the case where the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed later is executed without the lottery.
Further, the winning rate in the execution lottery of the notice production may be set to be the same for the probability jackpot and the regular jackpot, or the normal jackpot may be set higher than the probability jackpot.

In addition, if the notice effect that includes the probability change jackpot as the notice content is being executed, if the notice content in the notice effect to be executed later is the probability change jackpot, change the notice content. Instead, the subsequent notice production is executed. In the probability variation jackpot that is advantageous for the player, a notice effect including the same notice content is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind while confirming that it is an advantageous probability variation jackpot each time the notice production including the notice content that is preferable to him/her is executed, and thus the game playability is improved. It

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the notice effect scheduled to be executed later is executed by various methods, for example, step-up of the notice content. (Advancement), detailing, change of notice contents, execution of effects unrelated to the variation game. In this way, when the notice production including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the notice effect to be executed later is restricted, so that the same notice content can be set in one variation game. The notice effect is suppressed from being executed, and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the notice effect to be executed later. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the same notice contents are duplicated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the notice production including the same notice content is related to the first pseudo-repeating production, the production is changed to a notice for notifying the total number of pseudo-repeating productions instead of the pseudo-repeating execution notice production. As a result, the player can grasp the total number of pseudo consecutive games before the first pseudo consecutive game is executed, and therefore, the player can guess the expectation (reliability) of a big hit based on the total number of pseudo consecutive games. You can enjoy the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the notice production including the same notice content is related to the development production, the development production of a higher level than the development production is executed or the notice production having the specific development production type as the notice content. Is executed. By executing the advance notice effect that a higher-level development effect is executed than the development effect concerned, by notifying that the higher-level development effect will be executed (the notice content is stepped up (upper Since it is possible to understand that the reach effect having a higher expectation (reliability) of being a big hit is executed, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game. In addition, by executing the notice production with the concrete development production type as the notice content, even if the notice content as the comprehensive development production type cannot be stepped up (upgraded), the notice production executed later is executed. In addition to being restricted, the player can obtain information about a specific development performance type executed in the variation game, so that the player can guess the jackpot expectation (reliability) based on the specific development performance type, etc. You can enjoy the progress of.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect including the same notice content is related to the jackpot, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot notice effect is executed as the probability variation notice effect, and the lottery result is In the case of a normal jackpot, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is determined by a lottery with a low winning probability. As a result, when the probability variation jackpot that is advantageous to the player is performed, the probability variation jackpot preview effect is executed, so that it is possible to avoid execution of the preview effect having the same announcement content, thereby causing player discomfort. Not only is it prevented from deteriorating the interest of the game, but since the player can know that it is a probability variation jackpot, the progress of the game can be enjoyed with peace of mind. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variation jackpot, the execution of the notice effect that is executed after including the same notice content is determined by lottery. Therefore, it is confirmed that the execution of the notice effect that is executed after including the same notice content is limited with a certain probability, and that even if the notice effect is executed by winning the lottery, it is a big hit. While the game progress can be enjoyed with peace of mind, the playability is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the notice effect including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the notice effect executed later is set in the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 73). Although it is restricted to be executed while being set, the notice effect to be executed later is changed to another notice effect, etc., but the notice effect to be executed later is set in the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 73). Instead of being restricted to be executed as it is, the notice effect to be executed later is set in at least a part of the aspects (for example, color or color) from the content set in the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 73). The pattern) may be changed and executed. As described above, the advance notice effect to be executed later is executed by changing at least a part of the mode (for example, color or pattern) from the content set in the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 73). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is possible to prevent the notice effect to be executed later from being determined and executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same notice effect is not set in the same variable game (see FIG. 80, FIG. 82, FIG. 84, FIG. 80, etc.), but the same notice effect is set multiple times in the same variable game. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, the same design change items as the design change items in the first to fifth embodiments described above can be made, and the technical matters of the first to fifth embodiments described above. It is also possible to combine.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the notice production including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the notice production scheduled to be executed later is the execution timing of the notice production. In the above, various methods are described, for example, the case where the advance notice content is limited by step-up (upstreaming) or detailing, change of the advance notice content, and execution of an effect unrelated to the variation game.

However, if the execution of the notice effect scheduled to be executed later is limited to the notice effect scheduled to be executed later at the execution timing of the notice effect, the notice effect already executed is stored every time the notice effect is executed. It is necessary to set it, and each time you try to execute the notice effect, it is judged whether the notice effect including the same notice content was executed in the past, and if the notice effect including the same notice content was executed in the past, , It is necessary to limit the notice effect in the light of future events in the variable game. Therefore, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the control load at the time of executing the variable game becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when setting the notice effect, the notice effect is determined so that the notice effect including the same notice content is not set. In this way, when the notice effect is set, the notice effect is determined so that the notice effect including the same notice content is not set, so that it is necessary to store the executed notice effect each time the notice effect is executed. None, it is also necessary to judge whether or not the notice effect including the same notice content has been executed in the past each time the notice effect is executed, and the notice to be executed later in the light of a future event in the variable game. There is no need to limit the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of execution of the variable game, and to limit the execution of the notice effect including the same notice content, and the notice effect of the same notice content is executed in duplicate. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to this.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92.

[Advance notice setting process]
Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, the notice effect setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment is basically the same as the notice effect setting process of the sixth embodiment described above, but the notice effect is set. The difference from the sixth embodiment is that the resetting process (step S4201) is executed.

[Advance notice re-setting process]
In the notice effect resetting process of the present embodiment, when the notice effects set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the notice effect setting process of FIG. 90 include the notice effects including the same notice contents, the notice effects including the same notice contents. The notice production is reset so that is not set. Here, FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect resetting process of the present embodiment.

<Steps S4301 and S4302>
As shown in FIG. 91, in the notice effect resetting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 reads the notice effect set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the notice effect setting process of FIG. 90 (step S4301), and these notice effects are set. It is determined whether or not there is a notice effect in which the notice contents are duplicated (step S4302). When there is a notice effect in which the notice contents overlap in the notice effect (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4303, and when there is no notice effect in which the notice contents overlap in the notice effect. (Step S4302: No), the notice effect resetting process is ended.

<Step S4303>
When there is a notice effect in which the notice contents overlap in the notice effect (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the duplicate notice contents are pseudo-linkage (step S4303). If the duplicate notice content is pseudo-association related (step S4303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4304. If the duplicate notice content is not pseudo-associative related (step S4303: No), the process is performed at step S4307. Move to.

<Step S4304>
When the duplicate notice content is pseudo-association related (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the pseudo-relationship execution notice production is a pseudo-execution other than the pseudo-relationship execution notice production among the notice productions in which the duplicate notice content is pseudo-association relation. It is determined whether or not it is executed after the continuous announcement effect (step S4304). When the pseudo-run execution notice effect is executed after the pseudo-run-related notice effects other than the pseudo-run execution notice effect (step S4304: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4305, and the pseudo-run execution notice effect is generated. When it is executed prior to the pseudo-relationship related notice effects other than the pseudo-relationship execution notice effect (step S4304: NO), the process proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4305 and S4306>
When the pseudo-run execution notice effect is executed after a pseudo-run-related notice effect other than the pseudo-execution notice effect (step S4304: YES), the MPU 51 specifies the total number of pseudo-run times in the variation game (step). (S4305) The first pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is reset to a pseudo-repeated notice effect corresponding to the total number of pseudo consecutive executions in the variable game (step S4106).

Here, the total number of pseudo consecutive games in the variation game can be determined based on, for example, the total number of pseudo consecutive games stored in step S3602 in the pseudo consecutive notice effect setting process of FIG. Further, when the total number of pseudo consecutive notices is 2, the MPU 51 resets to the pseudo consecutive 2 notice production (see FIG. 75(B)) instead of the pseudo consecutive execution notice production when the total number of pseudo consecutive notices is 2. When the number of pseudo consecutive times is 3, the pseudo consecutive execution notice effect is replaced with the pseudo consecutive 3 notice effect (see FIG. 75C), and when the total number of pseudo consecutive times is 4, pseudo Instead of the consecutive execution notice effect, the pseudo consecutive four notice effect (see FIG. 75D) is reset. In addition, when the total number of times of pseudo-repetition is one, it is not necessary to reset the pseudo-repetition notice effect (see FIG. 75(A)) as the pseudo-reaction notice effect, and the pseudo-reaction notice effect having the same content is set. You may reset to the execution notice production.

In this way, when the notice productions of the pseudo-repeated executions overlap, instead of the first pseudo-repeated execution notice productions, other pseudo-repeated notice productions according to the total number of pseudo-repeated productions (pseudo-reliance 2 notices). By resetting the production, the pseudo-relation 3 notice production, or the pseudo-reproduction 4 notice production, the notice production of the duplicate notice content is prevented from being executed, and the notice production of the duplicate notice content is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of boredom and disgust that are caused by the above. Further, since the other pseudo-repeated notice productions that are reset in place of the pseudo-repeated execution notice productions are productions that give notice of the total number of pseudo-repeated productions, the player can perform a total pseudo-reproduction before the first pseudo-repeated production is executed. Since the number of consecutive games can be grasped, the progress of the game can be enjoyed by estimating the expectation (reliability) of being a big hit based on the total number of pseudo consecutive games.

In the present embodiment, the execution of the first pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is restricted and reset to the pseudo-repeated notice effect that notices the total number of pseudo-repetition times, but the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is executed multiple times. In this case, the second or subsequent pseudo-repeated execution notice effect may be reset to a notice effect including the notice related to the pseudo-reaction, or the notice effect to be executed first may be reset.

<Step S4307>
When the overlapping notice contents are not related to pseudo-linkage (step S4303: No), when the pseudo-link execution notice effect is executed before any other pseudo-link-related notice effects other than the pseudo-link execution notice effect (step S4304: No). Alternatively, when the pseudo-announcement notice effect is reset (step S4106), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the duplicate notice contents are related to the development effect (step S4307). Here, the advance notice content related to the development effect is an announcement of a comprehensive type of the development effect, that is, whether the development effect is a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, or a special reach effect. Determine whether or not. Specifically, in the MPU 51, the notice effect is a specific step-up effect among the step-up effects (white background SU2 effect, white background SU3 effect, white background SU4 effect, red background SU1 effect, red background SU2 effect, A red background SU3 effect) (see FIG. 74(B)), a specific serif effect among the serif effects (white serif 2 effect, white serif 3 effect, white serif 4 effect, red serif 1 effect, red serif 2 effect, red) It is determined whether it is any one of the serif 3 effect, the red serif 4 effect, the red serif 5 effect (see FIG. 74C) and the character group effect (see FIG. 74D). If the duplicate notice content is related to development effect (step S4307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4308. If the duplicate notice content is not related to development effect (step S4307: No), the process is performed. The procedure moves to step S4312 in FIG.

<Step S4308>
If the overlapping notice content is related to the development effect (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the MPU 51 is to execute a higher-level development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the notification content in the notification effect. Is determined (step S4109). Here, in the comprehensive development performance, the special reach performance is the highest, the super reach performance is the middle, and the normal reach performance is the lowest. Therefore, for example, in the case where the notice effect includes the notice content that the normal reach effect is executed, the MPU 51 has a super reach effect or a special reach effect whose production pattern in the variable game is higher than the normal reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is a production pattern to be executed (super reach production pattern or special reach production pattern). Further, when the notice effect includes the fact that the super reach effect is executed as the notice content, the MPU 51 executes the special reach effect in which the effect pattern in the variable game is higher than the super reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is the special reach production pattern. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a higher-level development effect is executed as a comprehensive development effect type, that is, whether or not it is possible to step up (higher-order) the notification content in the notification effect.

Then, when the MPU 51 plans to execute a higher development effect as a comprehensive development effect than the notification content in the notification effect (step S4309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4310. On the other hand, when the higher-level development effect is not scheduled to be executed as the comprehensive development effect than the content of the advance notification in the advance notification effect (step S4309: No), the process proceeds to step S4311.

In addition, as a case where a higher-level development effect is not planned to be executed as a comprehensive development effect than the notification content in the notification effect, there is a case where a reach pattern of the notification content is set as a final individual effect. Applicable Specifically, when the advance notice content is that the normal reach production is executed, when the normal reach production pattern is set in the variation game, when the advance notice content is that the super reach production is executed, the change When the super reach production pattern is set in the game, when the advance notice content is that the special reach production is executed, the case where the special reach production pattern is set in the variable game is applicable.

<Step S4310>
When a higher-level development effect is planned to be executed as a comprehensive development effect than the advance notification content in the advance notification effect (step S4309: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the last of the advance notification effects in which the duplicate advance notification content is related to the advanced effect. The notice effect executed in step 1 is reset to the notice effect that gives notice that the higher development effect will be executed. For example, the MPU 51 gives notice that the development effect that is one level higher than the notice content in the notice effect that is finally executed is executed, that is, the notice effect that is finally executed is the normal reach effect. If it is, it is reset to a notice effect (for example, a red background SU2 effect) that gives an advance notice that the super reach effect is executed, and if the notice effect is an announcement that the super reach effect is executed. Is reset to a notice effect (for example, a red background SU3 effect) that gives a notice that the special reach effect is executed.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type is duplicated, the development effect of a higher level than the development effect is executed. By setting the advance notice effect of the thing again, it is possible to prevent the notice effect of the duplicate notice content from being executed, and the feeling of boredom or disgust caused by the notice effect of the duplicate notice content being executed. Can be suppressed. In addition, the reach production with a higher expectation (reliability) of being a jackpot is announced because it is announced that higher-level development production will be executed (the advance notice content is stepped up (upstream)). Since it is possible to grasp that the game is being executed, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notice effect executed last among the notice effects whose duplicate notice content is related to the development effect is reset, but when there are duplicate notice contents in three or more notice effects, May reset two or more preview effects whose preview content overlaps, or may reset the preview effect to be executed first.

<Step S4311>
When the higher-level development effect is not planned to be executed as the comprehensive development effect than the advance notification content in the advance notification effect (step S4309: No), the MPU 51 determines at the end of the advance effect that the duplicate advance notification content is related to the advanced effect. The preview effect to be executed is reset to a preview effect that predicts a specific development effect type.

Here, the advance notice of the specific development effect type of the development effect is a notification that details which development effect is executed among the development effects of the same level (see FIG. 76(B)). For example, if the normal reach production corresponding to comprehensive development production includes warin reach production, urin reach production, marine reach production, whale lucky reach production and thumb reach production, these walnut reach production, urin reach production, marine reach production, whale lucky production Each of the reach effect and the thumb reach effect corresponds to a concrete development effect, and that the marine reach effect of the normal reach effects is foretold is a notice of the specific development effect type.

In this way, when the advance notice effect that the same level of development effect (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed as the comprehensive development effect type overlaps, the specific development effect type of the development effect is executed. By setting the advance notice effect again, it is possible to prevent the notice effect with the duplicate notice content from being executed, and to avoid the feeling of boredom or aversion that is caused by the notice effect with the duplicate notice content being executed. Occurrence can be suppressed. In addition, since the player can obtain the information about the specific development effect type executed in the variable game by resetting to the advance notification effect with the specific development effect type as the advance notice content, the specific development effect You can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the jackpot expectation (reliability) based on the type.

<Step S4312>
When the duplicate notice content is not related to the development effect (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the duplicate notice content is about a big hit (step S4312), as shown in FIG. 91. When the duplicate notice content is related to the jackpot (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4313, and when the duplicate notice content is not related to the jackpot (step S4312: No), the notice effect is reproduced again. The setting process ends.

<Step S4313 to Step S4315>
When the overlapping notice content is related to the jackpot (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot (step S4313). Whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the probability variation jackpot or not is determined by turning on the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag which can be set to ON in step S2103 when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. It can be determined based on whether or not

Then, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a probable change jackpot (step S4313: Yes), the notice content that is the last one of the notice productions for which the duplicate notice content is a jackpot will be changed in the notice content. The notice effect to be a big hit is reset (step S4314), and the notice effect process is ended.

On the other hand, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a probability-change jackpot (step S4313: No), that is, if the lottery result is the (5R) normal jackpot, the final notice of the notice effects in which the duplicate notice content is the jackpot The notice effect to be executed is cleared, and the notice effect process is ended.

In this way, if the notice production that announces that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is duplicated, and if the lottery result is a probability jackpot, the notice content will be stepped up to the probability jackpot notice instead of the jackpot notice. Or, it is reset to the detailed notice effect, and when the lottery result is usually a big hit, the setting of the notice effect is cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from having an unpleasant feeling by avoiding execution of a notice effect having the same notice content, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, when the lottery result is a probability jackpot, the notice effect including the probability jackpot as the notice content is reset, so that the player can know that it is a probability jackpot, so the player can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind. You can

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notice effect executed last among the notice effects for which the duplicate notice content is a big hit is reset, but when the notice contents overlap with three or more notice effects, Two or more notice effects whose notice contents overlap may be reset, or the notice effect executed first may be reset.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the notice effect, the notice effect is determined so that the notice effect including the same notice content is not set. In this way, when the notice effect is set, the notice effect is determined so that the notice effect including the same notice content is not set, so that it is necessary to store the executed notice effect each time the notice effect is executed. None, it is also necessary to judge whether or not the notice effect including the same notice content has been executed in the past each time the notice effect is executed, and the notice to be executed later in the light of a future event in the variable game. There is no need to limit the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of execution of the variable game, and to limit the execution of the notice effect including the same notice content, and the notice effect of the same notice content is executed in duplicate. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to this.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made within the applicable range, and the technical matters of the first to sixth embodiments described above are possible. It is also possible to combine.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the notice production including the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the notice production scheduled to be executed later is the execution timing of the notice production. In the above, various methods are described, for example, a case where the advance notice content is limited by step-up (upstreaming) or detailing (specification), changing the advance notice content, and execution of an effect unrelated to the variation game. In the above-described sixth embodiment, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the notice effects of the same notice content are repeatedly executed.

However, it is assumed that some players do not notice that the notice productions of the same notice contents have been duplicated, and in that case, when the notice contents overlap, the step up to the notice contents that are more advantageous to them ( It is assumed that the user will not be aware of the fact that the information has been enhanced or detailed (specification), that is, that the advantageous information has been provided to the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notice content in the notice effect to be executed later is executed without change, and the effect information (additional information) not notified (notified) in the notice content executed earlier is presented to the player. To be done. In this way, the notice content in the notice effect to be executed later is executed without change, and the effect information (additional information) that was not announced (notified) in the notice content executed earlier is presented to the player. Then, in addition to the information grasped from the notice production, additional information different from this information can be obtained at the same time. Therefore, when the additional information is presented, the eyesight is changed, and it is possible to obtain a sense of satisfaction and a profit by obtaining the additional information. As a result, for example, the discomfort caused by the execution of the advance notice effect of the same advance notice content is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game is prevented. In addition, even if the player does not notice that the notice production of the same notice content has been executed in duplicate, or even if the player has little knowledge about the game machine, the notice information can be provided by the additional information additionally provided. Not only will you be able to easily understand that different information has been presented, but based on the additional information, for example, the content of the variable game effect that will occur later in the variable game or the pending game after the variable game and the jackpot lottery It is possible to specify the lottery result in.

In addition, when additional information different from the content of the notice in the notice effect to be executed later is to be presented when the notice effect of the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, it should be performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. preferable. The predetermined condition in this case is that, in the above-described sixth embodiment, execution of the notice effect that is executed later when the notice effect having the same notice content is scheduled to be executed is limited (the notice content is changed. ) Is the same as the predetermined condition. In this way, by setting the predetermined condition for presenting the additional information different from the content of the notice in the notice effect that will be executed later, the presentation frequency of the additional information is adjusted according to how the predetermined condition is set. It will be possible. As a result, for example, by setting a predetermined condition such that the frequency of presentation of the additional information is low, it is possible to improve the gaming property by giving the additional information a premium character.

Here, as the additional information, a future event in the variable game, particularly an unannounced future event, is considered, and it is preferable that the additional information is advantageous to the player over the content of the notice in the notice production later. The future event of this embodiment is the same as the future event of the sixth embodiment. In this way, when the notice effect of the same notice content is scheduled to be executed, the additional information in the case of performing the notice effect executed later is a future occurrence event of (unannounced) It becomes possible to previously recognize an event that will occur in the future in the game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the variable game while considering future events that are recognized from the additional information. Further, since the information is more advantageous to the player than the content of the notice in the later notice effect, a game property that the player can obtain additional information that is advantageous when the notice contents overlap is added.

Further, the (unannounced) future event relates to, for example, a variable game effect executed in the variable game, and the additional information in this case is preferably related to the variable game effect. In this way, since the (unannounced) future event (additional information) relates to the variable game effect executed in the variable game, a part of the variable game effect that will occur in the variable game in the future can be partially generated. It can be recognized or specified. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is to execute the jackpot game, from a part of the variable game effect grasped from the additional information. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, as for the variable game effect executed in the variable game, similar to the sixth embodiment, for example, a pseudo continuous effect is executed, a development effect is executed, and a jackpot lottery. An effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit is executed, and a pending display change occurs in the variable display for the variable game.

Further, when the (unannounced) future event is related to the variable game effect executed in the variable game, the additional information is, for example, the same or similar notification content as the notice content in the notice effect executed later. This is also related to the above, and the notice content of the same kind or the same system as the notice content in the notice effect executed after this case is the same as that of the sixth embodiment.

Further, the additional information may be contents unrelated to the variable game, and the unrelated contents in this case include, for example, information regarding suspension of the right to execute the variable game after the next change. Specifically, the additional information includes, for example, a notice of a change in the hold display for the hold of the right, a notification that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the hold of the right, and the like. .. In this way, since the additional information is related to the content unrelated to the variation game, the additional information is presented even if there is no future event in the variation game that can be presented as the additional information. Will be possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content is not changed in the notice effect to be executed later, but the aspect in which the notice effect is determined (the notice effect to be executed first) It is also conceivable that the program is executed in a mode (a different mode) that can be distinguished from the mode). Here, as the identifiable mode, for example, a mode in which the notice effect is determined (a mode of the notice effect executed first) and a part of the effect (display) may be different. Specific examples include differences in colors, patterns, backgrounds, addition of effects, and the like. In this way, the notice effect is executed in a manner (a different aspect) that can be discriminated from the determined aspect (the aspect of the notice effect executed first), thereby drawing the player's attention to the notice effect, By generating a sense of discomfort, it is possible to focus attention on the notice effect and eventually the image display means (symbol display unit). This makes it easier for the player to know that the additional information is presented.

In the following, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 99.

[Advance notice processing]
Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the notice effect setting process of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the notice effect setting process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 85) of the sixth embodiment described above, but the notice effect resetting process is performed. Instead, it differs from the sixth embodiment in that the additional information display setting process is executed. Further, the notice effect process of the present embodiment is also different from the sixth embodiment in that the notice effect to be executed is executed by changing the mode when the additional information is displayed.

<Step S4401>
As shown in FIG. 93, in the notice effect setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines that the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time does not overlap the notice content in the notice effect executed earlier (step S4004). : No), the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time is executed (step S4401). That is, when the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time is the content that has not been previously announced, the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time is the notice effect set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73. It is executed in the mode (first mode) (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect executed this time in the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 (step S4006), and ends the notice effect process.

<Step S4402>
On the other hand, the MPU 51 executes the additional information display setting process (step S4004: Yes) when the notice content in the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time overlaps the notice content in the notice effect executed first (step S4004: Yes). ). The additional information display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. Then, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect executed this time in the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 (step S4006), and ends the notice effect process.

[Additional information display setting processing]
In the additional information display setting process of this embodiment, when the notice effect set in steps S3501 to S3505 of the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 includes the notice effect including the same notice content, the notice effect scheduled to be executed this time is The mode is changed and the additional information is displayed during the execution of the notice effect. Here, FIGS. 94 and 95 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the additional information display setting process of the present embodiment.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 94, in the additional information display setting process according to the present embodiment, the MPU 51 executes the pseudo announcement of the notice effect that was scheduled to be executed this time, which was specified in step S4003 in the notice effect process of FIG. 93. It is determined whether or not it is a pseudo-repeated execution announcement effect that gives an advance notice only (step S4501). The pseudo-repeated execution notice effect of the present embodiment is executed by being displayed as an image showing that the character utters the word "one more time", as shown in FIG. 96(A), for example. Then, when the preview effect scheduled to be executed this time is the pseudo continuous execution preview effect (step S4505: YES), the MPU 51 moves to step S4502 for processing, and the preview effect scheduled to be executed this time is pseudo continuous execution. If it is not the notice effect (step S4501: No), the process proceeds to step S4506.

<Step S4502>
If the preview effect that was scheduled to be executed this time is the pseudo-run execution preview effect (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the pseudo-run corresponding to the current pseudo-run execution preview effect is the first pseudo-link in the variation game. It is determined whether or not (step S4502). Whether or not the pseudo-relation corresponding to the pseudo-repeated execution notice production this time is the first pseudo-repeation in the variation game, for example, the notice production execution history storage area of the notice production reset storage area set in the RAM 512. Based on the execution history of, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an execution history of a pseudo-repeated notice production such as a pseudo-repeated notice notice production in the variable game. If the pseudo-relation corresponding to the current pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is the first pseudo-repeated one in the variation game (step S4502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4503, and this pseudo-repeated execution notice is given. If the pseudo string corresponding to the effect is not the first pseudo string in the variation game (step S4502: No), the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG.

<Step S4503>
When the pseudo-relation corresponding to the current pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is the first pseudo-reaction in the variation game (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 notifies the advance notice re-setting storage area set in the RAM 512. Based on the execution history of the effect execution history storage area, it is determined whether or not the red dialogue effect (see FIG. 74(C)) has been executed in the variation game (step S4502). Here, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the red serif effect includes red serif 1 effect, red serif 2 effect, red serif 3 effect, red serif 4 effect, and red serif 5 effect. Announces the comprehensive type of development production, and also announces that the pseudo-link will be executed. In other words, when the pseudo-relation execution notice effect is a notice that the first pseudo-relation execution is performed, the pseudo-relation effect is executed by the execution timing of the pseudo-relation execution notice effect. When it is previously announced that the pseudo consecutive execution notice effect will be different from the pseudo consecutive execution notice effect set in step S3501 of the notice effect setting process in FIG. 73 (second mode). ) Is executed and the additional information image showing the maximum number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed as the additional information.

Note that, as the additional information, information indicating the number of unexecuted pseudo stations (the number of scheduled pseudo stations) may be displayed instead of the information indicating the maximum number of pseudo stations. In addition, as for the pseudo-repeated execution notice production for notifying that the second and subsequent pseudo-execution is executed, the pseudo-repeated execution notice production is changed to the second mode when the conditions of steps S4501 to 4503 are satisfied. The additional information image indicating the maximum number of times of pseudo repetitions may be displayed as the additional information as well as the execution.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4504 when the red serif effect has already been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo continuous execution notice effect in the variable game (step S4503: Yes), and the red serif effect is executed. When not completed (step S4503: No), the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG.

<Step S4504 and Step S4505>
In the variable game, when the red serif effect for announcing the execution of the pseudo rendition has been executed by the execution timing of the pseudo rendition execution notice effect for the first pseudo rendition (step S4503: Yes), the MPU 51 uses the additional information. The setting process of the notice display showing the total number of pseudo consecutive games in the variable game is executed (step S4504). The total number of pseudo consecutive games in the variable game can be determined based on, for example, the total number of pseudo consecutive games stored in step S3602 in the pseudo consecutive notice effect setting process of FIG.

Further, the MPU 51 changes and executes the pseudo continuous execution notice effect (the notice effect concerned) in a mode (second mode) different from the pseudo continuous execution notice effect set in step S3501 of the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73. Then, (step S4505), the additional information display setting process ends. Note that, when the pseudo continuous execution notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed ( In step S4506 in FIG. 93, the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the form of the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect and the additional information image. Specifically, FIG. 96(A) is a diagram showing a screen example on the symbol display unit 341 when the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is executed as the first mode, and FIGS. 96(B) to 96(D). ) Is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the symbol display unit 341 when the pseudo-run execution notice effect is executed as the second mode. It should be noted that FIG. 96(B) is an example of a screen on which an additional information image showing that the total pseudo consecutive number is 2 is displayed, and FIG. 96(C) is additional information showing that the total pseudo consecutive number is 3. An example of a screen in which an image is displayed, and FIG. 96(D) is an example of a screen in which an additional information image indicating that the total pseudo consecutive number of times is 4 is displayed.

The first mode of the pseudo-run execution notice effect is executed when the notice content in the pseudo-execution notice effect does not overlap with the notice content in the previously executed notice effect (step S4004: No). Yes, this is a mode set in the notice production setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the first mode of the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is executed by being displayed as an image showing that the girl character utters the word "again". It At this time, the character background (inside the balloon) of the "again" balloon is displayed as, for example, white monotone.

The second mode of the pseudo-run execution notice effect is executed when the notice content of the pseudo-execution notice effect overlaps with the notice content of the previously executed notice effect (step S4004: Yes). Yes, this is a mode different from the first mode set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 96(B) to FIG. 96(D), in the second mode of the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect, the girl character utters the word "one more time" as in the first mode. It is executed by being displayed as an image showing the situation, but the character background (inside the balloon) of the balloon of "again" is different from the first mode, for example, as a monotone or a pattern with a color other than white. Is displayed.

Further, the additional information image in the case where the pseudo-repeated execution notice effect is executed in the second mode is “NEXT×2” when the total number of pseudo-repeated times is 2 as shown in FIG. 96(B), for example. When the total number of pseudo consecutive stations is 3 as shown in FIG. 96(C), it is displayed as “NEXT×3”, and the total number of pseudo consecutive stations is 4 as shown in FIG. 96(D). In some cases, it is displayed as “NEXT×4”.

Of course, if the additional information image indicating the total number of pseudo consecutive occurrences is a display that can be recognized as the total number of pseudo consecutive occurrences (or the number of unexecuted pseudo consecutive occurrences), the image shown in FIGS. 96(B) to 96(D). The image can be displayed as another image without being limited to. For example, for the additional information image indicating the total number of pseudo successive runs (or the number of unexecuted pseudo successive runs), “NEXT” is omitted from the images shown in FIGS. 96B to 96D and “×2” and “×” are omitted. 3”, “×4”, etc., or “NEXT”, “NEXT3”, “NEXT4”, etc., with “×” omitted. Further, the additional information image indicating the total number of pseudo consecutive stations (or the number of unexecuted pseudo consecutive stations) is a combination of a character “pseudo” indicating that the pseudo consecutive station is executed and a number indicating the total number of pseudo consecutive stations, for example, In addition to "pseudo x2", "pseudo x3", "pseudo x4", etc., "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3", "pseudo 4", "suspect 2", "suspect 3", "suspect 4" , Etc. Further, the additional information image (or the unexecuted pseudo consecutive number) indicating the total number of pseudo consecutive times is a display showing only the total number of pseudo consecutive times (or the number of unexecuted consecutive times), for example, "2", "3", "4", It may be “Two”, “Three”, “Four” or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice production including the notice content being executed as the notice content is repeatedly executed, the total number (or the number of non-executions) of the pseudo notice is executed at the time of executing the notice production later. Is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the notice content that the pseudo-relation is executed is duplicated and executed, the additional information image indicating the total number (or the number of unexecuted times) of the pseudo-reaction when the notice effect is executed later. By displaying, it is possible to recognize or specify the total number of pseudo runs executed in the variation game. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will execute the jackpot game from the total number of pseudo-relations grasped from the additional information image. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4506>
Returning to the description of FIG. 94, when the preview effect scheduled to be executed this time is not the pseudo-execution preview effect (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 schedules the current execution specified in step S4003 in the preview effect process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the content of the notice in the notice effect which is "(1)" is related to the development effect (step S4506). The determination in this step is made as to whether or not a comprehensive type of development effect is to be announced, and in the same manner as step S4007 in the notification effect resetting process of FIG. 86 in the sixth embodiment described above. To be executed. If the notice content in the notice effect that was scheduled to be executed this time is related to the development effect (step S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4507, and the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed this time. If the content of the notice in (4) is not related to the development effect (step S4506: No), the process proceeds to step S4511 in FIG.

<Step S4507>
When the notice content in the notice production that was scheduled to be executed this time is related to the development production (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 develops higher than the notice content in the notice production as a higher-level development production. It is determined whether or not is to be executed (step S4507). When the MPU 51 plans to execute a higher-level development performance as a comprehensive development performance than the notification content in the notification performance (step S4507: YES), the process proceeds to step S4508, and the notification content in the notification performance is compared. Also, if the upper development effect is not scheduled to be executed as the comprehensive development effect (step S4507: No), the process proceeds to step S4509.

The comprehensive development effect is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and includes a special reach effect, a super reach effect, and a normal reach effect. The special reach effect is the highest, the super reach effect is medium, and the normal reach effect. Is the lowest.

<Step S4508>
When the higher-level development performance is planned to be executed as the comprehensive development performance than the notification content in the preliminary performance (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the higher-level comprehensive development performance as the comprehensive development performance. Is set (step S4508). Then, the MPU 51 changes the mode (second mode) different from the development notice effect set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 to execute the development effect notice effect (step S4505), and executes the additional information display setting process. To finish. When the development notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 97(A) and FIG. 97(B) are diagrams for explaining a mode of the development effect notice effect and the additional information image. Specifically, FIG. 97(A) is a diagram showing a screen example on the symbol display unit 341 when the comprehensive development effect is executed as the first mode, and FIG. 97(B) is the comprehensive development effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen in the symbol display part 341 when a notice production is performed as a 2nd aspect and an additional information image is displayed.

The first aspect of the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is that the content of the advance effect preview effect scheduled to be executed this time does not overlap with the content of the preview effect previously executed (step S4004: No). 73, and is a mode set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 97(A), it is executed by displaying an image of a whale character uttering the word "SP!" corresponding to super reach. At this time, in the balloon of "SP!", the character background (inside the balloon) is displayed as, for example, white monotone.

The second aspect of the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is that the content of the advance effect preview effect scheduled to be executed this time overlaps the content of the preview effect previously executed (step S4004: Yes). 73, which is a mode different from the first mode set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 97(B), as in the first mode, the whale character is displayed as an image showing a state of issuing the word "SP!" corresponding to super reach, which is executed. To be done. At this time, in the balloon of "SP!", the character background (inside the balloon) is displayed as a monotone or a pattern with a color different from the first mode, for example, a color other than white.

In addition, the additional information image (effect superimposition image) when the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is executed in the second mode is higher than the comprehensive development effect previously announced as the additional effect as the additional effect. It is an image showing that the comprehensive development effect of is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 97(B), when it is previously announced that the super reach is to be executed as the development effect in the notice effect, the upper special reach may be executed as the comprehensive development effect by the additional information image. Specified. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of “SPSP!” corresponding to the special reach in proximity to the character of the whale.

Of course, the additional information image indicating that the upper comprehensive development effect such as the special reach is executed is the image shown in FIG. 97(B) if it is a display that can be recognized as the upper comprehensive development effect. The image can be displayed as another image without limitation. For example, the additional information image indicating that the higher-level comprehensive development effect is executed may be "SPSP reach", "special reach", "special", or the like.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the notice production including the notice that the comprehensive development effect is performed is executed in a duplicated manner, when the notice production is performed later, the notice is given in the previous notice production. An additional information image indicating that a higher-level comprehensive development effect will be executed later is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the notice content that the comprehensive development production is executed is duplicated, when the notice production is executed later, the comprehensive development production announced in advance in the notice production Also, by displaying the additional information image indicating that the higher-level comprehensive development effect will be executed later, it is possible to recognize or specify the comprehensive development effect executed later in the variation game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will execute the jackpot game from the comprehensive development effect grasped from the additional information image. As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4509>
Returning to the description of FIG. 94, when the higher-level development performance is not scheduled to be executed as the comprehensive development performance than the content of the notification in the notification performance (step S4507: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the development performance can be embodied. Alternatively, for example, it is determined whether or not the notice effect for giving a notice of the specific development effect type has been executed (step S4509).

Here, the advance notice of the specific development production type of the development production is the same as that in the sixth embodiment, and which development production of the development productions of the same level (see FIG. 76(B)) is executed. This is a notice that will be detailed. For example, if the normal reach production corresponding to comprehensive development production includes warin reach production, urin reach production, marine reach production, whale lucky reach production and thumb reach production, these walnut reach production, urin reach production, marine reach production, whale lucky production Each of the reach effect and the thumb reach effect corresponds to a concrete development effect, and that the marine reach effect of the normal reach effects is foretold is a notice of the specific development effect type.

Then, when the MPU 51 can materialize the specific development effect type of the development effect (step S4509: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4510, and the specific development effect type of the development effect cannot be specified. If there is (step S4509: NO), the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG.

<Step S4510>
When the specific development effect type of the development effect can be embodied (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the specific development effect type is executed (step S4510). Then, the MPU 51 changes the development effect notice effect to a mode (second mode) different from the development notice effect set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 and executes it (step S4505), and the additional information display setting process. To finish. When the development notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 97(C) is a diagram showing a screen example in the symbol display unit 341 when the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. ..

The additional information image (production embodying image) when the development production preview production is executed in the second mode is a more specific development production type of the comprehensive development production previously announced as the development production as additional information. Is an image showing that is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 97(C), when it is previously announced that super reach will be executed as the development effect in the advance notice effect, it is clearly indicated that the marine super reach of the super reach is executed by the additional information image. To be done. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of "Marine SP!" corresponding to the marine super reach near the character of the whale.

Of course, the additional information image indicating the specific destination for development such as marine super reach is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 97(C) as long as it is a display that can recognize the specific destination for development. It can be displayed as an image. For example, the additional information image showing the specific destination for development may be "Marine reach", "Marine special reach", "Marine special", or the like.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the notice production including the notice that the comprehensive development effect is performed is executed in a duplicated manner, when the notice production is performed later, the notice is given in the previous notice production. An additional information image regarding the development effect that is a more specific (detailed) version of the comprehensive development effect is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the notice content to be executed as the notice content is duplicated, when the notice production is performed later, the comprehensive development notice announced in the previous notice production is executed. By displaying the additional information image relating to the more detailed (detailed) development effect, it is possible to recognize or specify the specific development effect to be executed later in the variation game. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will execute the jackpot game from the concrete development effect grasped from the additional information image. As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the advance notice content as the comprehensive development effect type cannot be stepped up (upgraded), the specific development effect type is displayed as the additional information. There is a concern that the player may easily understand the level of the final individual effect when the development effect type is presented. For example, if it is announced that the normal reach effect will be executed first, and then a specific development effect type of the normal reach effect is presented, the variable game does not develop into the super reach effect or the special reach effect, and the normal reach effect is generated. It will be understood that it will end with. Then, if it is found that it does not develop into the super reach effect or the special reach effect, it will be understood that the jackpot expectation degree is low, and thus the interest in advancing the variation game is reduced. Therefore, even if it is possible to step up (higher order) the notice content as a comprehensive development performance type, it is possible to present a specific development performance type. In this way, even when the notice content as a comprehensive development effect type can be stepped up (ranked), it is finally executed by being able to present the specific development effect type. It is difficult to understand the reach production level. This makes it difficult to understand the jackpot expectation (reliability), so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the progress of the variation game from decreasing.

<Step S4511>
If the notice content in the notice effect that was scheduled to be executed this time is not related to the development effect (step S4506: No), as shown in FIG. 95, the MPU 51 determines that the notice content in the notice effect is a jackpot lottery. Whether the lottery result indicates that it is a big hit (the effect that clearly shows that it is a big hit is executed, for example, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with a doublet or the characters of the big hit are displayed) It is determined whether or not (step S4511). When the notice content in the notice effect indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit (step S4511: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4512, and the notice content in the notice effect. If does not indicate that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S4511: No), the process proceeds to step S4514.

<Step S4512>
When the notice content in the notice production indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S4511: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a definite change jackpot. It is determined whether or not (step S4512). Whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a probability variation jackpot, whether the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or 16R probability variation which can be set to ON in step S2103 when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. It can be determined based on whether or not the jackpot flag is on. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is the probability variation jackpot (step S4512: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4513, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not the probability variation jackpot. In that case (step S4512: NO), the process proceeds to step S4514.

<Step S4513>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is the probability variation jackpot (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the probability variation jackpot (step S4513). .. Then, the MPU 51 changes the development effect notice effect to a mode (second mode) different from the development notice effect set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 and executes it (step S4505 of FIG. 94), and the additional information. The display setting process ends. When the development notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the mode of the jackpot preview effect and the additional information image. Specifically, FIG. 98(A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the symbol display unit 341 when the jackpot notification effect is executed as the first mode, and FIG. 98(B) is the jackpot notification effect second. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen in the symbol display part 341 when it is performed as an aspect and an additional information image is displayed.

The first mode of the jackpot preview effect is a mode that is executed when the preview content of the jackpot preview effect scheduled to be executed this time does not overlap with the preview content of the previously executed preview effect (step S4004: No). , Which is set in the notice production setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a character of a whale is displayed as an image showing a state of issuing a word "big hit!" indicating that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. To be executed. At this time, in the balloon of “big hit!”, the character background (inside the balloon) is displayed as, for example, white monotone.

The second mode of the jackpot preview production is a mode executed when the preview content of the development production preview production scheduled to be executed this time overlaps with the preview content of the previously executed preview production (step S4004: Yes). Yes, this is a mode different from the first mode set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73. For example, as shown in FIG. 98(B), similar to the first mode, the whale character expresses a word "big hit!" indicating that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit! It is executed by being displayed as an image. At this time, in the balloon of “big hit!”, the character background (inside the balloon) is displayed as a monotone or a pattern with a color different from the first mode, for example, a color other than white.

In addition, the additional information image (production higher level image, effect detailed image) when the jackpot notification effect is executed in the second mode not only indicates that the jackpot was previously announced as additional information, but also It is an image showing that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 98(B), when it is previously announced that the lottery result is a big hit in the notice production, the additional information image clearly indicates that the lottery result is a probable variation big hit. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of “probability change!” indicating that the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot in the vicinity of the whale character.

Of course, the additional information image indicating that the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 98(B) as long as it can be recognized that the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, and another image. Can be displayed as. For example, the additional information image that indicates that the lottery result is a probability jackpot is "probability jackpot", "Kaku Kuhen", "Kakuhen", "Kaku Hee N", "Kakuhen". And so on.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the notice effect including the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot (the effect that clearly shows that the jackpot is executed) as the notice content is executed in duplicate. At the time of executing the subsequent notice effect, an additional information image indicating that the content announced in the previous notice effect is a more probable (detailed) and higher order (step-up) jackpot is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the notice that the result of the lottery is a big hit is duplicated and executed, when the notice production is performed later, the notice announced in the notice production is made more concrete ( It is possible to recognize or specify that the lottery result for the fluctuating game is a probability variation jackpot, by displaying the additional information image indicating that the detail variation) and the higher-ranking probability variation jackpot. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4514>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 95, if the pseudo-relation corresponding to the current pseudo-repeated execution notice presentation is not the first pseudo-repetition in the variation game (step S4502 of FIG. 94: No), if the red serif presentation has not been executed yet (Step S4503 of FIG. 94: No), when the specific development effect type of the development effect cannot be embodied (Step S4509 of FIG. 94: No), the announcement content of the announcement effect is a lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Does not indicate that it is a jackpot (step S4511: No), or if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not a sure variation jackpot (step S4512: No), the MPU 51 is the variation for the variation game. It is determined whether or not the pending display change of the display (the variable pattern) is set (step S4514). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending display change of the variable display (the variable symbol) for the variable game is set when the duplicate notice content cannot be enhanced or embodied (detailed). The pending display change of the variable display for the variable game is the same as in the sixth embodiment.

Then, in this step S4514, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending change of the variable display is set in the variable game, thereby determining whether or not the pending change of the variable display is possible. When the pending change of the variable display is set in the variable game (step S4514: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4515, and when the pending change of the variable display is not set in the variable game. (Step S4514: No), the process proceeds to step S4516.

<Step S4515>
When the pending change of the variable display is set in the variable game (step S4514: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed in the variable game (step). S4515). Then, the MPU 51 changes the notice effect to a mode (second mode) different from the notice effect set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. To do. When the development notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 99(A) is a diagram showing a screen example in the symbol display unit 341 when the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 99(A), the additional information image in the case where the development effect announcement effect is executed in the second mode is an image showing that the pending change of the variable display is executed as the additional information. In the example shown in FIG. 99(A), when it is previously announced that the comprehensive development effect will be executed in the advance notification effect, the additional information image clearly indicates that the pending change of the variable display is executed. .. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of "change!" indicating that a pending change occurs near the variable display.

Note that, in FIG. 99(A), when the development effect announcement effect is executed as the second mode, an example is shown in which an additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed is displayed. Even when the notice effect is another notice effect such as a pseudo-execution notice effect, the case of displaying the additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed is shown in FIG. 99(A). An image similar to the additional information image is displayed.

Further, the additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed is limited to the image shown in FIG. 99A as long as it is a display that can recognize that the pending change of the variable display is executed. It can be displayed as another image without being displayed. For example, the additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed may be “pending change”, “change”, “rank up”, or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect including the same notice content is executed in duplicate, an additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed at the time of executing the notice effect later. Is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the same notice content is executed in duplicate, an additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed is displayed at the time of executing the notice production later. , It becomes possible to recognize that the pending change of the variable display is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting what kind of hold with a high expectation, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the fact that the pending change of the variable display is to be executed, that is, the additional information image is to present information different from the notice content in the notice production, makes the notice in the notice production. In the case where the content cannot be upgraded (step up) and detailed (detailed), it is possible to present information regarding a future event in the variable game. As a result, the player can obtain unexpected information based on the additional information image, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4516>
When the pending change of the variable display is not set in the variable game (step S4514: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the right to execute the variable game is reserved (step S4516). Whether or not there is suspension of the right to execute the variable game can be determined based on, for example, the first suspension and the second suspension updated when the first suspension command or the second suspension command is received. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4517 when the right to execute the variable game is suspended (step S4516: Yes).

On the other hand, if the right to execute the variable game is not reserved (step S4516: NO), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4505 in FIG. In other words, if there is no information to be presented as a future event in the variable game and there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game (if there is no information to be presented as a future event after the next change), an additional information image is displayed. Without doing so, the subsequent notice effect is executed in the second mode (step S4505), and the additional information display setting process ends. Of course, when the additional information image is not displayed, the subsequent notice effect may be executed in the first mode.

<Step S4517>
When there is a suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suspension of the right to execute the variable game includes a result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery. Is determined (step S4517). Whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the suspension of the right to execute the variable game is, for example, updated when the first suspension command or the second suspension command is received. It can be determined based on the first hold and the second hold.

If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4517: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4518, and the variable game. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not included in the suspension of the right to execute (step S4517: No), the process proceeds to step S4519.

<Step S4518>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4517: Yes), the MPU 51 uses the jackpot lottery in the suspension after the variable game. The additional information image indicating that the lottery result of is included is a big hit is set (step S4518). Then, the MPU 51 changes the notice effect to a mode (second mode) different from the notice effect set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. To do. When the development notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 99(B) is a diagram showing a screen example in the symbol display unit 341 when the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 99(B), in the additional information image when the development effect announcement effect is executed in the second mode, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the pending after the variation game as additional information. It is an image showing that a certain thing is included. In the example shown in FIG. 99(B), when it is previously announced that the comprehensive development effect will be executed in the notice effect, the additional information image causes the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to be held during the pending after the variation game. It is clarified that the ones that are jackpots are included. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of "per pending" indicating that the pending perimeter is included in proximity to the pending display after the variable game.

In FIG. 99(B), when the development effect preview effect is executed as the second aspect, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the pending after the variable game. Although the example in which the additional information image indicating is displayed is shown, even when the notice effect is another notice effect such as a pseudo continuous execution notice effect, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery during the pending after the relevant variable game When an additional information image indicating that a big hit is included is displayed, an image similar to the additional information image shown in FIG. 99(B) is displayed.

In addition, the additional information image showing that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the pending after the variable game is the lottery result in the jackpot lottery during the pending after the variable game. The display is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 99B and can be displayed as another image as long as it is a display that can recognize that a big hit is included. For example, the additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed may be “win”, “big hit”, “fixed”, or the like.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the notice production including the same notice content is executed in duplicate, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is jackpoted in the pending after the variation game when the notice production is executed later. The additional information image indicating that the item is included is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the same notice content is executed in duplicate, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the pending after the variable game when the notice production is executed later. By displaying the additional information image indicating that the lottery result is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are included in the pending after the variation game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the variable game while expecting that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be executed, but the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In addition, that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is included in the pending after the variable game, that is, the additional information image presents information different from the notice content in the notice production. As a result, when the notice content in the notice production cannot be advanced (step up) and detailed (concrete), it is possible to present information regarding future events in the variable game. As a result, the player can obtain unexpected information based on the additional information image, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

<Step S4519>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not included in the suspension of the right to execute the variable game (step S4517: No), the suspension display of the suspension display for the variable game (held) after the variable game is suspended. It is determined whether or not there is a change setting (step S4519). When there is a setting of the hold change of the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4520.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4505 in FIG. 94 when the setting of the hold change of the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game is not set (step S4516: No). In other words, if there is no information to be presented as a future event in the variable game, and there is no information to be presented as a future event after the next change, the subsequent notice effect is executed in the second mode without displaying the additional information image. Then, (step S4505), the additional information display setting process ends. Of course, when the additional information image is not displayed, the subsequent notice effect may be executed in the first mode.

<Step S4520>
When there is a setting of a hold change of the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the hold display in the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game. An additional information image indicating that an item is included is set (step S4518). Then, the MPU 51 changes the notice effect to a mode (second mode) different from the notice effect set in the notice effect setting process of FIG. 73 (step S4505), and ends the additional information display setting process. To do. When the development notice effect is executed, the MPU 51 updates the notice effect execution history storage area of the notice effect resetting storage area set in the RAM 512 to store that the comprehensive development effect has been executed (FIG. 93). Step S4506), the notice production process is ended.

Here, FIG. 99(C) is a diagram showing a screen example in the symbol display unit 341 when the development effect preview effect for the comprehensive development effect is executed as the second mode and the additional information image is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 99(C), the additional information image in the case where the development effect announcement effect is executed in the second mode is one in which the change display is held in the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game. It is an image showing that it is included. In the example shown in FIG. 99(C), in the case where it is announced in advance that the comprehensive development effect will be executed in the notice effect, the additional information image displays the pending display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game. It is clarified that there is a pending change in the. Specifically, the additional information image is displayed as a character image of "hold change!", which indicates that the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game includes a pending change! ..

Note that, in FIG. 99(C), when the development effect notice effect is executed as the second mode, that which is held and changed is included in the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game. Although the example in which the additional information image indicating is displayed is shown, even when the notice effect is another notice effect such as a pseudo-execution notice effect, the pending display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game is displayed. When displaying the additional information image indicating that the pending change is included, the same image as the additional information image shown in FIG. 99C is displayed.

In addition, the additional information image showing that the pending display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game includes a pending change is the lottery result in the jackpot lottery during the pending after the variable game. The display is not limited to the image shown in FIG. 99C and can be displayed as another image as long as it is a display that can recognize that a big hit is included. For example, the additional information image indicating that the pending change of the variable display is executed may be “change”, “level up”, or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect including the same notice content is executed in duplicate, when the notice effect is executed later, it is held in the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game. An additional information image indicating that a changing object is included is displayed. In this way, when the notice production including the same notice content is executed in duplicate, when the notice production is executed later, the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game includes the one changed to hold. By displaying the additional information image indicating that it is being displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that the hold change of the hold display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the pending display for the variable game (held) after the variable game will change to what kind of hold with high expectation. The interest is improved.

In addition, it indicates that the pending display for the variable game (hold) after the variable game includes a pending change, that is, the additional information image is different from the notice content in the notice production. By presenting the information, if the notice content in the notice production cannot be advanced (step up) and detailed (concrete), information about future events in the variation game after the relevant variation game Can be presented. As a result, the player can obtain unexpected information based on the additional information image, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is not changed, but in the second aspect different from the first aspect in which the notice effect is determined. To be executed. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the additional information image is being displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect of the same notice content is executed, the notice content in the notice effect executed later is executed without change, and further additional information different from the notice content is played. Presented to the person. That is, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the execution of the notice effect executed later when the notice effect having the same notice content is executed is not limited, and in addition to the duplicate notice content, Additional information that is different from the information that is presented by the notice effect is presented. In this way, the execution of the notice effect to be executed later is not limited, and the additional notice information is presented in addition to the duplicate notice content, which is different from this information in addition to the information grasped from the notice effect. Additional information available at the same time. Therefore, when the notice effect of the same notice content is executed, the eyesight is changed by presenting the additional information, and it is possible to obtain a sense of satisfaction and a sense of profit by obtaining the additional information. As a result, the discomfort that the notice effect of the same notice content is being executed is reduced, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. In addition, even if the player does not notice that the notice production of the same notice content has been executed in duplicate, or even if the player has little knowledge about the game machine, the notice information can be provided by the additional information additionally provided. Not only will you be able to easily understand that different information has been presented, but based on the additional information, for example, the content of the variable game effect that will occur later in the variable game or the pending game after the variable game and the jackpot lottery It is possible to specify the lottery result in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the additional information relates to a variable game effect that is a future event in the variable game. In this way, since the (unannounced) future event (additional information) relates to the variable game effect executed in the variable game, a part of the variable game effect that will occur in the variable game in the future can be partially generated. It can be recognized or specified. Thereby, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is to execute the jackpot game, from a part of the variable game effect grasped from the additional information. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the additional information, contents unrelated to the variation game can be presented. In this way, since the content unrelated to the variation game can be displayed as the additional information, the additional information is presented even if there is no future event in the variation game that can be presented as the additional information. It will be possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the additional information is presented, the notice content is not changed in the notice effect to be executed later, but it is executed in a mode different from the mode in which the notice effect is determined. In this way, when the notice content is duplicated, the notice effect to be executed later is executed in a mode different from the determined mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the notice effect and causing a feeling of strangeness, and thus the notice effect. It becomes possible to focus on the symbol display portion 341. This makes it easier for the player to know that the additional information is presented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect indicating that the pseudo-repeation is executed is executed as the same notice content, the total number of pseudo-repetitions or the number of unexecuted times is presented as the additional information. Similarly to the above, the number of times until the final step of the step-up may be presented for the notice effect in which the upper limit number of effects are executed, for example, step-up effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, it is possible to make the same design changes as those in the first to seventh embodiments described above, and the technical matters of the first to seventh embodiments described above. It is also possible to combine.

For example, as in the above-described sixth embodiment, the execution of the notice effect to be executed later is restricted, and the notice effect to be executed later is changed to another effect, and the additional information is displayed. May be. Further, the limitation of the notice effect and the change of the effect executed later are the same as those in the above-described sixth embodiment.

Further, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, it is determined whether or not the notice effect including the same notice content is set when the notice effect is set, and when the notice effect including the same notice content is set, The additional information may be set to be displayed when the notice production is executed later. As described above, when the notice production is set, the additional information is displayed when the notice production including the same notice content is set, so that it is necessary to store the executed notice production every time the notice production is executed. In addition, it is not necessary to judge whether or not the notice effect including the same notice content has been executed in the past each time the notice effect is executed. Therefore, while reducing the control load at the time of executing the variable game, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the notice production including the same notice content.

Further, when the additional information is set to be displayed, the subsequent notice effect may be changed and set to the second aspect different from the first aspect (the aspect initially set in the notice effect setting process). Good. In this way, when the additional information is set to be displayed, it is possible to easily grasp that the additional information is presented by changing the subsequent notice effect to the second aspect different from the first aspect. it can.

[Outline of the Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. It should be noted that, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, a reference numeral or the like may be added for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to a specific configuration with the reference numeral. Not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select each configuration and each processing function described below and combine them arbitrarily.

[Appendix A1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is indicated. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1′, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means in the prescribed period. To be done. As a result, the player can specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical value information by displaying all the specific numerical value information. is there. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix A2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1', which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix A3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2' or Supplementary Note A3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A2' or supplementary note A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information by a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A4', the special information is displayed by a part of the plurality of display areas of the display means for displaying the specific information. That is, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. Accordingly, the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display unit, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display unit can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The display device (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions, the gaming machine described in Appendix A4'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A5', the display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the display means for displaying the specific information and the special information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase of the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A6', the specific information and the special information are displayed as an image on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image type and display mode to be displayed as the specific information and the special information, and the specific information and the special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in identifying or inferring the specific numerical value information or the predetermined numerical value information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7']
The image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed, and the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6'. ..

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A7', the specific information and the special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using the image display means. Thereby, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A7', wherein the prescribed period is set to a period that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the shift determination.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A8′, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display unit when the specific condition is satisfied, and the predetermined period during which the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display unit is the transition determination. It is set to the period which suggests or clearly shows the result of. Therefore, it becomes possible to display the specific information together with the result of the shift determination. For example, when a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display unit, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display unit. This makes it possible to improve interest in suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1' to A3', wherein the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A9', since the specific condition can be established when the specific region passes, the player can easily recognize that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to further enjoy whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. The display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
Further provided with a discharge port (373) for discharging to the back side of the game board (31) on which the game balls are launched,
The gaming machine according to appendix A9′, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix A11']
Further provided with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls.
The discharge port (373) is a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). A second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10′, wherein the specific region is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The second discharge port (373) can enter the ball in the special game, the gaming machine described in Appendix A11'.

In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes A10' to supplementary notes A12', the identification displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the second discharge port into which the game ball can enter in the special game. The display content of information is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game is apt to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the game performance by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A12', wherein the second discharge port (373) can pass a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A13′, when the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second discharge port through which the gaming ball entered in the variable winning port can pass in the special game, the display means The display content of the specific information displayed in is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed to the second discharge port by launching the game ball in the game area and winning the game ball in the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by advancing the game in the special game as usual. As a result, compared to a case where a skill difference may occur due to the game ball entering the second outlet, a game difference may occur, so that it is avoided to play a game in the game machine. To be prevented.

[Appendix A14']
A game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) can pass through, and the third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373),
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378),
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13′, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A14′, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution unit, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution unit whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The playability of playing is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the distribution means as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. The gaming machine according to any one of the supplementary notes A1′ to A3′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the start is set for the special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state, and is described in Appendix A15'. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16′, the transition determination result is special in the first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period has a lower probability that the transition determining means determines to transition to the special gaming state than the second gaming state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to the game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, specific numerical value information and thus specific numerical value information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The start point of the predetermined period is set between the start point of the special game and the start point of the value-adding game, the gaming machine according to Appendix A15' or Appendix A16'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A17′, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, so at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15' to A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18', the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. A gaming machine described in appendix A18'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number increases as the number of transitions to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of a single shot, and the more the number of villas per consortium, the more likely the number of times of satisfying the specific condition will be. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information. The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A18' or supplementary note A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20′, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, so that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with good time efficiency.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1' to A3', wherein the specified period is set to an execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information when the specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during the specified period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy the identification of the specific numerical value information and the estimation or the identification of the predetermined numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game. The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22']
The special game includes a value-adding game (opening and closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game (opening and closing execution mode) is finished. Have,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21′, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note A22′, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix A23']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information (numerical value) indicating at least the specific numerical value information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A21′ or supplementary note A22′, wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23', when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. You can As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A23'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24′, the start of the predetermined period is a special game executed in the special game state, which is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. Is set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is changed to the first game state after the end of the specific game. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the long-distance play. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first hit as a trigger, the end of the special game executed last is set, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to provide the game playability of effectively presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. Further, in the case of per-village, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied per per-village after a lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of specific information in a short period after a predetermined period has elapsed, and therefore, based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. The convenience in identifying or guessing is improved.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set in the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the lapse of the specific period,
Appendix A23' or Appendix, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. A game machine described in A24'.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note A25' includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when a special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as per condominium, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Further, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specified periods within the specified period, it is determined whether the specified conditions are met for each specified period, and if the specified conditions are met during the specified period, the specified period is specified. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game and to focus on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied. Can be improved.

[Appendix A26']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The specific period includes a period in which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25′, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26′, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending executed from. Therefore, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the value-adding game, and to focus on the content of the specific information in the ending after the end of the value-adding game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively used to provide the game property for displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific region (373), and the display lottery to be executed when the game ball passes through the specific region (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21′ to A26′, characterized in that the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By thus performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, whether or not the player has won the display lottery when the game ball passes through the specific area (whether the specific information is displayed or not). It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (), so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, when the display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level or the variation (the difficulty level or the variation for displaying the specific information) satisfying the specific condition. As a result, it is possible to impart various game characteristics to the display of the specific information, depending on the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery system, and the like.

[Appendix A28']
The display control unit (51) causes the display unit (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1' to A3', characterized by displaying.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28', when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display unit displays the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. As a result, the player can guess the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical value information by displaying all the specific numerical value information. it can. Further, it is possible to recognize the predetermined numerical value information by specifying all the specific numerical value information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific condition that is satisfied while expecting that the specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period in large numbers. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A29', the display means is the information display means. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the specific information based on the display content of the display means. As a result, the player can easily understand the specific information, and thus it is also easy to specify or infer the specific numerical value information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display the number of pieces of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A game machine described in A29'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30', the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display unit has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical value information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to add a game property in which it is possible to adjust the difficulty of specifying or inferring the specific numerical value information depending on which information of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix A31']
In each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G), the individual information in the corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed, and the gaming machine according to supplementary note A30'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A31′, since individual information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the specific numerical value information is specified or estimated based on the corresponding relationship. It will be possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical value information while looking forward to which individual information of the plurality of individual information is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A32']
The information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas, the gaming machine described in Appendix A30' or Appendix A31'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A32', the information display unit has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase of the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33']
The information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information, the gaming machine described in Appendix A30' or Appendix A31'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A33', since it is possible to display the specific image of the specific numerical information that can be specified or estimated on the information display means, there are many options of the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or estimated in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. As a result, the playability for identifying or estimating the specific numerical value information is improved.

[Appendix A34']
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A34', the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas,
The specific information is a number or an alphabet, and the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A29′ to A34′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A35', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, since all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, it is easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and to specify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy the guess.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays on the individual display section (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical value information of the plurality of types of numerical value information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A29′, wherein the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A36', the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plural types of numerical information. That is, the individual display unit for displaying the specific information is defined for each specific numerical value information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical value information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix A37']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display sections (351 to 356) in one of two modes, a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine described in appendix A36'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A37', the individual display unit is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical value information can be easily specified according to the mode of the individual display unit. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A36' or supplementary note A37', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36' to A38', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A38' and supplementary note A39', it becomes possible to easily and inexpensively form the information display means.

[Appendix A40']
Display order determining means (51) for determining a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further equipped with,
The display control means (51) is configured to display the display means (51) based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. 35, 39, 341) is displayed the specific information, the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A40', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed by determining the display order of displaying the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the same specific information can be prevented from being repeatedly displayed, and the display of the specific information can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine described in appendix A40′, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine, and thus the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days and from monotonizing the display of the specific information.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical value information (setting value) is stored in the numerical value information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A42', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical value information, so that it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A40′, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A43', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A44', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the special game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A45', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
Display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby state period) different from the specified period. An operation means (21) operated by a player,
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341) for displaying the second display control means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A46', the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means in a special period different from the specified period. Thus, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display unit by operating the operation unit in the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to confirm the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if he/she forgets the display content, or if the player has changed, etc., he/she should confirm the display content during the special period. You can As a result, the player can identify or infer the specific numerical value information by checking the display content in the specified period in the special period, and whether or not to play the game in the game machine according to the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether.

[Appendix A47']
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A47', the special period during which the display content can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully take the time to check the display content at his/her own pace without being restricted by time, and determine whether or not to play the game on the game machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods that are different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) in the special period. At least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341), the gaming machine according to Appendix A46' or Appendix A47'.

[Appendix A49']
The display content display control means (51) performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine described in Appendix A48', wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50']
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) in the special period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A49', wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A48' to supplementary note A50', at least one of the display contents of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of prescribed periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display content selected by the player from the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented to the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the display content desired by the player can be confirmed by the player's intention. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively confirm the display content while avoiding confirmation of the display content such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information, and thus it is possible to efficiently confirm the display content. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, a large number of display contents can be confirmed at one time, so that the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of notes A46' to A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A51′, wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for variably displaying a design (decorative design) that suggests or clearly shows the result of the shift determination. ..

The gaming machines according to supplementary note A51' and supplementary note A52' are provided with a first display means displayed during the prescribed period and a second display means displayed during the special period, and different displays are provided during the prescribed period and the special period. The specific information is displayed by the means. Therefore, during the specified period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display unit, it is possible to prevent the display from being disturbed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented by the second display unit such as the variable display image display unit in which the symbols are variably displayed. In general, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, the visibility is improved when the variable display image display means is presented with the display content of the specific information in the specified period. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented to the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period is variably displayed by an operation similar to the operation for making various settings. It is possible to present it on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A8'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A53', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A53', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A54', when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note A54′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix A55']
A display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
The display order selecting means (51) further comprises a selection display order storing means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selecting means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A53′ characterized by being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A55′, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. .. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A56']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A56', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the prescribed period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A56′, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A57', it is possible to make it easy to select a specific display order and make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where the probabilities that all display orders are selected are the same, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. Will also be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the possibility that the set value is high and the possibility that the set value is low.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders are the first display having the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including order,
The probability that the first display order is selected by the display order selection means (51) (selection rate) is set to be higher (including 100%) than the display orders other than the first display order. A gaming machine described in Appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A58', the first display having the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. The order is easy to select. That is, except for the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information, the specific information having the lowest advantage determination probability and the most disadvantageous specific numerical value information for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most unfavorable to the player is displayed last, and until the last specific information is displayed, the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player and more advantageous to the player than that The possibility of an advantage determination probability remains. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine from being ended early, and to improve the operating rate of the game machine. The decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical value information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with the highest probability,
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority order of the first identification information and the second identification information is the lower two.
The probability that the second display order is selected by the display order selection means (51) (selection rate) is set higher (including 100%) than the display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A59′, the second display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low Is easy to select. Therefore, like the gaming machine according to supplementary note A58', it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most advantageous advantage determination probability for the player, and the game on the gaming machine ends early. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the highest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand not only the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player but also the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the priority of the two pieces of specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, so that the advantage is conflicting with the player. Since it is difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities to perform until the end, it is possible to improve interest in the specific information displayed on the display unit.

[Appendix A60']
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. A third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a probability lower than the probability,
The third display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A60′, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the higher probability than the first advantage determination probability has the lower advantage probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to, is set to be high. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible for the player to have a higher advantage determination probability than the actual first advantage determination probability up to immediately before grasping the first advantage determination probability. You can expect it. Thus, until the first advantage determination probability is grasped, it is possible to infer the specific information (predetermined information) while enjoying the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high.

[Appendix A61']
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. Including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the probability,
The fourth display order is set (including 100%) to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A61′, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability whose probability is lower than the first advantage determination probability is higher than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to, is set to be high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower than the first advantage determination probability is obtained immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate of the first advantage determination probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantage determination probability and the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. As a result, finally, the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the player's advantageous first advantageous judgment probability is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the set value is grasped. The joy of is improved.

[Appendix A62']
Additional notes A1′ to A3, further comprising a display restricting means (51) for restricting the display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a period other than the specified period. A gaming machine described in any of'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A62', display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted during the period other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played the game that satisfies the specific condition for displaying the specific information. This can prevent another player from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix A63']
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A62', wherein the period other than the specified period is a period in a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A63', the display of the specific information is restricted during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of the player is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by limiting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player, and identifies or estimates the specific numerical value information. It is possible to more reliably prevent acquisition of specific information for.

[Appendix A64']
The display restricting means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A62' or Appendix A63'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A64', the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display history of the past specific information is also displayed outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, and therefore another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player based on the display history and identifies the specific numerical value information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for inferring.

[Appendix A65']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. When the second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) are displayed in the first display order different from the first display order by the display unit (35, 39, 341) is displayed, the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A65′, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed when the second specific condition is satisfied. The specific information (numerical value) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that holds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical value information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from early understanding that the advantage determination probability is low when the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even when the advantage determination probability is low, it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine from being terminated early, and to prevent the operating rate of the game machine from decreasing.

[Appendix A66']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical value information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is the numerical value information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A65', characterized in that the gaming machine is stored in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A66', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means, and the second specific condition is stored in the numerical value information storage means as the second predetermined value information. Including that numerical information is stored. That is, the type of the specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical value information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical value information, and the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix A67']
When one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selection means (51) for
The display order selecting means (51) further comprises a selection display order storing means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selecting means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A65' or supplementary note A66' characterized by displaying.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A67′, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. .. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A68']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A68', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the prescribed period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix A69']
A second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (number) indicating the predetermined numerical value information on the second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1′ to A3′, wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in (45). That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical information is provided in a position visible to the player during a specified period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and the specific numerical value information can be displayed to recognize the predetermined numerical value information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, so that the predetermined value is given to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the game hall side can grasp the predetermined information. Thereby, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical value information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during the non-business hours, and when the predetermined numerical value information is changed, the predetermined numerical value information after the change. Since it is possible to confirm the predetermined information indicating the, the operation of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70']
A game board (31) on which game balls are launched is further provided,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A70', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the rear surface of the game board. It is displayed on the second display means provided on the side. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is openably and closably fixed to the frame body (12),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A71', the second display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board which is fixed to the frame body so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player by closing the game board, while the predetermined information displayed on the second display means by opening the game board. Can be confirmed at the game hall side. This makes it possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is limited by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41) is
Control is possible between a display state in which the predetermined numerical value information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
When the first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the non-display state is controlled to the display state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A70′ or supplementary note A71′, which controls the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A72′, a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed are operated by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means. It can be surely prevented from being grasped by.

[Appendix B1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is indicated. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1', since the specific condition can be established when the specific region passes through, the player can easily recognize that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to further enjoy whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. The display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to be progressed inorganically, by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, it becomes possible to improve the game playability.

[Appendix B2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix B1′, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix B3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix B1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B2' or supplementary note B3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4']
Further provided with a discharge port (373) for discharging to the back side of the game board (31) on which the game balls are launched,
The specific region is the discharge port (373), the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1′ to B3′.

[Appendix B5']
Further provided with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls.
The discharge port (373) is a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). A second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to Appendix B4′, wherein the specific region is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The game machine according to Note B5′, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes B4′ to supplementary note B6′, the identification displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the second discharge port into which the ball can enter in the special game. The display content of information is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game is apt to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the game performance by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
The game machine according to Appendix B6′, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of passing a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B7′, when the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second outlet through which the gaming ball entered in the variable winning port can pass in the special game, the display means The display content of the specific information displayed in is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed to the second discharge port by launching the game ball in the game area and winning the game ball in the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by advancing the game in the special game as usual. As a result, compared to a case where a skill difference may occur due to the game ball entering the second outlet, a game difference may occur, so that it is avoided to play a game in the game machine. To be prevented.

[Appendix B8']
A game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) can pass through, and the third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373),
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378),
The gaming machine according to Appendix B7′, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B8′, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution unit, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution unit whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The playability of playing is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the distribution means as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1′ to B8′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix B9', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B10', when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note B10′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix C1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period when the specific condition is satisfied, in the specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the predetermined numerical value information of the plurality of types of numerical value information Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerical value) indicating specific numerical value information (non-set value) other than
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the start is set for the special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the identification of the specific numerical value information, and by extension, the estimation or the identification of the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of kinds of numerical value information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in appendix C1′, which can be displayed on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3']
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of the numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of kinds of numerical information during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix C1', which can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2′ or supplementary note C3′, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not show the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information that shows a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of C3'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4', the transition determination result is special in the first gaming state in which the start of the predetermined period has a lower probability that the transition determining means determines to transition to the special gaming state than the second gaming state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to the game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, specific numerical value information and thus specific numerical value information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1′ to C4′, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C5′, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1′ to C5′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6', the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix C7']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in Appendix C6′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number increases as the number of transitions to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of a single shot, and the more the number of villas per consortium, the more likely the number of times of satisfying the specific condition will be. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information. The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix C8']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C6′ or supplementary note C7′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note C8′, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with good time efficiency.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C8'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix C9', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C10', when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note C10′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix D1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is indicated. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A game machine characterized in that the specified period is set to an execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D1', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information when the specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during the specified period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy the identification of the specific numerical value information and the estimation or the identification of the predetermined numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game. The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of kinds of numerical value information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in Appendix D1′, which can be displayed on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3']
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of the numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of kinds of numerical information during the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1′, which can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D2' or supplementary note D3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix D4']
The special game includes a value-adding game (opening and closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game (opening and closing execution mode) is finished. Have,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1′ to D3′, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note D4′, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix D5']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information (numerical value) indicating at least the specific numerical value information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1' to D4', wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D5', when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. You can As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in Appendix D5′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D6′, the start of the predetermined period is a special game executed in the special game state, which is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. Is set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is changed to the first game state after the end of the specific game. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the long-distance play. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first hit as a trigger, the end of the special game executed last is set, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to provide the game playability of effectively presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. Further, in the case of per-village, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied per per-village after a lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of specific information in a short period after a predetermined period has elapsed, and therefore, based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. The convenience in identifying or guessing is improved.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set in the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the lapse of the specific period,
Appendix D5' or Appendix, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The game machine described in D6'.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note D7' includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when a special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as per condominium, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Further, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specified periods within the specified period, it is determined whether the specified conditions are met for each specified period, and if the specified conditions are met during the specified period, the specified period is specified. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game and to focus on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied. Can be improved.

[Appendix D8']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The specific period includes a period in which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D7′, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D8′, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending executed from. Therefore, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the value-adding game, and to focus on the content of the specific information in the ending after the end of the value-adding game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively used to provide the game property for displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific region (373), and the display lottery to be executed when the game ball passes through the specific region (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1' to D8', wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By thus performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, whether or not the player has won the display lottery when the game ball passes through the specific area (whether the specific information is displayed or not). It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (), so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, when the display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level or the variation (the difficulty level or the variation for displaying the specific information) satisfying the specific condition. As a result, it is possible to impart various game characteristics to the display of the specific information, depending on the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery system, and the like.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes D1′ to D9′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix D10', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D11', when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the specified display order during the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note D11′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as the highest set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix E1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the plurality of types of numerical information Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (number) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information.
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1', when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display unit displays the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can infer the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical value information by displaying all the specific information. .. Further, it is possible to recognize the predetermined numerical value information by specifying all the specific numerical value information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since the special specification information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the number of specific conditions satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game focusing on.

[Appendix E2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix E1', which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix E3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2′ or supplementary note E3′, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not show the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information that shows a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix E4']
The display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information, and any one of supplementary notes E1′ to E3′ is provided. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E4', the display means is the information display means. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the specific information based on the display content of the display means. As a result, the player can easily understand the specific information, and thus it is also easy to specify or infer the specific numerical value information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display the number of pieces of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A game machine described in E4'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5', the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display unit has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical value information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to add a game property in which it is possible to adjust the difficulty of specifying or inferring the specific numerical value information depending on which information of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E5′, wherein the individual information in the corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6′, since individual information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the specific numerical value information is specified or estimated based on the corresponding relationship. It will be possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical value information while looking forward to which individual information of the plurality of individual information is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display unit (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E7', the information display unit has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase of the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display unit (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E8', since it is possible to display the specific image in which the specific numerical information can be specified or estimated on the information display means, there are many options of the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or estimated in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. As a result, the playability for identifying or estimating the specific numerical value information is improved.

[Appendix E9']
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the shift determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E9', the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the symbol that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas,
The specific information is a number or an alphabet, and the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E5' to E9'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E10', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, since all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, it is easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and to specify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy the guess.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays on the individual display section (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical value information of the plurality of types of numerical value information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in Appendix E4', wherein the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E11', the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, the individual display unit for displaying the specific information is defined for each specific numerical value information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical value information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix E12']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display sections (351 to 356) in one of two modes, a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine described in appendix E11'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E12', the individual display unit is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical value information can be easily specified according to the mode of the individual display unit. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E11′ or supplementary note E12′, wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E13' and supplementary note E14', it becomes possible to form the information display means easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of notes E1' to E14'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E15', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the start is set for the special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state, which is set forth in Appendix E15'. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E16′, the transition determination result is special in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to the game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The starting point of the predetermined period is set between the start point of the special game and the start point of the value-adding game, the gaming machine described in appendix E15' or E16'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E17′, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix E18']
The end of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E15' to E17'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E18', the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in appendix E18'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number increases as the number of transitions to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of a single shot, and the more the number of villas per consortium, the more likely the number of times of satisfying the specific condition will be. Become. As a result, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired more as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also more specific information for specifying the specific numerical information, and the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. Can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix E20']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E18' or supplementary note E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note E20′, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with good time efficiency.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes E1' to E20'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E21', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix E21′, which is characterized by being displayed on.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E22', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note E22′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as the highest set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix F1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least specific numeric information other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information (non-set value) Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (number) indicating
Display order determining means (51) for determining a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) is configured to display the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Display the specific information at (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed by determining the display order of displaying the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the same specific information can be prevented from being repeatedly displayed, and the display of the specific information can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix F1′, which is characterized in that there is.

[Appendix F3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2′ or Supplementary Note F3′, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not show the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information that shows a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine, and thus the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days and from monotonizing the display of the specific information.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41). ..

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical value information, so that it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the special game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that the same specific information is repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
A display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
Further equipped with,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1' to F8', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9′, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. .. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix F10']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix F11']
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of notes F1' to F10'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F11', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, and is described in Appendix F11'. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12′, the transition determination result is special in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be transitioned to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to the game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The starting point of the predetermined period is set between the start point of the special game and the start point of the value-adding game, the gaming machine according to Appendix F11' or Appendix F12'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F13′, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14', the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix F15']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. A gaming machine described in Appendix F14′.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number increases as the number of transitions to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of a single shot, and the more the number of villas per consortium, the more likely the number of times of satisfying the specific condition will be. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information. The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix F16']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14′ or Supplementary Note F15′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16′, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with good time efficiency.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1′ to F16′.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F17', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F17', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F18', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in the display means in the specified display period in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F18′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high setting value such as a maximum setting value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix G1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is indicated. First display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the first display means (35, 39, 341),
Display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby state period) different from the specified period. An operation means (21) operated by a player,
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341) for displaying the second display control means (51),
Equipped with
The predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means during a special period different from the specified period. Thus, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display unit by operating the operation unit in the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to confirm the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if he/she forgets the display content, or if the player has changed, etc., he/she should confirm the display content during the special period. You can As a result, the player can identify or infer the specific numerical value information by checking the display content in the specified period in the special period, and whether or not to play the game in the game machine according to the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether.

[Appendix G2']
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', which is possible.

[Appendix G3']
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', which is capable of being.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2' or supplementary note G3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. To be done. Thus, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also when the special information is displayed on the first display means. It is possible to infer specific numerical information based on the special information. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix G4']
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4', the special period during which the display content can be confirmed in the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully take the time to check the display content at his/her own pace without being restricted by time, and determine whether or not to play the game on the game machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods that are different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) in the special period. At least one of the display contents of the display information of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341), the game according to any one of supplementary notes G1' to G4'. Machine.

[Appendix G6']
The display content display control means (51) performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G5', wherein the display content selected thereby is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7']
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) in the special period. The gaming machine described in appendix G5', characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5' to supplementary note G7', at least one of the display contents of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of prescribed periods can be displayed on the second display means. For example, the display content selected by the player from the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented to the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the display content desired by the player can be confirmed by the player's intention. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively confirm the display content while avoiding confirmation of the display content such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information, and thus it is possible to efficiently confirm the display content. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, a large number of display contents can be confirmed at one time, so that the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G8', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for variably displaying a design (decorative design) that suggests or clearly shows the result of the shift determination. ..

The gaming machines according to supplementary note G8' and supplementary note G9' are provided with a first display means displayed during a prescribed period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and different displays are provided during the prescribed period and the special period. The specific information is displayed by the means. Therefore, during the specified period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display unit, it is possible to prevent the display from being disturbed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented by the second display unit such as the variable display image display unit in which the symbols are variably displayed. In general, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, the visibility is improved when the variable display image display means is presented with the display content of the specific information in the specified period. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented to the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period is variably displayed by an operation similar to the operation for making various settings. It is possible to present it on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1′ to G9′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G10', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G11', when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the specified display order in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note G11′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high setting value such as a maximum setting value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix H1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a specific condition is met during a predetermined period, at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-specified) other than the predetermined numerical information of at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display a plurality of pieces of specific information (numerical values) indicating set values, respectively, in a distinguishable manner
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1′, which is characterized in that there is.

[Appendix H3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix H1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H2' or supplementary note H3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix H4']
A display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
The display order selecting means (51) further comprises a selection display order storing means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selecting means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1' to H3', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H4′, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. .. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H5']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4′, wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H5′, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders in which the probabilities (selection rates) selected by the display order selection means (51) are different.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H6', it is possible to make it easy to select a specific display order and make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where the probabilities that all display orders are selected are the same, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. Will also be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the possibility that the set value is high and the possibility that the set value is low.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders are the first display having the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including order,
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7′, the first display having the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information The order is easy to select. That is, except for the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information, the specific information having the lowest advantage determination probability and the most disadvantageous specific numerical value information for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most unfavorable to the player is displayed last, and until the last specific information is displayed, the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player and more advantageous to the player than that The possibility of an advantage determination probability remains. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine from being ended early, and to improve the operating rate of the game machine. The decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical value information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with the highest probability,
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority order of the first identification information and the second identification information is the lower two.
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8′, the second display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low Is easy to select. Therefore, like the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6′, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most advantageous advantage determination probability for the player, and the game on the gaming machine ends early. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the highest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand not only the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player but also the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the priority of the two pieces of specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, so that the advantage is conflicting with the player. Since it is difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities to perform until the end, it is possible to improve interest in the specific information displayed on the display unit.

[Appendix H9']
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. A third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a probability lower than the probability,
The third display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H9′, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the higher probability than the first advantage determination probability has the lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to, is set to be high. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible for the player to have a higher advantage determination probability than the actual first advantage determination probability up to immediately before grasping the first advantage determination probability. You can expect it. Thus, until the first advantage determination probability is grasped, it is possible to infer the specific information (predetermined information) while enjoying the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high.

[Appendix H10']
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. Including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the probability,
The fourth display order is set (including 100%) to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10′, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability whose probability is lower than the first advantage determination probability is higher than the first advantage determination probability. The selection ratio of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to, is set to be high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower than the first advantage determination probability is obtained immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate of the first advantage determination probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantage determination probability and the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. As a result, finally, the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the player's advantageous first advantageous judgment probability is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the set value is grasped. The joy of is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of notes H1' to H10'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H11', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the start is set for the special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game, which is characterized in Appendix H11'. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H12′, the transition determination result is special in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be transitioned to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to the game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, specific numerical value information and thus specific numerical value information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H11′ or supplementary note H12′, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H13′, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H11' to H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H14', the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in Appendix H14′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number increases as the number of transitions to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of a single shot, and the more the number of villas per consortium, the more likely the number of times of satisfying the specific condition will be. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information. The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H14′ or supplementary note H15′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note H16′, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with good time efficiency.

[Appendix H17']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes H1' to H15', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H17', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in the display means in the specified display period in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note H17′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix I1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is indicated. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
A display limiting unit (51) for limiting the display of the specific information on the display unit (35, 39, 341) in a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1', the display of the specific information on the display unit is restricted during the period other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played the game that satisfies the specific condition for displaying the specific information. This can prevent another player from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix I2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix I1', which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix I3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix I1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2′ or supplementary note I3′, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix I4']
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1′ to I3′, wherein the period other than the specified period is a period in a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I4', the display of the specific information is restricted during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of the player is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by limiting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player, and identifies or estimates the specific numerical value information. It is possible to more reliably prevent acquisition of specific information for.

[Appendix I5']
The display restricting means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1′ to I4′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I5', the display of the specific information displayed in the past on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display history of the past specific information is also displayed outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, and therefore another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player based on the display history and identifies the specific numerical value information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for inferring.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1′ to I5′.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix I6′, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I7', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note I7′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix J1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to individually display a plurality of pieces of specific information (numerical values) indicating a plurality of pieces of specific numerical information (non-setting values) other than the predetermined numerical value information Means (51),
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and When the second specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numerals) are displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1′, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed when the second specific condition is satisfied. The specific information (numerical value) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that holds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical value information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from early understanding that the advantage determination probability is low when the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even when the advantage determination probability is low, it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine from being terminated early, and to prevent the operating rate of the game machine from decreasing.

[Appendix J2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1', which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix J3']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix J1', which is possible.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J2' or supplementary note J3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. .. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix J4']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical value information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is the numerical value information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1' to J3', characterized in that the gaming machine is stored in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J4', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means, and the second specific condition is stored in the numerical value information storage means as the second predetermined value. Including that numerical information is stored. That is, the type of the specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical value information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical value information, and according to the display order, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix J5']
When one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selection means (51) for
The display order selecting means (51) further comprises a selection display order storing means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selecting means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1' to J4' characterized by displaying.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information. .. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix J6']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix J7']
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J7', the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, and is described in Appendix J7'. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8', the transition determination result is special in the first gaming state in which the probability of the start of the predetermined period being determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to the game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The start point of the predetermined period is set between the start point of the special game and the start point of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J9′, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10', the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. (Normal jackpot),
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. Including a second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state) to be transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10'.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed to the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number increases as the number of transitions to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of a single shot, and the more the number of villas per consortium, the more likely the number of times of satisfying the specific condition will be. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating the specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information. The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix J12']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note J10′ or supplementary note J11′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J12′, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, so that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. By using the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game with good time efficiency.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1' to J12'.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J13', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to supplementary note J13', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J14', when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in the display means in the specified display period in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note J14′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix K1']
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is indicated. First display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the first display means (35, 39, 341),
Second display control means (41) for causing the second display means (45) to display predetermined information (number) indicating the predetermined numerical value information,
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in (45). That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical information is provided in a position visible to the player during a specified period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and the specific numerical value information can be displayed to recognize the predetermined numerical value information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, so that the predetermined value is given to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the game hall side can grasp the predetermined information. Thereby, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical value information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during the non-business hours, and when the predetermined numerical value information is changed, the predetermined numerical value information after the change. Since it is possible to confirm the predetermined information indicating the, the operation of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2']
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix K1', which is capable of being.

[Appendix K3']
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix K1', which is capable of being.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K2' or supplementary note K3', not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. To be done. This allows the player to specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, and also to specify the specific numerical information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, it is possible to guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix K4']
A game board (31) on which game balls are launched is further provided,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K4', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is on the rear surface of the game board. It is displayed on the second display means provided on the side. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is openably and closably fixed to the frame body (12),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note K4′, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K5', the second display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board fixed to the frame body so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player by closing the game board, while the predetermined information displayed on the second display means by opening the game board. Can be confirmed at the game hall side. This makes it possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is limited by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41) is
Control is possible between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When the first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the non-display state is controlled to the display state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note K4' or supplementary note K5', wherein when the second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K6′, a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed are operated by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means. It can be surely prevented from being grasped by.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1′ to K6′.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K7', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the advantage determination probability is high or low. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix K7', characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K8', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

The gaming machine according to supplementary note K8′ is a conventional slot in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Not a machine.

[Appendix A1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is attached. An accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) for restricting the execution of the game effect,
A gaming machine characterized by having.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, execution of at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is limited when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future events are determined. To be done. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, execution of at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is restricted. Execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

[Appendix A2]
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event is determined, the at least one accompanying event The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, wherein the gaming effect is not executed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, at least one of the accompanying game effects is not executed when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future events are determined. In this way, since a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events are not executed, an accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future occurrence event in one notification game is executed. Is more suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A3]
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), when the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has been determined the plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests an event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. The gaming machine according to Appendix A2.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A3, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is explicitly or It is changed to another accompanying game effect with different suggested contents. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects has different contents of indication or suggestion. By changing to another accompanying game effect, it is further suppressed that the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is executed. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event. In addition, since the player can obtain more information by other accompanying game effects that are changed from at least one accompanying game effect, the player can guess a future event in the notification game. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A4]
The predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes an event different from the event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2 or Supplementary Note A3.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A4, the predetermined condition is that a future event that is different from the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means is a future event that occurs in the notification game. It is included. In this way, the future occurrence event in the informative game is to include a predetermined future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means, It is possible to restrict the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect by changing the at least one accompanying game effect to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the predetermined future event. In this way, by changing the at least one accompanying game effect to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the predetermined future event, the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means is explicitly or Information can be provided about new future events that are not suggested. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game based on the information newly obtained by increasing the amount of information obtained, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A5]
The predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2 or Supplementary Note A3.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A5, the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special gaming state. In this way, the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, and when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, the at least one accompanying game effect May be executed. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game effects including the same explicit or suggestive content are executed, the result of the shift determination may shift to the special game state. As a result, when a plurality of accompanying game effects including the same explicit or suggestive content are executed, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

[Appendix A6]
The supplementary game effect execution limiting means (51) has an execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute the at least one supplementary game effect by a lottery, A2 or A3. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A6, whether or not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect is determined by lottery. In this way, by determining by lottery whether or not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect, it is possible to give whether or not execution of the at least one accompanying game effect is restricted by the lottery. Further, depending on the probability that it is determined to limit the at least one accompanying game effect by lottery, it is possible to add variety to the limitation of the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect. As a result, it is possible to add variety to the game playability of the gaming machine, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A7]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) is a first determination result (normal jackpot) that is transitioned to the first gaming state after the notification game ends, and the second game after the notification game ends. Including the second determination result (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the state,
The determination probabilities that it is determined that the at least one accompanying game effect is not executed in the lottery by the execution lottery means (51) are the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result and the determination of the transition determination. The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, which is different from the case where the result is the second determination result.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game effect is determined not to be executed is the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player, and the result of the transition determination. Is different from the case where the second determination result is advantageous to the player. In this way, when the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game effect is determined not to be executed is the first determination result that is unfavorable to the player, and the result of the transition determination is to the player. Since it is different from the case where the advantageous second determination result is obtained, it is possible to provide the game property that the future occurrence event can be estimated based on the set determination probability, so that the interest of the game is improved. For example, by setting the determination probability according to the result of the transition determination, the game playability of which the result of the transition determination can be estimated, that is, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be the one in the special gaming state ( It is possible to add a game property that can be estimated with respect to reliability.

[Appendix A8]
The determination probability is higher in the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result than in the case where the result of the transition determination is the second determination result. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A8, when the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game effect is not executed is the first determination result that is unfavorable to the player, the transition determination is The result is higher than when the result is the second determination result that is advantageous to the player. Thus, the determination probability is higher when the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player than when the result of the transition determination is the second determination result that is advantageous to the player. Then, by executing the at least one accompanying game effect, a game property is provided in which the degree of expectation (reliability) that the result of the transition determination is that of transitioning to the special game state is high.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, wherein the future-occurring event is an event relating to an effect executed as a part of the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A9, a future event is an event relating to an effect executed as part of the main game effect. In this way, since the event that occurs in the future is an event related to the effect executed as a part of the main game effect, it is possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game effect that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from the future event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A10]
The game machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the effect executed as part of the main game effect is a development effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect, it is possible to prevent the development effect destination executed in the main game effect from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of development effect executed in (3) is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A10, wherein the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect related to a result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A11, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect, it is prevented that the effect related to the result of the transition determination is repeatedly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the repeated indication or suggestion of the effect regarding the result of the transition determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix A12]
The effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. Gaming machine described in.

[Appendix A13]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The effect that is executed as part of the main game effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the second special game state. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A11 and Supplementary Note A12, the production executed as a part of the main game production is a production that notifies that the result of the transition determination by the main game production is a transition to the special game state. In this way, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination by the main game effect is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the main game effect is executed. It is prevented that the development effect destination to be repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented, and thus the occurrence of discomfort due to the effect of the transition determination executed in the main game effect being repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result of the same transition determination being explicitly or suggested.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes A10 to A13, wherein the rendering executed as part of the main game rendering is a pseudo linked rendering.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A14, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect, it is prevented that the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect is repeatedly indicated or suggested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix A15]
When executing the accompanying game effect, the sub-control means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. Further has a judging means (51) for judging whether or not
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A14, characterized in that execution of the associated game effect is restricted.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the associated game effects Limited execution. In this way, at the stage of executing the accompanying game effect, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have already been executed, the execution of the accompanying game effect is limited. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future occurrence event from being executed in one notification game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

[Appendix A16]
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. The game machine according to Appendix A15, wherein the attendant game effect is not executed when the predetermined condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are already executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the accompanying game effects are Not executed In this way, at the stage of executing the accompanying game effect, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have already been executed, the accompanying game effect is not executed. It is further suppressed that an accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event is executed in one notification game. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A17]
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. When the predetermined condition is met, the supplementary note A16 is executed by changing to another associated game effect that explicitly or suggests an event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the associated game effect. Gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the accompanying game effects are It is executed by changing to another accompanying game effect having a different explicit or suggested content. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are already executed at the stage of executing the general accompanying game effect, the accompanying game effect is explicitly or By changing to another accompanying game effect having a different suggestion content and being executed, it is further suppressed that the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is executed. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event. In addition, since the player can obtain more information by other accompanying game effects that are changed from at least one accompanying game effect, the player can guess a future event in the notification game. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A18]
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. The game machine according to Appendix A16, further comprising an execution determination means (51) that determines by lottery whether or not to execute the associated game effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are already executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the associated game effects are generated. Whether to execute or not is determined by lottery. In this way, at the stage of executing the accompanying game effect, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed, whether or not to execute the accompanying game effect. By determining whether or not the accompanying game effect is to be executed, it is possible to give the game playability in which it is possible to infer a specific future event based on the setting of the lottery probability of whether or not to execute the accompanying game effect, so that the interest of the game is improved. .. For example, by setting the above-mentioned lottery probability according to the result of the transition determination, the playability in which the result of the transition determination can be estimated, that is, the expectation (reliability) of transition of the result of the transition determination to the special gaming state is estimated. Possible gameplay can be added.

[Appendix A19]
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event is determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A18, characterized in that execution of at least one supplementary game demonstration of the plurality of supplementary game demonstrations is restricted before the notification game demonstration is started.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events are determined, before the notification game effect is started, among the plurality of accompanying game effects Execution of at least one accompanying game effect is restricted. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one of the accompanying game effects is executed, and the notification game effect is By being restricted before being started, it is possible to prevent the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event from being performed in one notification game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

[Appendix A20]
The supplementary game effect execution limiting means (51) has a re-determination means (51) for re-determining the at least one accompanying game effect before the notification game effect is started. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future events are determined, before the notification game effect starts, among the plurality of accompanying game effects. Of at least one accompanying game effect is reset. In this way, a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events are re-determined, so that an accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future occurrence event is executed in one notification game. Is suppressed more. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix A21]
The re-determination means (51) specifies the at least one accompanying game effect, the at least one accompanying game effect, and an event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, wherein the gaming machine is re-determined as another suggested accompanying game effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A21, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event have been determined, of the plurality of accompanying game effects before the notification game effect is started. Of at least one accompanying game effect is re-determined as another accompanying game effect having a different explicit or suggested content. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects has different contents of indication or suggestion. By being re-determined to another accompanying game effect, it is further suppressed that the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is executed. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event. In addition, since the player can obtain more information by other accompanying game effects that are changed from at least one accompanying game effect, the player can guess a future event in the notification game. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22]
The future event includes a plurality of events having different advantages to the player,
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event is determined, the at least one accompanying game effect, at least 1 From the supplementary note A1 characterized in that, instead of the future event that is explicitly or suggested by one accompanying game effect, another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the future event that is advantageous to the player is changed and executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A21.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, the at least one accompanying game effect explicitly indicates or suggests a future event that is more advantageous to the player than a future event that is explicitly or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. By changing to the accompanying game effect of, the player can understand that it is in an advantageous state based on a future occurrence event that is explicitly or suggested by another accompanying game effect, so that the player is interested in the progress of the game. It is improved and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A23]
The future occurrence event is an indication or suggestion of the degree of expectation that the result of the shift determination by the main control means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the advantage to the player in the future event is the degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A23, a future occurrence event is an indication or suggestion of the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is that the result of transition determination will be that of transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the at least one incidental game effect is caused by the other incidents by the future occurrence event clearly or suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to be transited to the special game state. When the game effect is changed, the content of the indication or suggestion is stepped up (ranked). This is expected to be in a more advantageous state, so that the progress of the game can be enjoyed more and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A24]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game effect is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the first special game,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, wherein the other accompanying game effect is an indication or an indication that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24, the at least one accompanying game effect is an indication or suggestion that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the first special game, and the other accompanying game effect is , It is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the second special game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby further playing the game. It is explicitly indicated or suggested that the player is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the indication or suggestion in the accompanying game effect are stepped up (ranked). In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, A player is grasped or inferred to be in an advantageous state by being explicitly or suggested that it is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the indication or suggestion in the accompanying game production are stepped up (ranked). Therefore, in the subsequent progress of the game, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix A25]
The future event includes a plurality of events having commonality and different specificities,
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event is determined, the at least one accompanying game effect, at least 1 Supplementary note A1 characterized in that, in addition to the future event that is explicitly or suggested by one accompanying game effect, another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the future event that is more specific is changed and executed. The gaming machine according to any one of A24.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A25, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is at least the above-mentioned. By changing another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests a more specific future event than the future event that is explicitly or suggested by one accompanying game effect, it is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. The contents are made concrete (detailed). Thereby, the player can obtain more detailed information for inferring a future event based on the future event explicitly or suggested by another accompanying game effect, and therefore, based on this detailed information. The progress of the game can be enjoyed more and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A26]
Note that the plurality of events included in the future-occurring event have different degrees of expectation that the result of the shift determination by the main control means (41) is a shift to the special gaming state. A game machine described in A25.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26, a plurality of events included in future events have different degrees of expectation that the result of the transition determination is that the result is a special gaming state. In this way, a plurality of events included in future occurrence events are different in the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state, and based on the other accompanying game effect after the change. Thus, it is possible to obtain information on a more specific expectation that the result of the shift determination is that the game is to be shifted to the special game state. As a result, it is possible to further enjoy the progress of the game while inferring the possibility that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state based on the more specific information regarding the degree of expectation, The interest is improved.

[Appendix A27]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game effect is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the first special game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A26, wherein the other accompanying game effect is an indication or an indication that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the second special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27, the at least one accompanying game effect is an indication or an indication that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the first special game, and the other accompanying game effect is , It is intended to clearly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the second special game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby further playing the game. It is explicitly or suggested that the person is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the indication or suggestion in the accompanying game effect are detailed. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, Since it is explicitly or suggested that the player is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the explicit or suggestion in the accompanying game production are detailed, the player can grasp or infer that it is in an advantageous state. In the progress of the game, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix B1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is attached. An accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) for restricting the execution of the game effect,
When executing the accompanying game effect, the determination means for determining whether or not the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect is already executed. (51),
Have
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. In addition, the game machine characterized by limiting the execution of the accompanying game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are already executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the associated game effects Limited execution. In this way, at the stage of executing the accompanying game effect, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have already been executed, the execution of the accompanying game effect is limited. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future occurrence event from being executed in one notification game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

[Appendix B2]
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. The game machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the accompanying game effect is not executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the accompanying game effects are Not executed In this way, at the stage of executing the accompanying game effect, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have already been executed, the accompanying game effect is not executed. It is further suppressed that an accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event is executed in one notification game. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix B3]
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the supplementary note B2 is executed by changing to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests an event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. Gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B3, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are already executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the accompanying game effects are It is executed by changing to another accompanying game effect having a different explicit or suggested content. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are already executed at the stage of executing the general accompanying game effect, the accompanying game effect is explicitly or By changing to another accompanying game effect having a different suggestion content and being executed, it is further suppressed that the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is executed. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event. In addition, since the player can obtain more information by other accompanying game effects that are changed from at least one accompanying game effect, the player can guess a future event in the notification game. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
When it is determined that the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has already executed the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same event as the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect. The game machine according to Appendix B2, further comprising an execution determination means (51) that determines by lottery whether or not to execute the associated game effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B4, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event have already been executed at the stage of executing the accompanying game effects, the associated game effects are generated. Whether to execute or not is determined by lottery. In this way, at the stage of executing the accompanying game effect, if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event have already been executed, whether or not to execute the accompanying game effect. By determining whether or not the accompanying game effect is to be executed, it is possible to give the game playability in which it is possible to infer a specific future event based on the setting of the lottery probability of whether or not to execute the accompanying game effect, so that the interest of the game is improved. .. For example, by setting the above-mentioned lottery probability according to the result of the transition determination, the playability in which the result of the transition determination can be estimated, that is, the expectation (reliability) of transition of the result of the transition determination to the special gaming state is estimated. Possible gameplay can be added.

[Appendix B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B5, wherein the future-occurring event is an event relating to a production executed as a part of the main game production.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, a future event is an event related to an effect executed as part of the main game effect. In this way, since the event that occurs in the future is an event related to the effect executed as a part of the main game effect, it is possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game effect that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from the future event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B6]
The game machine according to Appendix B5, wherein the effect executed as part of the main game effect is a development effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B6, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect, it is possible to prevent the development effect destination executed in the main game effect from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of development effect executed in (3) is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix B7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B6, wherein the demonstration executed as a part of the main game demonstration is a demonstration regarding a result of the transition determination notified by the main game demonstration.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B7, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect, it is prevented that the effect related to the result of the transition determination is repeatedly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the repeated indication or suggestion of the effect regarding the result of the transition determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix B8]
The effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. Gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B8, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. In this way, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination by the main game effect is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the main game effect is executed. It is prevented that the development effect destination to be repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented, and thus the occurrence of discomfort due to the effect of the transition determination executed in the main game effect being repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result of the same transition determination being explicitly or suggested.

[Appendix B9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes B1 to B9, wherein the rendering executed as a part of the main game rendering is a pseudo linked rendering.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B9, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect, it is prevented that the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect is repeatedly indicated or suggested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix C1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), the plurality of the auxiliary game effects before the notification game effect are started. Associated game effect execution limiting means (51) for restricting the execution of at least one accompanying game effect of the accompanying game effects of
A gaming machine characterized by having.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, of the plurality of accompanying game effects before the notification game effect is started. Execution of at least one accompanying game effect is restricted. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one of the accompanying game effects is executed, and the notification game effect is By being restricted before being started, it is possible to prevent the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event from being performed in one notification game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

[Appendix C2]
The additional game effect execution limiting means (51) has a re-determination means (51) for re-determining the at least one accompanying game effect before the notification game effect is started. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, before the notification game effect starts, among the plurality of accompanying game effects. Of at least one accompanying game effect is reset. In this way, a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events are re-determined, so that an accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future occurrence event is executed in one notification game. Is suppressed more. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event.

[Appendix C3]
The re-determination means (51) specifies the at least one accompanying game effect, the at least one accompanying game effect, and an event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in appendix C2, wherein the gaming machine is re-decided to another suggested accompanying game effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C3, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future occurrence event are determined, of the plurality of accompanying game effects before the notification game effect is started. Of at least one accompanying game effect is re-determined as another accompanying game effect having a different explicit or suggested content. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects has different contents of indication or suggestion. By being re-determined to another accompanying game effect, it is further suppressed that the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is executed. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same future event. In addition, since the player can obtain more information by other accompanying game effects that are changed from at least one accompanying game effect, the player can guess a future event in the notification game. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C2 or supplementary note C3, wherein the future-occurring event is an event relating to an effect executed as a part of the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, a future event is an event relating to an effect executed as part of the main game effect. In this way, since the event that occurs in the future is an event related to the effect executed as a part of the main game effect, it is possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game effect that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from the future event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine described in appendix C4, wherein the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is a development effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C5, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect, it is possible to prevent the development effect destination executed in the main game effect from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of development effect executed in (3) is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C2 or supplementary note C3, characterized in that the production performed as a part of the main game production is a production related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game production.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect, it is prevented that the effect related to the result of the transition determination is repeatedly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the repeated indication or suggestion of the effect regarding the result of the transition determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix C7]
The effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. Gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. In this way, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination by the main game effect is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the main game effect is executed. It is prevented that the development effect destination to be repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented, and thus the occurrence of discomfort due to the effect of the transition determination executed in the main game effect being repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result of the same transition determination being explicitly or suggested.

[Appendix C8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes C4 to C7, wherein the rendering executed as part of the main game rendering is a pseudo-linking rendering.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C8, the effect that is executed as part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect, it is prevented that the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect is repeatedly indicated or suggested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix D1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is attached. An accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) for restricting the execution of the game effect,
Have
The future event includes a plurality of events having different advantages to the player,
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event is determined, the at least one accompanying game effect, at least 1 A gaming machine characterized by changing and executing another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the future event that is advantageous to the player, rather than the future event that is explicitly or suggested by one accompanying game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is at least The future event that is explicitly or suggested by the one accompanying game effect is changed to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the future event that is advantageous to the player. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is the at least one accompanying game. By changing to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests a future event that is advantageous to the player, rather than a future event that is explicitly or suggested by the effect, the same future event can be displayed in one notification game. Execution of the accompanying game effect that is explicitly or suggested is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

Further, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests a future event that is advantageous to the player, rather than a future event that is explicitly or suggested by the at least one accompanying game effect. By doing so, the player can understand that he is in an advantageous state based on a future event that is explicitly or suggested by another accompanying game effect, so that interest in the progress of the game is improved and the interest of the game is increased. Is improved.

[Appendix D2]
The future occurrence event is an indication or suggestion of the degree of expectation that the result of the shift determination by the main control means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the advantage to the player in the future event is the degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D2, a future occurrence event is an indication or suggestion of the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is that the transition determination result will be a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the at least one incidental game effect is caused by the other incidents by the future occurrence event clearly or suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to be transited to the special game state. When the game effect is changed, the content of the indication or suggestion is stepped up (ranked). This is expected to be in a more advantageous state, so that the progress of the game can be enjoyed more and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1 or Appendix D2, wherein the future event is an event relating to an effect executed as a part of the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D3, a future event is an event relating to an effect executed as part of the main game effect. In this way, since the event that occurs in the future is an event related to the effect executed as a part of the main game effect, it is possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game effect that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from the future event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine described in appendix D3, wherein the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is a development effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D4, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect, it is possible to prevent the development effect destination executed in the main game effect from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of development effect executed in (3) is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D3 or Appendix D4, wherein the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect related to a result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect, it is prevented that the effect related to the result of the transition determination is repeatedly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the repeated indication or suggestion of the effect regarding the result of the transition determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix D6]
Note D5, which is executed as a part of the main game effect, is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. Gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D6, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. In this way, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination by the main game effect is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the main game effect is executed. It is prevented that the development effect destination to be repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented, and thus the occurrence of discomfort due to the effect of the transition determination executed in the main game effect being repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result of the same transition determination being explicitly or suggested.

[Appendix D7]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game effect is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the first special game,
The other accompanying game effect is a game machine according to Appendix D5 or Appendix D6, characterized or explicitly indicating that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the second special game. ..

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D7, the at least one accompanying game effect is an indication or an indication that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the first special game, and the other accompanying game effect is , It is intended to clearly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the second special game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby further playing the game. It is explicitly indicated or suggested that the player is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the indication or suggestion in the accompanying game effect are stepped up (ranked). In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, A player is grasped or inferred to be in an advantageous state by being explicitly or suggested that it is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the indication or suggestion in the accompanying game production are stepped up (ranked). Therefore, in the subsequent progress of the game, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix D8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes D3 to D7, wherein the rendering executed as part of the main game rendering is a pseudo-linking rendering.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, the effect that is executed as part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect, it is prevented that the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect is repeatedly indicated or suggested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix E1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is attached. An accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) for restricting the execution of the game effect,
Have
The future event includes a plurality of events having commonality and different specificities,
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), if a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event is determined, the at least one accompanying game effect, at least 1 A gaming machine characterized by changing and executing another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the future event having a higher specificity than the future event that is explicitly or suggested by one accompanying game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, at least one of the accompanying game effects of at least one of the accompanying game effects is determined to be at least the above if at least one accompanying game effect that clearly or suggests the same event as the future event is determined. Rather than a future event that is explicitly or suggested by one accompanying game effect, another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests a more specific future event is executed. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future occurrence events are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is the at least one accompanying game. The same future occurrence in one notification game by changing and executing other accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest a future occurrence event having a higher specificity than the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the effect Execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests an event is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

Further, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is determined by the at least one accompanying game effect. By changing another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests a future event that is more specific than the future event that is explicitly or suggested, the content that is explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect becomes concrete (details). Be converted). Thereby, the player can obtain more detailed information for inferring a future event based on the future event explicitly or suggested by another accompanying game effect, and therefore, based on this detailed information. The progress of the game can be enjoyed more and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E2]
Note that the plurality of events included in the future-occurring event have different degrees of expectation that the result of the shift determination by the main control means (41) is a shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in E1.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E2, a plurality of events included in future events have different degrees of expectation that the result of the transition determination is that the result of the transition determination is a special game state. In this way, a plurality of events included in future occurrence events are different in the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state, and based on the other accompanying game effect after the change. Thus, it is possible to obtain information on a more specific expectation that the result of the shift determination is that the game is to be shifted to the special game state. As a result, it is possible to further enjoy the progress of the game while inferring the possibility that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state based on the more specific information regarding the degree of expectation, The interest is improved.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1 or supplementary note E2, wherein the future-occurring event is an event relating to an effect executed as a part of the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E3, a future event is an event relating to an effect executed as part of the main game effect. In this way, since the event that occurs in the future is an event related to the effect executed as a part of the main game effect, it is possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game effect that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from the future event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine described in appendix E3, wherein the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is a development effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E4, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect, it is possible to prevent the development effect destination executed in the main game effect from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of development effect executed in (3) is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E3 or supplementary note E4, characterized in that the production performed as a part of the main game production is a production related to a result of the transition determination notified by the main game production.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect, it is prevented that the effect related to the result of the transition determination is repeatedly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the repeated indication or suggestion of the effect regarding the result of the transition determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix E6]
The effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect for informing that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect, Appendix E5. Gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect to notify that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. In this way, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination by the main game effect is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the main game effect is executed. It is prevented that the development effect destination to be repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented, and thus the occurrence of discomfort due to the effect of the transition determination executed in the main game effect being repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result of the same transition determination being explicitly or suggested.

[Appendix E7]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The at least one accompanying game effect is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the first special game,
The game machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the other accompanying game effect is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the second special game. ..

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E7, the at least one accompanying game effect is an indication or an indication that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the first special game, and the other accompanying game effect is , It is to explicitly or suggest that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to the second special game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, thereby further playing the game. It is explicitly or suggested that the person is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the indication or suggestion in the accompanying game effect are detailed. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, the at least one accompanying game effect is changed to the other accompanying game effect, Since it is explicitly or suggested that the player is in an advantageous state, and the contents of the explicit or suggestion in the accompanying game production are detailed, the player can grasp or infer that it is in an advantageous state. In the progress of the game, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes E3 to E7, wherein the rendering executed as part of the main game rendering is a pseudo-linking rendering.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E8, the effect that is executed as part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect, it is prevented that the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect is repeatedly indicated or suggested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix F1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is attached. An accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) for restricting the execution of the game effect,
Have
The game machine characterized in that the future event is an event relating to an effect executed as a part of the main game effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, execution of at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is limited when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as future events are determined. To be done. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, execution of at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is restricted. Execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, a future occurrence event is an event related to an effect executed as part of the main game effect. In this way, since the event that occurs in the future is an event related to the effect executed as a part of the main game effect, it is possible to recognize or specify a part of the main game effect that will occur in the future in the notification game. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game by inferring the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, from a part of the main game effect that is grasped from the future event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F2]
The game machine according to Supplementary Note F1, wherein the effect executed as part of the main game effect is a development effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2, the effect executed as part of the main game effect is the development effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the development effect, it is possible to prevent the development effect destination executed in the main game effect from being repeatedly specified or suggested. Occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the destination of development effect executed in (3) is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2, wherein the production performed as a part of the main game production is a production related to a result of the transition determination notified by the main game production.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the effect related to the result of the transition determination notified by the main game effect, it is prevented that the effect related to the result of the transition determination is repeatedly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the repeated indication or suggestion of the effect regarding the result of the transition determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix F4]
The effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state by the main game effect. Gaming machine described in.

[Appendix F5]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The effect that is executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to the second special game state, and is described in Appendix F4. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F4 and Supplementary Note F5, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transition determination is the special game state due to the main game effect. In this way, the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is an effect that informs that the result of the transition determination by the main game effect is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the main game effect is executed. It is prevented that the development effect destination to be repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented, and thus the occurrence of discomfort due to the effect of the transition determination executed in the main game effect being repeatedly specified or suggested is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result of the same transition determination being explicitly or suggested.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F5, characterized in that the demonstration executed as part of the main game demonstration is a pseudo continuous demonstration.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the effect that is executed as part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the effect executed as a part of the main game effect is the pseudo continuous effect, it is prevented that the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect is repeatedly indicated or suggested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by repeatedly indicating or suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the main game effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the effects having the same explicit or suggested contents.

[Appendix G1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Sub control means (51) for controlling the information game effect (fluctuation game effect, notice effect) executed in the information game,
Equipped with
As the notification game effect, a main game effect (fluctuating game effect) for notifying the result of the transition determination, and a future event that will be executed in association with the main game effect and will occur in the future in the notification game, or A gaming machine including an accompanying game effect (notice effect) to suggest (notice),
The sub control means (51) is
A main game effect determination means (51) for determining the main game effect,
An associated game effect determination means (51) for determining the accompanying game effect,
A game effect executing means (51) for executing the main game effect and the accompanying game effect,
When a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event have been determined by the accompanying game effect determining means (51), at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is attached. An accompanying game effect execution restriction means (51) for restricting the execution of the game effect,
Have
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51), when the accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has been determined the plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as the future event. A game machine characterized by limiting execution of the associated game effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event are determined as future events, then at least one of the plurality of accompanying game effects is established. Execution of the accompanying game production is limited. In this way, when a plurality of accompanying game effects that explicitly or suggest the same event as a future event are determined, execution of at least one accompanying game effect of the plurality of accompanying game effects is restricted. Execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event in one notification game is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the execution of the accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the same future event, so that the accompanying game explicitly or suggests the same future event. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance being performed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, execution of the at least one accompanying game effect is limited when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect is restricted under the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect is restricted according to the set predetermined condition. Diversity can be given. Due to such variety, it is possible to add variety to the playability of the gaming machine, and thus it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G2]
The predetermined condition is that the future occurrence event in the notification game includes a future occurrence event different from the future occurrence event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, the predetermined condition is that a future event that is different from the future event that is explicitly or suggested by the incidental game effect determined by the incidental game effect determination unit is a future event that occurs in the notification game. It is included. In this way, the future event in the informative game is to include a predetermined future event that is different from the future event explicitly or suggested by the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means. By changing the at least one accompanying game effect to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the predetermined future event, it is possible to limit the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect. In this way, by changing the at least one accompanying game effect to another accompanying game effect that explicitly or suggests the predetermined future event, the accompanying game effect determined by the accompanying game effect determination means is explicitly or Information can be provided about new future events that are not suggested. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game based on the information newly obtained by increasing the amount of information obtained, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination by the main control means (41) shifts to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special gaming state. In this way, the predetermined condition is that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, and when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, the at least one accompanying game effect May be executed. That is, when a plurality of accompanying game effects including the same explicit or suggestive content are executed, the result of the shift determination may shift to the special game state. As a result, when a plurality of accompanying game effects including the same explicit or suggestive content are executed, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special gaming state, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

[Appendix G4]
The accompanying game effect execution limiting means (51) has an execution determining means (51) that determines by lottery whether or not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1 or supplementary note G3, wherein the predetermined condition is that in the lottery by the execution lottery means (51), it is decided not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect. ..

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the predetermined condition is that it is determined not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect by lottery. In this way, the predetermined condition is that it is determined not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect by the lottery, and thus whether the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect is restricted by the lottery is determined. Can be given. Further, depending on the probability that it is determined not to execute the at least one accompanying game effect by lottery, it is possible to add variety to the restriction of the execution of the at least one accompanying game effect. As a result, it is possible to add variety to the game playability of the gaming machine, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Appendix G5]
The special game is transferred to a first game state (normal jackpot game state) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is executed with a first probability (low probability mode) after the end of the special game. One special game (normal jackpot game) and the second determination (high-probability mode) in which the transition determination by the main control means (41) is higher than the first probability after the special game is finished. Including a first special game (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the second game state (probability variation jackpot game state),
The result of the transition determination by the main control means (41) is a first determination result (normal jackpot) that is transitioned to the first gaming state after the notification game ends, and the second game after the notification game ends. Including the second determination result (probability variation jackpot game) that is transitioned to the state,
The determination probabilities that it is determined that the at least one accompanying game effect is not executed in the lottery by the execution lottery means (51) are as follows: when the result of the transition determination is the first determination result, The gaming machine according to appendix G4, which is different from the case where the result is the second determination result.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game effect is determined not to be executed is the case where the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player, and the result of the transition determination. Is different from the case where the second determination result is advantageous to the player. In this way, when the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game effect is determined not to be executed is the first determination result that is unfavorable to the player, and the result of the transition determination is to the player. Since it is different from the case where the advantageous second determination result is obtained, it is possible to provide the game property that the future occurrence event can be estimated based on the set determination probability, so that the interest of the game is improved. For example, by setting the determination probability according to the result of the transition determination, the game playability of which the result of the transition determination can be estimated, that is, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be the one in the special gaming state ( It is possible to add a game property that can be estimated with respect to reliability.

[Appendix G6]
The determination probability is higher when the transition determination result is the first determination result than when the transition determination result is the second determination result. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, when the determination probability that the at least one accompanying game effect is not executed is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player, the transition determination is The result is higher than when the result is the second determination result that is advantageous to the player. Thus, the determination probability is higher when the result of the transition determination is the first determination result that is disadvantageous to the player than when the result of the transition determination is the second determination result that is advantageous to the player. Then, by executing the at least one accompanying game effect, a game property is provided in which the degree of expectation (reliability) that the result of the transition determination is that of transitioning to the special game state is high.

[Appendix H1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. A game machine comprising means for executing a notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information which is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is included as additional effect information. The notification effect of the notification content is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, notification of the notification content including effect information not included in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as additional effect information. By executing the effect, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, the additional effect information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the additional effect information includes information on the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, the additional effect information includes information related to display effects. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information about the display effect, the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the information about the display effect included as the additional effect information (effect information). Available. Thereby, the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the information on the display effect based on the additional effect information, so that the notification is performed while assuming the display effect executed in the notification game. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, wherein the display effect is determined based on a result of the shift determination.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H3, the display effect is determined based on the result of the transition determination. That is, the additional effect information includes information on the display effect determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this manner, the additional effect information includes the information on the display effect determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information (effect). It is possible to obtain information about display effects related to the result of the transition determination included as (information). As a result, the player can grasp the display effect determined based on the result of the transition determination based on the additional effect information in advance, so that the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game state based on this display effect. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not there is, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H4]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to Appendix H3, wherein the additional effect information includes information on the reach effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H4, the additional effect information includes information regarding the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information on the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information (effect. Information about the reach effect related to the result of the transition determination included as (information) can be obtained. As a result, the player can grasp beforehand the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination based on the additional effect information, so that the result of the transition determination is moved to the special game state based on the reach effect. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while inferring the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not it is, so the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H5]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary note H3 or supplementary note H4, wherein the additional effect information includes information on the pseudo continuous effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, the additional effect information includes information on the pseudo continuous effect determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information on the pseudo continuous effect determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information ( It is possible to obtain information about the pseudo continuous production related to the result of the transition determination included as the production information). As a result, the player can grasp in advance the pseudo continuous production determined based on the result of the transition determination based on the additional production information, and therefore the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game state based on the pseudo continuous production. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while inferring the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not it is a thing, so the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H5, wherein the additional effect information includes information that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H6, the additional effect information includes information that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information that the result of the transition determination indicates that the result is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect. It is possible to obtain information that the result of the shift determination included as information (production information) is to shift to the special game state. As a result, the player can know in advance that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H6, characterized in that the additional production information includes information on a production that is executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information that was not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is changed to the second timing. The notification effect of the notification content included as the additional effect information related to the effect executed thereafter is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing is executed as the notification effect after the second timing. When the notification effect of the notification content included as the additional effect information related to the effect is executed, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type, As the additional effect information, it is possible to obtain information about effects that are executed after the second timing. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H7, wherein the additional effect information includes information capable of specifying the content of the effect executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H8, the additional effect information includes information capable of specifying the content of the effect executed after the second timing. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information capable of specifying the content of the effect to be executed after the second timing, so that when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, In addition to the notification content in the notification effect, it is possible to obtain information that can specify the content of the effect executed after the second timing. As a result, the player assumes not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect, but also the effect specified in the additional effect information (effect information), that this effect is executed in the notification game. Since the information game can be enjoyed as a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix H9]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to Appendix H9, wherein the additional effect information includes information on the reach effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, the additional effect information includes information about the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information on the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information (effect. Information about reach production can be obtained based on (Information). With this, the player can previously specify that the reach effect is to be executed by the additional effect information, and therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the information game on the assumption of the reach effect executed in the information game. The interest of is improved.

[Appendix H10]
The reach production includes a plurality of types of reach production executed in stages,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, wherein the additional effect information includes information on stages of the plurality of types of reach effects.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H10, the additional effect information includes information regarding the stages of the reach effects of a plurality of types. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information regarding the stages of the plurality of types of reach effects, so that it is possible to specify in advance which stage of the reach effects is to be executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game assuming the stage of the reach effect executed in the information game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H11]
The reach production includes a plurality of types of reach production,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, wherein the additional effect information includes information regarding the types of the plurality of types of reach effects.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11, the additional effect information includes information regarding a plurality of types of reach effects. In this way, the additional effect information includes information regarding the types of the reach effects of a plurality of types, so that it is possible to specify in advance which type of reach effect is to be executed. Thereby, since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game in consideration of the type of reach effect executed in the information game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H12]
The notification effect executing means (51) or the display effect executing means (51) includes related effects that are executed by limiting the upper limit number set to 2 or more,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H9 to H11, wherein the additional production information includes information regarding the number of times of execution of the related production.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of times of execution of related productions that are executed with the upper limit number being limited. In this way, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of times of execution of related effects that are related to each other and executed with the upper limit number being limited, whereby it is possible to specify in advance to which stage the related effects are executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game by assuming which stage of the related effect executed in the information game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H13]
The notification effect includes a step-up effect,
The game machine according to Supplementary Note H12, wherein the number of executions of the related effect is the number of steps of the step-up effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H13, the number of executions of the related effect is the number of steps of the step-up effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of steps of the step-up effect as the related effect. In this way, the additional effect information includes information about the number of steps of the step-up effect as the related effect, so that the step-up effect is executed and the number of steps of the step-up effect can be specified in advance. Thereby, since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game by assuming the number of steps of the step-up effect executed in the information game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H14]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H12 or supplementary note H13, wherein the number of times of execution of the related production is the number of times of pseudo consecutive production of the pseudo continuous production.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H14, the number of executions of the related effect is the pseudo number of times of the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information on the number of times of pseudo-repetition of the pseudo continuous effect as the related effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information regarding the number of pseudo consecutive effects of the pseudo consecutive effect as a related effect, it is possible to specify that the pseudo consecutive effect is executed and the number of pseudo consecutive effects of the pseudo consecutive effect. As a result, since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game by assuming the number of pseudo-repetitions of the pseudo-relation production executed in the notification game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H15]
From the supplementary note H1 characterized in that the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H14.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H15, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. In this way, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing, and thus the specific-type notification effect is displayed. By attracting the player's attention and causing a sense of discomfort, it becomes possible to focus attention on a specific type of notification effect. This makes it easier for the player to know that the additional information is presented.

[Appendix H16]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a part of the display mode of the effect is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note H15.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H16, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a part of the display mode of the effect is different from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. It In this way, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a part of the display mode of the effect is different from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. The display mode of the specific type notification effect executed at the second timing can be changed while maintaining the sameness as the specific type notification effect executed at the first timing. This makes it possible to draw the player's full attention to the specific type of notification effect and generate a sufficient sense of incongruity to focus on the specific type of notification effect.

[Appendix H17]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of some colors, patterns, and backgrounds of the effect. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H16 characterized by being displayed as.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H17, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is at least part of the color, pattern, and background of the effect with the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. One is displayed in a different manner. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing differs from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of a part of color, pattern, and background of the effect. By being displayed with, it is possible to draw the player's sufficient attention to the specific type of notification effect by a simple change of the display mode, and to cause the player to pay attention to the specific type of notification effect by causing a clear sense of discomfort. Become.

[Appendix H18]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a predetermined display is added to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H16 or supplementary note H17.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H18, wherein the predetermined display is an effect display.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H18 and Supplementary Note H19, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing adds a predetermined display such as an effect display to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. It is displayed in the mode. In this way, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a predetermined display such as an effect display is added to the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. Then, by simply changing the display mode, it is possible to draw the player's full attention to the specific type of notification effect and generate a clear sense of discomfort so that the specific type of notification effect can be focused.
[Appendix H20]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H19, wherein the additional effect information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H20, the additional effect information is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification effect. In this way, the additional effect information is information more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification effect, so that the additional effect advantageous when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing. A game property that information is obtained is added.

[Appendix H21]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H20, wherein the additional effect information includes information related to the shift determination.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H21, the additional effect information includes information related to the transition determination. In this way, since the additional effect information includes information related to the transition determination, the player determines the transition based on the information regarding the display effect related to the result of the transition determination included as the additional effect information (effect information). It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not the result is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H22]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H20 or supplementary note H21, wherein the additional production information includes information on the reach production.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H22, the additional effect information includes information about the reach effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information regarding the reach effect, the player obtains not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the information regarding the reach effect included as the additional effect information (effect information). it can. This allows the player to know in advance that the reach effect will be executed by the additional effect information, and therefore, based on this reach effect, whether or not the result of the transition determination is to be the special game state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of the above, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H23]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H20 to H22, wherein the additional production information includes information on the pseudo continuous production.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H23, the additional effect information includes information on the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information about the pseudo-relational effect, the player can obtain not only the notification content of the specific type of notification effect but also the information about the pseudo-relational effect included as the additional effect information (effect information). Can be obtained. This allows the player to know in advance that the pseudo-relational effect will be executed based on the additional effect information. Therefore, based on this pseudo-rear effect, the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H24]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H20 to H23, wherein the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

[Appendix H25]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H24, wherein the additional effect information includes information for notifying that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to supplementary note H24 and supplementary note H25, the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the shift determination is to shift to a special game state such as a second special game state. In this way, the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, so that the player shifts the result of the shift determination for the notification game to the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to know during the execution of the notification game that the special game will be executed after the notification game is finished. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game on the basis of the additional effect information at ease, and can watch the progress of the notification game while looking forward to the execution of the special game. In particular, if the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the shift determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is in a more advantageous state for the player. Because of this, it is possible to watch the progress of the notification game more enjoyably when the second special game is executed.

[Appendix H26]
The game according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H25, further comprising limiting means for limiting execution of the specific type of notification effect at a third timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H26, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, execution of a specific type of notification effect at the third timing is restricted. In this way, by restricting the execution of the specific type of notification effect at the third timing, the player is relieved of the annoyance and irritation resulting from the repeated execution of the specific type of notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix H27]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H26, characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the limiting means executes an effect different from the specific type of notification effect, instead of the specific type of notification effect. ..

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H27, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect different from the specific type of notification effect is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect. In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, instead of the specific type of notification effect, an effect different from the specific type of notification effect is executed, and based on this effect, the notification game progresses more. You can enjoy

[Appendix H28]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H27, wherein the different effect is an information effect different from the specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H28, a different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is a notification effect that is different from the specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects. In this way, the different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is the notification effect that is different from the specific type of the notification effect of the plurality of types of notification effects, and thus, the plurality of types of notification effects regarding the display effect. Different information is available. With this different information, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while assuming the display effect.

[Appendix H29]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H27 or Supplementary Note H28, wherein the different production is a production different from the plurality of types of notification productions.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H29, a different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is a notification effect that is different from the plurality of types of notification effects. In this way, the different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is the notification effect that is different from the plurality of types of notification effects, so that various information can be provided by the different effects. As a result, various game properties can be provided by appropriately setting the information provided by different effects.

[Appendix H30]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes H26 to H29, wherein the predetermined condition is that there is an unnotified effect executed after the third timing in the alerting game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H30, the predetermined condition is that there is an unnotified effect executed after the third timing in the notification game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced effect executed after the third timing in the informing game, so that instead of the specific type of informing effect, the informing effect regarding the uninformed effect It becomes possible to execute. As a result, similarly to the case where the additional effect information is presented, the player assumes the effect executed in the informing game based on the information specified from the informing effect regarding the uninformed effect of the informing game. The enjoyment of the game is improved because you can enjoy the progress.

[Appendix H31]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H30, wherein the unreported effect is the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H31, the unreported effect is the display effect. That is, the predetermined condition is that there is an unnotified display effect executed after the third timing in the notification game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an uninformed display effect executed after the third timing in the informing game, so that the unspecified notification effect is replaced with the specific type of informing effect. It is possible to execute the notification effect. Thereby, the player shifts the result of the shift determination to the special game state on the basis of the information specified from the notification effect related to the unreported display effect, assuming the display effect executed in the notification game. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of something.

[Appendix H32]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H26 to H31, wherein the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H32, the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, when the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, execution of the specific type of notification effect at the third timing is restricted. , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H33]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes H1 to H32, wherein the additional effect information is information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H33, the additional effect information is information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification effect. In this way, since the additional effect information is the information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification effect, the player performs the display effect more advantageous than the display effect that is grasped from the specific type of the notification effect. This can be understood from the additional effect information. As a result, the player has a higher possibility (expectation level) that the result of the shift determination is shifted to the special game state by the additional effect information than what can be grasped from the specific type of notification effect. Since it can be recognized, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the shift determination will shift to the special game state.

[Appendix H34]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to Appendix H33, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H34, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect. In this way, since the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is to be executed as the display effect, in addition to the information on the reach effect specified from the specific type of the notification effect, the reach effect It is possible to further obtain the information regarding the additional production information. As a result, the player can know the contents of the reach effect in more detail, and thus can further enjoy the progress of the information game on the assumption of the reach effect executed in the information game.

[Appendix H35]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H33 or Supplementary Note H34, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H35, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the pseudo linked effect is executed as the display effect. Thus, in addition to the information about the pseudo continuous effect specified from the specific type of notification effect, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect. It is possible to further obtain information regarding the pseudo continuous production by the additional production information. Thereby, the player can know the details of the pseudo-relational effect in more detail, and can further enjoy the progress of the notification game on the assumption that the notification game is executed.

[Appendix H36]
The display effect includes a transition notification effect indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes H33 to H35, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the transition notification effect is executed as the display effect.

[Appendix H37]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H36, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to supplementary note H36 and supplementary note H37, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to cause a transition to a special game state such as a second special game state. In this way, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to be changed to a special game state such as the second special game state, so that the player responds to the notification game. The result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, and it can be understood during the execution of the notification game that the special game is executed after the end of the notification game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification effect, and at the same time look forward to the execution of the special game to advance the notification game. You can watch over. In particular, when the specific type of notification effect is an effect in which the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is in a more advantageous state for the player. Because of this, it is possible to watch the progress of the notification game more enjoyably when the second special game is executed.

[Appendix H38]
The notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the first timing, according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H37. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H38, the notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the first timing. That is, when the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing is also executed at the second timing, the notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed. As described above, when the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing is also executed at the second timing, the notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed, so that the player Is released from the annoyance and irritation resulting from the repeated execution of a specific type of notification effect, so that a decrease in the interest of the game is prevented.

[Appendix H39]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H38, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H39, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect. In this way, since the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is to be executed as the display effect, in addition to the information on the reach effect specified from the specific type of the notification effect, the reach effect It is possible to further obtain the information regarding the additional production information. As a result, the player can know the contents of the reach effect in more detail, and thus can further enjoy the progress of the information game on the assumption of the reach effect executed in the information game.

[Appendix H40]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H38 or supplementary note H39, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H40, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the pseudo linked effect will be executed as the display effect. Thus, in addition to the information about the pseudo continuous effect specified from the specific type of notification effect, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect. It is possible to further obtain information regarding the pseudo continuous production by the additional production information. Thereby, the player can know the details of the pseudo-relational effect in more detail, and can further enjoy the progress of the notification game on the assumption that the notification game is executed.

[Appendix H41]
The display effect includes a transition notification effect indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes H39 to H40, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the transition notification effect is executed as the display effect.

[Appendix H42]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H41, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H41 and Supplementary Note H42, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state such as a second special gaming state. In this way, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to be changed to a special game state such as the second special game state, so that the player responds to the notification game. The result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, and it can be understood during the execution of the notification game that the special game is executed after the end of the notification game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification effect, and at the same time look forward to the execution of the special game to advance the notification game. You can watch over. In particular, when the specific type of notification effect is an effect in which the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is in a more advantageous state for the player. Because of this, it is possible to watch the progress of the notification game more enjoyably when the second special game is executed.

[Appendix I1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
The game machine characterized in that the additional effect information includes information related to effects executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information that was not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is changed to the second timing. The notification effect of the notification content included as the additional effect information related to the effect executed thereafter is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing is executed as the notification effect after the second timing. When the notification effect of the notification content included as the additional effect information related to the effect is executed, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type, As the additional effect information, it is possible to obtain information about effects that are executed after the second timing. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note I1, wherein the additional effect information includes information capable of specifying the content of the effect executed after the second timing.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2, the additional effect information includes information capable of specifying the content of the effect executed after the second timing. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information capable of specifying the content of the effect to be executed after the second timing, so that when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, In addition to the notification content in the notification effect, it is possible to obtain information that can specify the content of the effect executed after the second timing. As a result, the player assumes not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect, but also the effect specified in the additional effect information (effect information), that this effect is executed in the notification game. Since the information game can be enjoyed as a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix I3]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to Note I2, wherein the additional effect information includes information on the reach effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I3, the additional effect information includes information regarding the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information on the reach effect determined based on the result of the transition determination, so that the player can obtain not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the additional effect information (effect. Information about reach production can be obtained based on (Information). With this, the player can previously specify that the reach effect is to be executed by the additional effect information, and therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the information game on the assumption of the reach effect executed in the information game. The interest of is improved.

[Appendix I4]
The reach production includes a plurality of types of reach production executed in stages,
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the additional effect information includes information regarding stages of the plurality of types of reach effects.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I4, the additional effect information includes information regarding a plurality of types of reach effect stages. In this way, the additional effect information includes the information regarding the stages of the plurality of types of reach effects, so that it is possible to specify in advance which stage of the reach effects is to be executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game assuming the stage of the reach effect executed in the information game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I5]
The reach production includes a plurality of types of reach production,
The gaming machine according to appendix I4, wherein the additional effect information includes information regarding the types of the plurality of types of reach effects.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, the additional effect information includes information regarding the types of reach effects of a plurality of types. In this way, the additional effect information includes information regarding the types of the reach effects of a plurality of types, so that it is possible to specify in advance which type of reach effect is to be executed. Thereby, since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game in consideration of the type of reach effect executed in the information game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I6]
The notification effect executing means (51) or the display effect executing means (51) includes related effects that are executed by limiting the upper limit number set to 2 or more,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I3 to I5, wherein the additional production information includes information on the number of times of execution of the related production.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I6, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of times of execution of the related effects that are related to each other and are executed with the upper limit number being limited. In this way, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of times of execution of related effects that are related to each other and executed with the upper limit number being limited, whereby it is possible to specify in advance to which stage the related effects are executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game by assuming which stage of the related effect executed in the information game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I7]
The notification effect includes a step-up effect,
The gaming machine according to appendix I6, wherein the number of executions of the related effect is the number of steps of the step-up effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7, the number of executions of the related effect is the number of steps of the step-up effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information regarding the number of steps of the step-up effect as the related effect. In this way, the additional effect information includes information about the number of steps of the step-up effect as the related effect, so that the step-up effect is executed and the number of steps of the step-up effect can be specified in advance. Thereby, since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game by assuming the number of steps of the step-up effect executed in the information game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I8]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The game machine according to supplementary note I6 or supplementary note I7, wherein the number of times of execution of the related effect is the number of pseudo consecutive times of the pseudo continuous effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I8, the number of executions of the related effect is the pseudo number of times of the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the additional effect information includes information on the number of times of pseudo-repetition of the pseudo continuous effect as the related effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information regarding the number of pseudo consecutive effects of the pseudo consecutive effect as a related effect, it is possible to specify that the pseudo consecutive effect is executed and the number of pseudo consecutive effects of the pseudo consecutive effect. As a result, since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game by assuming the number of pseudo-repetitions of the pseudo-relation production executed in the notification game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix J1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is changed to the second timing. The notification effect of the notification content included as the additional effect information related to the effect executed thereafter is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing is executed as the notification effect after the second timing. When the notification effect of the notification content included as the additional effect information related to the effect is executed, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type, As the additional effect information, it is possible to obtain information about effects that are executed after the second timing. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. In this way, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing, and thus the specific-type notification effect is displayed. By attracting the player's attention and causing a sense of discomfort, it becomes possible to focus attention on a specific type of notification effect. This makes it easier for the player to know that the additional information is presented.

[Appendix J2]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a part of the display mode of the effect is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note J1.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J2, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a part of the display mode of the effect is different from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. It In this way, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a part of the display mode of the effect is different from the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. The display mode of the specific type notification effect executed at the second timing can be changed while maintaining the sameness as the specific type notification effect executed at the first timing. This makes it possible to draw the player's full attention to the specific type of notification effect and generate a sufficient sense of incongruity to focus on the specific type of notification effect.

[Appendix J3]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is different from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of some colors, patterns, and backgrounds of the effect. The gaming machine according to supplementary note J2, which is displayed with.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J3, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is at least part of the color, pattern, and background of the effect with the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. One is displayed in a different manner. In this way, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing differs from the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing in at least one of a part of color, pattern, and background of the effect. By being displayed with, it is possible to draw the player's sufficient attention to the specific type of notification effect by a simple change of the display mode, and to cause the player to pay attention to the specific type of notification effect by causing a clear sense of discomfort. Become.

[Appendix J4]
The specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a predetermined display is added to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. The gaming machine according to Appendix J2 or Appendix J3.

[Appendix J5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J4, wherein the predetermined display is an effect display.

In the gaming machines according to supplementary note J4 and supplementary note J5, the specific type of notification effect executed at the second timing adds a predetermined display such as an effect display to the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing. It is displayed in the mode. In this way, the specific-type notification effect executed at the second timing is displayed in a mode in which a predetermined display such as an effect display is added to the specific-type notification effect performed at the first timing. Then, by simply changing the display mode, it is possible to draw the player's full attention to the specific type of notification effect and generate a clear sense of discomfort so that the specific type of notification effect can be focused.

[Appendix K1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
A game machine characterized in that the additional effect information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the content of the notification in the specific type of notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information which is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is included as additional effect information. The notification effect of the notification content is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, notification of the notification content including effect information not included in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as additional effect information. By executing the effect, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, the additional effect information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, the additional effect information is more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification effect. In this way, the additional effect information is information more advantageous to the player than the notification content in the specific type of notification effect, so that the additional effect advantageous when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing. A game property that information is obtained is added.

[Appendix K2]
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the additional effect information includes information related to the shift determination.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K2, the additional effect information includes information related to the transition determination. In this way, since the additional effect information includes information related to the transition determination, the player determines the transition based on the information regarding the display effect related to the result of the transition determination included as the additional effect information (effect information). It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not the result is to be transferred to the special game state, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K3]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The game machine according to supplementary note K1 or supplementary note K2, wherein the additional effect information includes information relating to the reach effect.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K3, the additional effect information includes information regarding the reach effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information regarding the reach effect, the player obtains not only the notification content in the specific type of notification effect but also the information regarding the reach effect included as the additional effect information (effect information). it can. This allows the player to know in advance that the reach effect will be executed by the additional effect information, and therefore, based on this reach effect, whether or not the result of the transition determination is to be the special game state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of the above, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K4]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K3, wherein the additional production information includes information on the pseudo continuous production.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K4, the additional effect information includes information related to the pseudo continuous effect. In this way, since the additional effect information includes the information about the pseudo-relational effect, the player can obtain not only the notification content of the specific type of notification effect but also the information about the pseudo-relational effect included as the additional effect information (effect information). Can be obtained. This allows the player to know in advance that the pseudo-relational effect will be executed based on the additional effect information. Therefore, based on this pseudo-rear effect, the result of the transition determination is to be transferred to the special game state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of whether or not, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K4, wherein the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

[Appendix K6]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix K5, wherein the additional effect information includes information for notifying that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note K5 and Supplementary Note K6, the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state such as the second special gaming state. In this way, the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, so that the player shifts the result of the shift determination for the notification game to the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to know during the execution of the notification game that the special game will be executed after the notification game is finished. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game on the basis of the additional effect information at ease, and can watch the progress of the notification game while looking forward to the execution of the special game. In particular, if the additional effect information includes information regarding that the result of the shift determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is in a more advantageous state for the player. Because of this, it is possible to watch the progress of the notification game more enjoyably when the second special game is executed.

[Appendix L1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
The notification effect execution determining means (51) for individually determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects, and the notification effect execution determining means (51) have been determined. Notification content determination means (51) for determining the notification content of the notification effect,
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Further provided with means for executing additional production,
A gaming machine further comprising a limiting means for limiting execution of the specific type of notification effect at a third timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information which is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is included as additional effect information. The additional effect of the notification content is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the addition of the notification content including the effect information not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as the additional effect information. By executing the effect, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, the additional effect information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, it is restricted that the specific type of notification effect is executed at the third timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, by restricting the execution of the specific type of notification effect at the third timing, the player is relieved of the annoyance and irritation resulting from the repeated execution of the specific type of notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix L2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, wherein when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the limiting means executes an effect different from the specific type of notification effect, instead of the specific type of notification effect. ..

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect different from the specific type of notification effect is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect. In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, instead of the specific type of notification effect, an effect different from the specific type of notification effect is executed, and based on this effect, the notification game progresses more. You can enjoy

[Appendix L3]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L2, wherein the different effect is an information effect different from the specific type of notification effect among the plurality of types of notification effects.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L3, a different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is a notification effect that is different from the specific type of the notification effect of the plurality of types of notification effects. In this way, the different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is the notification effect that is different from the specific type of the notification effect of the plurality of types of notification effects, and thus, the plurality of types of notification effects regarding the display effect. Different information is available. With this different information, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game while assuming the display effect.

[Appendix L4]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L2 or supplementary note L3, wherein the different effect is an effect different from the plurality of types of notification effects.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L4, a different effect executed in place of the specific type of notification effect is a notification effect different from the plurality of types of notification effects. In this way, the different effect that is executed instead of the specific type of notification effect is the notification effect that is different from the plurality of types of notification effects, so that various information can be provided by the different effects. As a result, various game properties can be provided by appropriately setting the information provided by different effects.

[Appendix L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L4, wherein the predetermined condition is that there is an unreported effect executed after the third timing in the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L5, the predetermined condition is that there is an unnotified effect executed after the third timing in the notification game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an unannounced effect executed after the third timing in the informing game, so that instead of the specific type of informing effect, the informing effect regarding the uninformed effect It becomes possible to execute. As a result, similarly to the case where the additional effect information is presented, the player assumes the effect executed in the informing game based on the information specified from the informing effect regarding the uninformed effect of the informing game. The enjoyment of the game is improved because you can enjoy the progress.

[Appendix L6]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L5, wherein the unreported effect is the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L6, the unreported effect is the display effect. That is, the predetermined condition is that there is an unnotified display effect executed after the third timing in the notification game. In this way, the predetermined condition is that there is an uninformed display effect executed after the third timing in the informing game, so that the unspecified notification effect is replaced with the specific type of informing effect. It is possible to execute the notification effect. Thereby, the player shifts the result of the shift determination to the special game state on the basis of the information specified from the notification effect related to the unreported display effect, assuming the display effect executed in the notification game. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the information game while estimating the possibility (expectation level) of something.

[Appendix L7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L6, wherein the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L7, the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, when the predetermined condition is that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, execution of the specific type of notification effect at the third timing is restricted. , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
The game machine characterized in that the additional effect information is information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information that is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect is included as additional effect information. The notification effect of the notification content is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, notification of the notification content including effect information not included in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as additional effect information. By executing the effect, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, the additional effect information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1, the additional effect information is information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification effect. In this way, since the additional effect information is the information related to the notification content in the specific type of notification effect, the player performs the display effect more advantageous than the display effect that is grasped from the specific type of the notification effect. This can be understood from the additional effect information. As a result, the player has a higher possibility (expectation level) that the result of the shift determination is shifted to the special game state by the additional effect information than what can be grasped from the specific type of notification effect. Since it can be recognized, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the result of the shift determination will shift to the special game state.

[Appendix M2]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M2, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect. In this way, since the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is to be executed as the display effect, in addition to the information on the reach effect specified from the specific type of the notification effect, the reach effect It is possible to further obtain the information regarding the additional production information. As a result, the player can know the contents of the reach effect in more detail, and thus can further enjoy the progress of the information game on the assumption of the reach effect executed in the information game.

[Appendix M3]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1 or Supplementary Note M2, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M3, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo-relation effect is executed as the display effect. Thus, in addition to the information about the pseudo continuous effect specified from the specific type of notification effect, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect. It is possible to further obtain information regarding the pseudo continuous production by the additional production information. Thereby, the player can know the details of the pseudo-relational effect in more detail, and can further enjoy the progress of the notification game on the assumption that the notification game is executed.

[Appendix M4]
The display effect includes a transition notification effect indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes M1 to M3, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the transition notification effect is executed as the display effect.

[Appendix M5]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix M4, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note M4 and Supplementary Note M5, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state such as a second special gaming state. In this way, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to be changed to a special game state such as the second special game state, so that the player responds to the notification game. The result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, and it can be understood during the execution of the notification game that the special game is executed after the end of the notification game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification effect, and at the same time look forward to the execution of the special game to advance the notification game. You can watch over. In particular, when the specific type of notification effect is an effect in which the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is in a more advantageous state for the player. Because of this, it is possible to watch the progress of the notification game more enjoyably when the second special game is executed.

[Appendix N1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
The notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the first timing.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the effect information which is not notified by the notification effect executed at the first timing is included as additional effect information as the notification effect. The notification effect of the notification content is executed. In this way, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, notification of the notification content including effect information not included in the notification effect executed at the first timing as the notification effect as additional effect information. By executing the effect, when the notification effect of the specific type is executed at the second timing, the additional effect information can be obtained in addition to the notification content of the notification effect of the specific type. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the notification game on the basis of not only the notification contents in the specific type of notification effect but also the effect executed in the notification game based on the additional effect information (effect information). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note N1, the notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the first timing. That is, when the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing is also executed at the second timing, the notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed. As described above, when the specific type of notification effect executed at the first timing is also executed at the second timing, the notification effect of the notification content including the additional effect information is executed, so that the player Is released from the annoyance and irritation resulting from the repeated execution of a specific type of notification effect, so that a decrease in the interest of the game is prevented.

[Appendix N2]
The display effect is a symbol indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state between the start of variable display of a plurality of symbols and the stop display of the plurality of symbols Including a reach effect indicating that the plurality of symbols are easily stopped and displayed in a combination of
The gaming machine according to appendix N1, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N2, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is executed as the display effect. In this way, since the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect is to be executed as the display effect, in addition to the information on the reach effect specified from the specific type of the notification effect, the reach effect It is possible to further obtain the information regarding the additional production information. As a result, the player can know the contents of the reach effect in more detail, and thus can further enjoy the progress of the information game on the assumption of the reach effect executed in the information game.

[Appendix N3]
The display effect includes a pseudo continuous effect,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N1 or Supplementary Note N2, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N3, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of notifying that the pseudo linked effect will be executed as the display effect. Thus, in addition to the information about the pseudo continuous effect specified from the specific type of notification effect, the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the display effect. It is possible to further obtain information regarding the pseudo continuous production by the additional production information. Thereby, the player can know the details of the pseudo-relational effect in more detail, and can further enjoy the progress of the notification game on the assumption that the notification game is executed.

[Appendix N4]
The display effect includes a transition notification effect indicating that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices N1 to N3, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect that notifies that the transition notification effect is executed as the display effect.

[Appendix N5]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N4, wherein the specific type of notification effect is an effect to notify that the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note N4 and Supplementary Note N5, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to transition to a special gaming state such as a second special gaming state. In this way, the specific type of notification effect is an effect of informing that the result of the transition determination is to be changed to a special game state such as the second special game state, so that the player responds to the notification game. The result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, and it can be understood during the execution of the notification game that the special game is executed after the end of the notification game. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with peace of mind based on the information obtained from the specific type of notification effect, and at the same time look forward to the execution of the special game to advance the notification game. You can watch over. In particular, when the specific type of notification effect is an effect in which the result of the transition determination is to shift from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is in a more advantageous state for the player. Because of this, it is possible to watch the progress of the notification game more enjoyably when the second special game is executed.

[Appendix O1]
A notification to notify the result of the transition determination by performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game (variable game),
Notification effect execution means (51) capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects (notice effects),
Notification effect execution determining means (51) for determining whether or not to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means (51) for determining notification content of the notification effect determined to be executed by the notification effect execution determination means (51),
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content (e.g., development effect notice effect) is executed, the display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after execution of the notification effect (e.g., development effect) Display effect executing means (51) for executing an effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means (51),
Means (51) for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means (51) for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, a notification effect of notification content including information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is executed. Equipped with means,
The information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is determination information regarding a result of the shift determination by the main control means (41).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O1, when the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, the notification effect executed at the first timing is not notified as the notification effect, and the result of the shift determination by the main control means The notification effect of the notification content including the determination information regarding is executed. In this way, as the notification effect, the notification effect of the notification content including the determination information that is not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is executed at the second timing, so that the notification content in the specific type of notification effect is performed. In addition, the judgment information can be obtained. As a result, the player infers that the result of the transition determination for the notification game is a big hit based on not only the content of the notification in the specific type of notification performance but also the determination information regarding the result of the transition determination. The enjoyment of the game is improved because you can enjoy the progress of.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine according to appendix O1, wherein the determination information includes information for notifying that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the special game state.

[Appendix O3]
In the special game state, a first special game state in which a first special game (normal big hit game) is executed, and a second special game (probability variation big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. And a second special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix O2, wherein the determination information includes information indicating that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the second special game state.

In the gaming machines according to supplementary note O2 and supplementary note O3, the determination information includes information for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to the special gaming state. In this way, the determination information includes the information for notifying that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game state, so that the player is notified that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game state. The game can be known in advance before the end of the game, and the player can enjoy the progress of the game with peace of mind.

[Appendix O4]
4. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to 3, wherein the determination information includes information regarding an expectation that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O4, the determination information includes information regarding the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is that the result is a special gaming state. In this way, by including the information regarding the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to be transitioned to the special game state, based on the information, the result of the transition determination for the notification game is estimated and the game You can enjoy the progress.

[Appendix O5]
A right holding means (41) for holding the upper limit number of rights for executing the notification game based on the result of the shift determination,
Holding display means (341) capable of displaying the number of rights held by the right holding means (41) as a holding display;
Further equipped with,
The hold display means (341) can display a notification game display for the notification game.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O4, wherein the determination information is presented by at least one of the hold display and the notification game display.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O5, the determination information is information presented by at least one of the hold display and the notification game display. That is, the determination information is presented by a so-called pending change. In this way, the judgment information is presented by the pending change, so that the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the pending change.

10: Gaming machine 31: Gaming board 316: Variable winning port 341: Symbol display section 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp Part 355: 5th individual lamp part 356: 6th individual lamp part 37: Clune device 373: Special out ball mouth 38: Game ball retention part 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper part 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display Parts A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Set value display section 46: Set value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

A main control that controls the progress of the notification game that determines whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the satisfaction of the determination condition and notifies the result of the transition determination. Means and
Notification effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute each of the plurality of types of notification effects,
Notification content determination means for determining the notification content of the notification performance determined to be executed by the notification performance execution determination means,
When the notification effect of the predetermined notification content is executed, a display effect execution means for executing a display effect of the predetermined notification content corresponding to the notification effect of the predetermined notification content after the execution of the notification effect,
Equipped with
The notification effect executing means,
Means for executing a specific type of notification effect from among the plurality of types of notification effects at a first timing during execution of the notification game,
Means for executing the specific type of notification effect at a second timing that is a timing later than the first timing during execution of the notification game,
Have
When the specific type of notification effect is executed at the second timing, as the notification effect, notification information including effect information not notified in the notification effect executed at the first timing is added as effect information. Equipped with means for executing notification production,
A game machine characterized in that the additional effect information is information that is more advantageous to the player than the content of the notification in the specific type of notification effect.

Images